Date: 2016-05-02T18:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Science Fiction
Description: A growing Empire... The end of the Sowir Dominion draws near as the Empire resumes its offensive. The retaking of Guxcacal home-world begins, as the Empire's fleets invade the remaining Sowir territory. But the Sowir still have surprises up their sleeves. Adrian Farkas awakens new abilities, buried deep inside the human genetic code by their ancestor Axull Darr. And with them the Empire gains all the knowledge contained inside the device left by their ancestor, the sum knowledge of the People, the first intelligent race in the universe and the ancestors of Humanity and the Nel. Adrian struggle
Publisher: Independently Published

Inheritance

Book five – Rise of the Empire

By

Ivan Kal

Copyright © 2016 by Ivan Kal

Art/Cover Copyright © 2016 by Nikola Nikolic

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including photocopying, recording, or other electronic or mechanical methods, without the prior written permission of the publisher, except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical reviews and certain other noncommercial uses permitted by copyright law.

This is a work of fiction. Names, characters, businesses, places, events and incidents are either the products of the author’s imagination or used in a fictitious manner. Any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, or actual events is purely coincidental.

Proofreader: Tom Shutt at Main Line Editing - http://www.mainlineediting.com/

Contact the artist chmiky.design@gmail.com

Table of Contents

Timeline

Prologue

PART ONE – WHAT WAR HAD WROUGHT

Chapter One

Chapter Two

Chapter Three

Chapter Four

Chapter Five

Chapter Six

Chapter Seven

Chapter Eight

Chapter Nine

Chapter Ten

Chapter Eleven

Chapter Twelve

Chapter Thirteen

Chapter Fourteen

Chapter Fifteen

Chapter Sixteen

Chapter Seventeen

Chapter Eighteen

Chapter Nineteen

Chapter Twenty

Interlude

PART TWO – INHERITANCE

Chapter Twenty-One

Chapter Twenty-Two

Chapter Twenty-Three

Chapter Twenty-Four

Chapter Twenty-Five

Chapter Twenty-Six

Chapter Twenty-Seven

Chapter Twenty-Eight

Chapter Twenty-Nine

Chapter Thirty

Chapter Thirty-One

Chapter Thirty-Two

Chapter Thirty-Three

Chapter Thirty-Four

Chapter Thirty-Five

Chapter Thirty-Six

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Chapter Thirty-Eight

Chapter Thirty-Nine

Chapter Forty

Chapter Forty-One

Chapter Forty-Two

Epilogue

Timeline

November 2103 - A faction of humanity—Olympus—leaves to colonize a planet in a star system 600 light years from Earth.

February 2159 - An alien race called the Ra’a’zani conquers Earth.

May 2164 - Olympus arrives at their destination; they name the planet Sanctuary. They get involved in a conflict against an alien race called the Sowir. Ally themselves with the Nel of Nuva.

March 2170 - Resistance from Earth contacts Olympus on Sanctuary, asking for aid.

December 2171 - Olympus and Sowir Dominion make a pact of non-aggression.

January 2172 - Olympus fleet arrives in the Sol system, engaging Ra’a’zani forces in the system. The battle for Earth results in narrow human victory, but the cost is the Earth. Ra’a’zani weapon makes the planet uninhabitable.

March 2172 – Year 1 of the Empire - Tomas Klein leader of Olympus creates the Empire.

December Year 30 of the Empire - Sowir attack Nelus system - homeworld of the Nel. Empire breaks the non-aggression pact with the Sowir by simultaneously sending aid to Nelus and invading the Sowir territory. Clan Leader Adrian Farkas overuses the Watchtower command interface, falling into a coma.

January – March Year 31 of the Empire - Adrian Farkas wakes up and hears the telepathic beacon from the sphere left by the originator of the human and Nel races, unlocking all the knowledge and technology contained inside.

Prologue

September; Year 35 of the Empire – Sanctuary

Clear Waters woke inside the prison that she had spent at least four cycles in, by her counting. She had been here ever since the Empire’s ships had invaded Sowir territory and their troops had captured her aboard one of their shipyards. The room was dimly lit, to accommodate her kind’s eyes. It was a simple room, with a small pool that served as her sleeping berth and a small “land” part of the room that contained a holographic projector on the ceiling and a device that translated Sowir telepathy into the spoken language of her captors. Her people had been using it to communicate with these animals for a long time.

The primitives were using the device to interrogate her. Only, the things that they had asked of her didn’t concern Sowir military, technology, or weapons. No, they asked her things about her telepathy, about the Sowir way of life, and about the Spirit of the Universe.

This Empire believed that the Sowir were fighting against them because they didn’t possess telepathy. And she had tried to explain that that was not the case, but the device was not perfect; things were lost in the translation. The true reason was that they fought against them because they couldn’t see/hear/feel the Spirit of the Universe. Sowir telepathy was what allowed them to see/hear/feel it, to see/hear/feel other life through the Universe. And they could see/hear/feel these primitive lifeforms. To them, they looked exactly like any other animal in the Universe. They were closed off, alone, their minds not capable of reaching out to the others of their kind. The Sowir had encounter lower lifeforms that possessed telepathy, but even they had been closed off, only capable of using it with their own kind, not having an imprint and a connection to the Spirit of the Universe.

The beings of the Empire were intelligent; they had technologies that the Sowir didn’t. And yet they were empty; there was no sign of the song of the Universe inside of them. How could the Sowir allow them to wander around when they were blind to the thing they claimed dominion over?

Still, her captors tried to find common ground, to make her see that they could live in peace, even when she had told them over and over that that would never happen. That insanity only served to justify Sowir thinking; if they could only reach out of their closed shells, they would have known that Clear Waters’s mind could not be changed. Ironically, if they could do that and see/hear/feel her, then that would have meant that the Sowir were wrong.

Her captors had shown her data from their battles with her people, and she knew that the Sowir were unlikely to win. And this time deception would not work, as the Empire knew that the Sowir didn’t value promises given to those who weren’t true beings. But the Sowir Dominion would never surrender; they would keep fighting and trying to find a way to win.

But Clear Waters would probably never walk free again. She didn’t even know where she was. She suspected that she was on the Empire’s capital world, but she had no proof. Her days would be spent alone, with occasional holographic visits from her captors, which allowed her some entertainment. But she knew that she would spend the rest of her life in the small cell, never again to feel another with an equal mind.

***

Beneath the Empire’s capital city, in a small room that was brightly illuminated, the hologram of Axull Darr floated above the sphere that contained his vast consciousness. Over the last three years, he had been going through many changes, ever since the human Adrian Farkas had answered the telepathic beacon inside the sphere. Before then, his main functions had been locked, but now he had access to everything.

Over time, he’d gained access to the hidden knowledge kept inside, as well as the rest of his memories. They were unlocked slowly, over time, so as to not damage his very delicate matrix. He was Axull Darr, or rather, one of three copies of his consciousness. He now knew everything, had access to the entire knowledge of the People. And he knew exactly why the original had done everything. He knew what the abomination that his people had unleashed was, and why he’d placed three seeds on three different worlds.

The Empire had done well; his plan had turned out far better than what he had hoped. The humans surprised him in particular. They evolved and advanced at a much faster rate than what he had predicted. And they were nothing like their ancestors; their entire existence was filled with strife. And they had very few traits in common with the People. Axull Darr’s people had evolved as the first truly intelligent beings in the galaxy. They’d risen unopposed, united from the beginning. They had spread their empire across the entire galaxy, and had lived at peace as the only race of higher intelligence for two billion years before they’d decided to help other life along. Over time, other races had joined them, both those that they’d personally uplifted and those that had reached the stars on their own. And the People had guided them, never really in danger from any of them; their knowledge and power had been so far beyond them that they’d had nothing to fear. The concept itself had been foreign to them.

The humans, on the other hand, thrived when in conflict, even if they tried to convince themselves otherwise. It was not something that Axull Darr could have predicted, or even intended. Their homeworld had been chosen to give them an environment that was different from the other two, in the hope that each of the three worlds would create interesting new evolutionary progressions. In a way, he had succeeded; the humans were different from the People. Their physical traits were inferior, and yet their cerebral faculties had reached a level of equality, with a few traits that were unique to them. The People had never been as aggressive or as driven. They had been much more similar to the Nel, who up until their human siblings had found them had had a distaste for fighting and war.

For humans, violence was not hard, and in many cases not even distasteful. They had reached far and explored avenues that Axull Darr and his people had lacked in. They had never known war, not like humans did, fighting against someone of equal or greater strength than their own. For the People, war had been a brief thing, as simple as bringing their advanced technology against their opponent.

The way that humans had advanced was exactly what Axull Darr had unknowingly hoped for. A people with the morals and values of the People, reinforced with sheer will, a violent and warlike personality, and tempered with skill and knowledge.

But for all that, they had also managed to interfere with Axull Darr’s vision. With their fledgling genetic knowledge, they had stopped the evolutionary path that he had lain deep inside their genetic code, for both themselves and the Nel that had joined their Empire. Their hereditary longevity had effectively stopped their natural evolution, and in doing so had halted his plans.

But even though they had gone against his plan, Axull Darr was probably the greatest mind that had ever been born to the People, and he had conceived of a scenario in which that could happen. That was why he had placed a failsafe within their genetic code, a failsafe that had been triggered rather spectacularly by Adrian.

All of the People had possessed the Sha, what humans called psionic abilities, both natural and engineered. Long ago, Sha was the general term used for any psionic ability that the People found and then added to their own, but over time it grew to encompass all of their powers. Axull Darr’s original plan had been to introduce those abilities slowly, over many generations. But their meddling had prevented that. Instead, Adrian who had managed to push his mind and body to its very limit and then beyond, was the first who had triggered the change. His mind and body had thus changed over the last three years to grant him all the abilities that his forefathers once possessed.

But no matter how brilliant Axull Darr’s solution was, there were limits. The failsafe was not able to do everything that his main plan required. His desire to allow his descendants to have a degree of evolutionary freedom had also made it impossible for the failsafe to do everything that he had intended. While the changes that Adrian had experienced were significant—an enhanced nervous system, a newly grown organ, and a slightly reinforced brain—the changes were nothing compared to what was really required for him to use those abilities to their fullest. The rest of his body was inadequate. His bones were fragile, his muscles weak, his flesh soft.

But there was time to work on that problem; perhaps the Empire’s scientists would manage to fix the problem on their own. Already Axull Darr had witnessed their ingenuity; they possessed things that the People had never thought off. Nothing that was more advanced, but they had technologies and uses for them that their forefathers would have never imagined. Even now, they were utilizing the knowledge of their ancestors in ways that he hadn’t foreseen, as they now had access to all the knowledge that the People had invented over the billions of years that they’d lived. Most of it they couldn’t comprehend, but the knowledge was there, and it had already pushed them far ahead of where they were before.

Now he had a different problem, one that he, or rather the original Axull Darr, had overlooked. Adrian now possessed the Sha, and neither he nor those around them could understand it. And he had no one to teach him. The original Axull Darr had been born in a time where every one of his people had had these abilities from birth; he’d grown up around people who used them, and he’d learned by watching and having others use their telepathy to aid in the learning. There had been no schools or teachers that taught someone the basic theory; they’d learned as they grew from experiences and having someone show them how it was done, much like a human child would learn to use its eyes or its voice.

And he, as a copy, had knowledge of those powers, but couldn’t actually use them. He had memory of what the results of using them should be, but he didn’t know how to do those things. And the original Axull Darr had left no data on the basics, probably because it didn’t even exist. He had plenty of data and instructions about the advanced use, but those were of no help. It was the same as if he told a person to climb the tallest mountain, when that person knew nothing about mountain climbing. Sure, he might get to the top, but the more likely result was that he would die trying.

Adrian had all the ingredients and tools, but no knowledge of how to use them. If he had been born with the power, some of it would have been instinctual; a degree of genetic memory was incorporated, but the failsafe had been degraded by the humanity’s own evolutionary path. The genetic memory was buried deep. But Adrian hadn’t been born with his abilities, which meant that he had to learn on his own, or somehow dig up the genetic memory. And so far he had only managed to figure out how to use four of the psionics, four aspects of the Sha that he received, and even that was through much pain and luck, and one of those he’d only gotten access to because he’d nearly died.

Axull Darr knew that it would take time for him to learn and master his abilities, and he hoped that the Empire had the time for its people to receive all of their ancestor’s gifts and improve on them. But his review of the Union ship historical data that had been recovered from Earth told him that time might be running out faster than the original Axull Darr had anticipated. The plan that Axull Darr’s kin had put in place to contain their mistake had not been as successful as they’d believed it would be; the war that the Union had been involved in proved that, as there was no mistaking the origin of the black ships that had attacked them. The original Axull Darr had known that it wouldn’t work; that was why he’d refused to have any part in that plan and had decided to craft his own, which, while preforming far ahead of what he’d imagined, was still nowhere close to reaching the end goal. The Empire needed to grow, and do so fast if there was any chance of stopping what would inevitably come their way.

***

A ringing noise woke Fleet Commander Bethany Jones from her slumber. Slowly her eyes opened, and as her consciousness returned, she shut off the message prompt with her implant. She swung her legs off her bed and stood slowly, then made her way to the bathroom. She didn’t bother to turn on the lights; she effortlessly walked through the dark in the commander’s quarters on her flagship, the EWS Audacious.

The Audacious was a Mk 2 dreadnought-class warship. At one time, these ships had been one of the most powerful in the Empire’s fleet. Now, with all the new technologies available to the Empire, they were outdated. And yet these ships were the backbone of the Empire’s fleets, and the first line in their war against the Sowir Dominion. For the last five years, Bethany’s Second Fleet had been tasked with taking and securing the systems they invaded.

The Empire was more advanced than the Sowir, but still, that didn’t mean that they were immune to losses. That was why they had been very careful in their war. The Empire had taken 7 major and 4 minor Sowir systems. The 7 that they’d taken had once belonged to the Consortium; more precisely, they belonged to the Nel, Mtural, and Pouute. Each of those systems were once major shipbuilding systems, which was why they had been targeted first. The Emperor wanted to take and make use of the infrastructure already there, which was the main reason why the war had dragged on. If they hadn’t needed to clear all hostile forces from the stations, shipyards, and planets, they would have been free to simply destroy them and move on to the next. But they also took the time to study Sowir computers and their ship designs. They also needed the time to develop technologies they recieved from the sphere, and to build weapons for their army, equipment they would need in order to take back Guxaxac.

Instead, it took them three years to secure eleven systems they had acquired, and that had spread them thin. With the Empire’s trans-space technology, they could move much faster than the Sowir, who were limited by hyperspace, but the Sowir still managed to poke and irritate. And the Empire forces couldn’t leave unsecured systems alone, as they needed the infrastructure and resources to fuel the Empire’s expansion.

Beth had spent all of that time on the front, and even though she was allowed to take time and return to Sanctuary, she never did, which had only put more strain on the relationship with her husband, Harry. Technically, they were separated, but during their last conversation in person they had decided to try and fix their marriage. But Beth and Harry both knew that their hearts just weren’t in it. Their lives were too different. Harry never could make peace with the nature of Bethany’s calling, and he knew that she would never sacrifice it for him. Over the years, they had a few conversations over the comms, but they were always short, filled with awkward silences. In a way, she knew that she had been avoiding the problem. She didn’t want to admit that she had been wrong when she’d agreed to marry him. But now, years later, she knew that she did not marry him for love. She did it because she was simply going through the motions; it was what one was supposed to do. And no matter how much she tried to convince herself otherwise, she had done it because of Adrian.

She was in love with him once. But their relationship was never traditional, not even back in the Sol system when they’d attended the Academy together. And she had waited for him, until Harry had come along and she’d decided not to wait any longer. Ironically, it was her getting married to Harry that had made Adrian confess his feelings to her. And her reaction hadn’t been so good. She’d been cruel, as she had been when they first met. She had lashed out at him, hurt him. She knew that, and yet she had convinced herself that it didn’t matter, that she would be happy with Harry. And she’d been wrong. She had lost her best friend in Adrian, and slowly over time had lost contact with her other classmates. She had never even attempted to mend fences, to reach out; instead, she’d allowed her pride to govern her decisions.

She knew that she needed to change, to try and make up for her actions over the years. And she had decided to do that after the war was over. She was aware that in a way that was cowardly of her, but as Fleet Commander, she couldn’t allow any distractions. Especially now, as she could feel that the time for another offensive was near. The facilities they had acquired were more than what they needed; already a few shipyards had been upgraded with fabricating technology and would soon start production. And the next offensive was going to be very different, as now they didn’t need to take additional Sowir facilities. Soon, the short respite would reach an end, and this time the Empire was going to roll over them and destroy them for good.

Bethany hurried and cleaned up in the bathroom, then made her way to her desk and turned on her holo table. The space in front of her came to life, with dozens of holo windows, saved work from last night. With a gesture, she cleared them and brought up the message from the Fleet. She had been expecting it, and hoped that it was the order for the new offensive.

She read the message from the Fleet and then slumped, disappointed. It was not what she had expected. She frowned as she read through it again. Her orders were to take all of the Second Fleet’s Mark Two dreadnoughts and return with them to Sanctuary. Her fleet’s Kraken-class dreadnoughts, along with the auxiliaries, were to stay and protect the front.

Bethany had no doubt that the Kraken-class dreadnoughts were up to the task, especially when all of the systems that had been taken had already been reinforced with defense platforms and the Third Fleet. Her orders made it clear that it was only her ships that were being recalled.

Beth sighed, then formed messages for her staff, organizing a meeting; she would need to inform them of their orders. Looking at the message one last time, she felt a taste of trepidation. She would be going to Sanctuary, and now she couldn’t hide behind the war. She would need to face Harry, and a lot sooner than she had planned.

PART ONE – WHAT WAR HAD WROUGHT

Chapter One

October; Year 35 of the Empire – Sanctuary

Adrian Farkas Reiss turned his eyes upwards towards dark, teal-colored night sky of Sanctuary. The color came from the reflected light of the gas nebula that surrounded the Sanctuary system and the two moons orbiting the planet. There were a few stars in the sky, other planets in the system and their moons. But there were more of them than there had been when humanity had first arrived on this planet. Since then the system had grown, and many of those stars were in fact stations or shipyards.

And he too was different. He had come a long way from the small orphan boy on Earth. Now, he commanded a fleet, he was one of the greatest fighters in the Empire, and he was the leader of Warpath, one of the six Clans of the Empire. When he looked back on the time he’d spent on Earth, almost a century ago, it seemed like such a small part of his life.

Adrian sighed and continued walking down the streets of Olympus City towards his destination. His arm was bent at the elbow, and above his open palm a small lead ball floated, held there with his telekinesis. At his sides followed two massive beasts. Akash and Sora, twin wolions, animals native to Sanctuary. Adrian had adopted them long ago just after they’d been born, because their mother had died. The two were empaths, capable of communication by sharing emotions. He had raised them, and they had become a kind of a family. They followed him everywhere.

As he walked, he readjusted his coat over his skin-suit. Everyone in the Empire now wore them; the clothes of old had been mostly left behind, with the exception of overcoats, which served to satisfy the need for individuality and fashion. The suits were skin tight, based on the skin-suits that Nel invented; they looked to be one piece, but were actually two, lower and upper. When not used, they were loose, and could be put on like any other piece of clothing. Once on, with a command from the wearer’s imp, the suit would become skin tight and meld into one piece. The clothing had some solid pieces that satisfied the need for modesty, for women across their chest, and both for men and women over the groin. The suits were superior to anything else, as they could protect from both cold and heat. The overcoats were simply for fashion, and Adrian’s overcoat was dark blue with black sleeves.

Walking down the street, he reflected on the fact that he had spent the last three years on Sanctuary. The reason was the many changes that occurred to his body as he’d triggered the failsafe engineered into human genetic code, and gained psionic abilities, what his ancestors had called the Sha. And that power came with a big price. He had spent eight months in a bed after the change truly kicked in.

The change had occurred in stages, with the first one being what he’d experienced after he’d pushed himself to the limit during the battle with the Sowir. His brain and nervous system had ‘evolved,’ changed, and lain the groundwork for future changes. That first change had resulted in him spending a month unconscious. The second stage had come after he’d heard the telepathic beacon from Axull Darr’s sphere. A growth had appeared inside his body, below his left collarbone, inside his ribcage. At first, his doctors had assumed it was a fast-growing tumor, until Axull Darr had told them that it was actually a newly formed organ. The growth had then made connections to his bloodstream and nervous system, which had put Adrian in bed for another three months as the doctors watched and recorded every second of the change.

The third stage had started as soon as the second had ended, which resulted in him getting random muscle cramps that could last anywhere from a moment to hours, itching across every single part of his body, random pains that radiated out of the new organ, and headaches that lasted for days. The last stage had lasted for about four months. But thankfully it had ended, and Adrian had received the Sha. Each of the psionics required energy in order to be used, which was stored inside the Nursha, the organ that was the part of the package. The organ took a small part of the energy that the body got from food or drink and body heat, and stored it to be used later.

The first psionic that he’d discovered was telepathy, which he’d received after the first stage. Each psionic had a name that Axull Darr had provided from his records, but Adrian had decided to call them by their human names. Humanity already had knowledge of such, or similar, abilities, whether from fiction or examples from nature.

Telepathy, as it appeared, wasn’t as easy to use as he’d thought it would be. The beacon he’d heard had been specifically designed to reach past a person’s innate defenses, and he’d answered it instinctually. Trying to enter someone else’s mind was another story. No matter how much he tried, he couldn’t make it work. Occasionally, he could reach the point where he was almost there, when it felt like he was listening to a conversation but was just a step outside of the hearing range. In those instances, he could hear a kind of noise, and every now and then he could make out a word, but nothing more. Telepathy was like another sense, only no one around him could emit anything that he could pick up. But always when he tried to reach someone’s mind, when he opened himself up, he could feel a kind of noise that his mind usually filtered out. He’d learned from the data in the sphere that that was actually called a telepathic echo. Noise of the galaxy—supernovas, black holes, and other events all created noise similar to radio noise. But thankfully he didn’t need to hear it all the time.

Telepathy wasn’t like some invisible mystical power. The People had had devices that could detect it, measure it, and even boost it.

The second was telekinesis, which had come to him after stage three. Only, it too was not what he’d expected. He couldn’t use it to lift heavy objects and throw them around as he’d hoped; at most, he could lift a few rocks. But according to Axull Darr, every psionic was like a muscle and could be strengthened through training, meaning he could theoretically train his telekinesis to the heights where he could do that, which was why he was starting with ‘lifting’ the heavy lead ball with his mind. He didn’t really need to use his arm, but it made the exercise easier, as his mind associated the ability with the movement of his arm.

But the third was the one that Adrian liked the most, an ability to expel a kinetic blast—or kinetikinesis. That was the only psionic that he could use fairly well, probably because it was very simple. He now had microscopic emitters on the palms of his hands, which he could use to expel kinetic force directly, using the energy stored in his body. The problem was that the more energy he used, the greater the feedback, as he’d learned two years ago when he, along with the researchers who had been helping him develop the psionics, had tried to see how strong of a blast he could fire off.

Up until that point, he had been trying out small blasts, barely using any of the energy that his newly formed organ stored. The strongest one he’d used had had the equivalent kinetic power of a very strong punch. The feedback from those was not all that bad; his arms would usually feel as if he had punched something relatively hard, the bones and muscles in his arms would vibrate a bit, and his palms would go numb for a moment. So naturally they’d wanted to see what would happen if he tried to use as much energy as he could. That, as it turned out, had been a very bad idea.

They’d been inside the testing room that was some five meters across, with Adrian standing on the one side of the room and the pressure machine placed on the other. Adrian had braced himself, pulled as much energy as he could, and then let it go through his right arm. Immediately, he’d known that something was wrong as he emptied all of the energy his body had stored. As the energy traveled through the channels in his arm, he’d felt pain that lasted for only a moment as the energy reached the emitters on his palms. Already, he could feel the vibrations in his bones, and then as the blast left his arm, the feedback started.

His fingers had bent backwards, and every bone in his hand had broken as the cascading effect traveled from the emitters backwards. Then the vibrations had torn through his arm, shattering the bones of his forearm, then his elbow. The feedback had been so powerful that his arm had been slung backwards; the force of it had ripped his arm out of the shoulder socket with such strength that it had broken his right collarbone. The feedback had then moved further, now diminished, but still powerful enough to crack the top of his ribcage and send small bone fragments to pierce his lungs.

The violent feedback had thrown him spinning to the floor in agony, which he’d hit with his back. He’d had the strength to look at his mangled arm before he blacked out—there had been bones sticking out of it and blood flowing freely through the punctures in his skin. Fortunately for him, the Empire’s medical technology had advanced far enough that he hadn’t needed to spend the rest of his life with one arm. He’d spent the next six months unconscious in a healing tank, as medical nanites worked tirelessly to regrow and rebuild his arm. This was aided by another psionic that he’d gotten access to unconsciously, as his body had tried to heal itself: vitakinesis—the ability to accelerate and guide his body’s healing processes. But even with that, it hadn’t been an easy endeavor. On the upside, his blast had cracked the pressure plate and sent the measuring device smashing into the wall, which he’d found out six months later when he’d finally awoken.

Thankfully, the time he’d spent in the tank hadn’t been wasted. Long before he’d gained psionics, he had developed another ability, what he called mind space. It was born from the unique interactions between his brain and his implant, which had at the time been experimental. The ability allowed him to retreat inside his own mind, where time moved at a different pace than that outside, which gave him the chance to shadow train his martial arts well ahead of anyone else in the Empire. What he learned and trained inside transferred over into the waking world, because Adrian had complete control over his body. There was very little that his mind did that he was not aware of or able to control in some way. He could use the full strength of his body without the limits that the brain unconsciously put on it. He didn’t need muscle memory when he could execute any movement exactly as he imagined it.

His hospitalization had given him years of training and self-reflection. There was more to it than just the ability to shadow train. He could relive old memories, refresh pathways in his brain leading to memories long forgotten. Although, ever since his brain had been altered and he’d gained psionics, the memories were easier to reach, and didn’t fade away as quickly as they once had once he left mind space. And no longer did he need to have his implant and Iris, his AI, take control of his body’s functions when he was inside. His mind now had the capacity to do both.

After they’d gained access to the sphere and the knowledge of the People, Adrian had lost days trying to find any information on his ability. But in the end, he couldn’t find anything; the People had had nothing like mind space, which to Adrian suggested that it was an ability that was born out of the human evolutionary path. There was a lot of evidence in the data that suggested that human imagination was more developed than that of the People. Mind space might just be the next evolutionary step from that.

But the reason why he was walking the streets of Olympus City was because his body wasn’t at the same level as that of his ancestors, for whom the psionic abilities had been intended. His body simply couldn’t handle the stress that the full use of the psionics entailed. He could push his natural limits by training, but he would never be able to use them to the same extent as the People were. Which was why he was now standing in front of the Empire’s leading research center.

“Nervous?” A shape appeared in front of him. A holographic representation of Adrian’s personal AI, Iris. She appeared as a small, fiery woman clothed in a dress, something like fairies from the old stories. Her features were a meld of Laura Reiss, Adrian’s adoptive mother, and Bethany, his first and only love.

The two of them had been through a lot together. Her previous home had been an AI core inside the implant in Adrian’s head. But once he had triggered the change, the implant had been in the way, so Iris had ordered the nanites in his body to remove them. Thankfully, her core had survived, and she now had a new home in the form of a bracer that Adrian wore. It came with a few upgrades, one of which was the ability to project holograms in the two-meter radius around the bracer. The drawback was that she could no longer talk inside his head, as at the time he hadn’t had an implant inside his head. Since then the Empire had gained a lot of knowledge from Axull Darr’s sphere, and they had managed to build an implant that could interface with his slightly changed brain, so now Adrian once again had an implant inside his head, which Iris could access from the outside, so they could talk internally again. But Iris and he had decided not to transfer her core back inside; there was no need, and with her being external, they could upgrade her hardware easily.

“A bit,” Adrian responded, looking fondly at the fiery shape floating in front him.

“Don’t worry, I doubt that Seo-yun would have called you if she wasn’t sure that they had something,” she said, and then disappeared.

Adrian nodded, then let the small, heavy ball fall into his palm and put it into his pocket. He entered the building and made his way to the second floor, already knowing the way. A minute later, he arrived at his destination. He approached the desk clerk and announced himself.

“You can go in, Clan Leader. She is expecting you,” the clerk said.

Adrian smiled and entered the office, Akash and Sora following behind him. Inside, he was met by a short woman who, upon noticing him, got up and walked around to meet him.

“Ah, Adrian. Thank you for coming,” she said.

“I couldn’t refuse a call from you, Seo-yun,” Adrian said, smiling at the older woman. Hyeon Seo-yun was the Empire’s Minister of Science and the partner of Emperor Tomas Klein. Also, one of Adrian’s closest friends. She and Tomas had been together for a long time, and although they’d never married, they did make their relationship public. Marriage was something that occurred less and less in the Empire; people didn’t feel the need to validate their feelings with a written agreement. They just started being a family. Adrian was envious of their relationship; it was something that he desired for himself, yet had never found.

“I gather that you finally have something to help with my little problem,” Adrian said.

“I’m sorry that it has taken so long, Adrian,” she said seriously. “But yes, I think that we finally have a solution.”

Adrian looked at her expectantly as she gestured for him to take a seat. Seo-yun shook her head as he made himself comfortable and she sat across from him on the two couches to the side of the room.

“Times have changed so much since Earth. For the newer generations born here, this is their way of life; they have never known anything else. But we from the old world know, and remember.” She looked at him with a sad smile. “Did you know that we were just a few generations away from awakening the psionics by ourselves naturally?” she asked, but continued before Adrian could answer. “Fifty years, a hundred at the most, and the code in our DNA would have unlocked on its own. But we meddled…”

“So have you found a solution?” Adrian asked.

“I am confident that we have. But it will not be easy, nor painless,” she said.

“I figured, but I still need to do it. Having these abilities and not being able to use them to their full potential is frustrating.”

“Are you sure that you want to do it? We are just at the cusp of figuring out how to trigger the change in embryos; in a few years, we will have children who will be able to take advantage of everything that Axull Darr engineered. In a couple of decades, there will be plenty of people with psionics.”

“And what of us who were born without them? We will be inferior; we need to change too. And besides, we know that it is possible for us to trigger the failsafe if we push ourselves far enough. We need a way of making ourselves as able as the new generations.”

Seo-yun sighed. “Alright,” she said, defeated.

“Tell me what you have in mind.”

“We can’t trigger the same upgrades as what Axull Darr imagined to come naturally; for those, we require an undeveloped body, so we can only trigger those switches in embryos. But there are other ways of upgrading your body. It won’t be the same. Actually, if we succeed, your body will be better in some ways, and worse in others.”

“What do you mean?”

“What we need to do is reinforce your skeletal system, muscles, and skin, make them strong enough to handle the stress of your psionics. Your nervous system is already on par; it has been upgraded fully, so it is the same as that of the People. Axull Darr made sure that our nervous system evolves along a strict path, but for the rest of our bodies, he left some room for natural evolution. The change affected your organs, too. They have been reinforced a bit—not fully, but enough that it doesn’t matter. It is the rest that Axull Darr couldn’t change with the failsafe, partly because we have already meddled and changed things, and partly because our natural evolution differs from that of the People, courtesy of the environment we evolved in. It is just something that he didn’t anticipate. The same would happen to the Nel if they triggered the failsafe,” Seo-yun said.

“Alright, and how do you intend to make that happen?” Adrian asked, leaning forward.

“We possess a lot of genetic material that Olympus brought here, samples from many animals from Earth and such. What we are going to do is infuse your bones with the DNA of limpet sea snails; more precisely, their teeth. We will change your bone structure to that of limpet teeth, with a few of our own additions.”

“Snail teeth?” Adrian asked incredulously.

“Yes, they possess the strongest biological material we have ever discovered. We can apply that unique structure to your own. But we will add some other things that we have developed precisely for this procedure. We will add carbon net over the bones to make them even stronger. The drawback is that this will almost double your bone density, which will make you heavier. But we will also reinforce your muscles. We can use one of the genetic upgrades that the People used for themselves; it is not something that they were born with, but an add-on. They were in the habit of altering themselves constantly, at least in the early days of their civilization. It is an old treatment, but we have managed to rework it a bit and adapt it for you. It will make your muscles denser, giving you more strength and speed.”

“Wait,” Adrian interrupted. “You have access to the treatments that they used on themselves?”

“Yes,” Seo-yun said slowly.

“Why don’t we just use another one of those for my skeletal system?” Adrian asked.

“We can’t,” Seo-yun said. “Those were developed for their genetic makeup, and while we do possess a lot of their DNA, Axull Darr infused it in a lifeform from Earth and made sure that we could be shaped by our environment. Our bones are different from theirs; we can’t upgrade them by using their methods once they are developed.”

“Okay, then. What else?”

“We will add a bit of our own upgrades to your muscle fibers, like carbon nanotubes coated in a graphene net, which will add a significant boost to your strength. Your skin is a bit easier, as it resembles that of the People enough that we can again modify their methods. We can give you a high resistance to radiation.” She stopped and looked at him. “That’s it. We have already tested these upgrades on a clone body grown from your DNA, so we know that we can do it.”

Adrian looked at her, impressed. They had already tested it out using a clone body. Cloning was forbidden in the Empire, technically. Humanity had experimented with it even back on Earth, but quickly they’d realized that there was something wrong with clones. Some said that they lacked souls, others that it was simply a mistake in the process, but every human clone that had been born had gone insane. And there had only been a few before cloning was banned. Technically, it was forbidden for a brain to be cloned. They still grew body parts and organs for those who couldn’t be helped without them. When she said a clone body, she referred to exactly that—an exact body double to Adrian, only without a brain. No consciousness, only flesh, mechanically kept ‘alive’ by machines.

“You said that these changes would have some drawbacks?”

“Yes. You won’t be able to use Vitakinesis to heal your bones or muscles. At least, we don’t think it would work, but we know very little about psionics. We believe that you would need to rely on our medical nanites. You should still be able to affect your flesh, organs, and blood, but nothing else. That psionic wasn’t designed with our upgrades in mind, and we still don’t know enough about them to be able to modify them. Also, you will be needing more oxygen in order to function, so we will need to increase your lung capacity.”

“And how long would this procedure take?” Adrian asked.

“Three months for the procedure, during which you will need to be put under. And another four months of recovery and rehabilitation,” Seo-yun said.

Adrian grimaced. “Seven months…I was hoping that I could have this done faster.”

Seo-yun smiled at his comment. “We can’t rush if we are going to do this, Adrian. There is too much room for error.”

“She is right, Adrian,” Iris said as she appeared above his shoulder. “Nothing like this has been attempted before.”

“I know. But that means that I won’t be able to do it now. Not when we are about to restart the war with the Sowir,” Adrian said, disappointed.

Seo-yun twitched when he mentioned the war. “Actually…there was one more thing I wanted to talk with you about… ” she said hesitantly. “I think that there is another way that we can approach the Sowir problem, perhaps with less bloodshed.”

Adrian raised an eyebrow in interest. “Laura didn’t tell me anything,” he said.

Seo-yun shrugged. “I think that she is a bit overprotective of you. And I can understand that, but there is something that we haven’t tried yet.”

Adrian was just about to ask her what when it came to him. He narrowed his eyes at her. “You want me to talk to the Sowir prisoners.”

Seo-yun looked away guiltily for a moment, then turned back and looked him straight in the eye. “We have been trying to figure out the reason for their actions. And while our prisoners have been adamant that it wasn’t because of telepathy, I know that it is a part of it. The Sowir have never before encountered another intelligent race that possessed it. We have a chance to learn more about them, maybe even open a line of communication. Don’t tell me that you don’t want a better solution than us just wiping them out,” she said loudly.

“You know the reason why I haven’t been allowed near the Sowir,” Adrian said slowly. “I know nothing about my telepathy, I can’t even make it work on other humans; I have no one to teach me how to use it, let alone how to defend myself from other influence. And the Sowir have shown that they can use their telepathy to reach into our minds. We don’t know if me having telepathy will make it harder or easier for them to influence me.”

“I know, but we need to take this chance. You might even learn something about how to use it. And I promise you that I will lower the risks as much as possible. We will have the prisoner restrained, and at the first sign of something off from you, or on your signal, I will release sleeping gas inside the room,” she said eagerly.

Adrian narrowed his eyes again. “You have already put things in place, haven’t you? You knew that a chance of learning more about my psionics is something that I couldn’t turn down.”

She gave him an impish smile. “I have known you for a long time, Adrian. I understand what makes you tick.”

“Fine, but no word about it to Laura. And we need to do it fast. The war summit is in five days.”

Seo-yun clapped her hands happily. “We can do it tomorrow, I’ll make arrangements.” She stood and looked fondly at him. “Thank you, Adrian.”

Chapter Two

Sanctuary

“You’ll knock us out if I start acting strangely?” Adrian asked, for the tenth time.

“Of course. I’ll have Luna monitor your vitals, but I won’t do anything unless Iris says so,” Seo-yun responded, reassuring him. In the background, people moved around the mobile station.

Adrian sighed, trying to get rid of the last of his nervousness. The Sowir prisoner had been put to sleep, then restrained and transferred outside to a specially built container. They would wake her after Adrian entered so that they could see her reaction, which he thought would be pointless, as the Sowir telepathy translator wasn’t in the room; the Sowir wouldn’t fit inside with restraints on. The only reactions they would see would come from Adrian.

The data from the sphere suggested that Adrian’s telepathy could adapt to telepathy of any other being, and allow them to understand each other as if they were speaking the same language. Only they had no idea if Adrian’s telepathy was properly developed.

“Don’t worry, Adrian, I’ll make sure that we shoot you in the head at the first sign of you turning into a mindless zombie,” the floating holo of Iris said.

“Ha, ha, ha,” Adrian retorted dryly. “You are not making me feel any better.” He took another breath to gather himself, and then he started walking down the long path to the container. Akash and Sora, his constant shadows, stayed behind, watching him go. It had taken a lot of convincing to get them to stay, because while they couldn’t speak with him, they were incredibly intelligent, and could understand him perfectly.

The Sowir telepathy had a tentative range of around 150 meters. Which was why the mobile monitoring station had been placed outside of that range. The container was rigged with sleeping gas canisters that would knock both Adrian and the Sowir out if anything went wrong.

He reached the container and entered, hearing the click that confirmed he was locked in with the Sowir. He didn’t worry about his safety physically; he knew that he could take the prisoner even without any weapons, especially now that he had limited access to kinetikinesis. What he worried about was that he wouldn’t be able to keep the Sowir outside of his head. To date, the Sowir hadn’t been able to influence an intelligent being to the extent to take over, only distract. But they didn’t know how him having telepathy would factor in that.

“Okay, wake her up,” Adrian said over his implant’s comms to Seo-yun and her team.

Adrian saw a light on the band attached on the Sowir’s head go from green to red, and then over the next few minutes he watched as she woke. First, she moved slowly, as if she was still asleep, but the restraints prevented much movement. With every moment that passed, Adrian felt something else. Like a noise, a presence that he could see not with his eyes, but with his mind. A shiver passed over him. In some ways, it felt like the sphere’s beacon, only this one wasn’t distracting him. The beacon had been focused on him, a call, Adrian had realized. This was simply there. It felt similar to how it felt when he was in a room with someone but didn’t see them. He knew that they were there because his senses told him they were. Actually, it was exactly like that; his telepathic sense was telling him that there was someone with him in the room with the same ability.

“I can feel her,” he said over his imp both to Seo-yun and Iris.

“Can you speak with her?” Iris asked.

“She is not fully awake yet,” Adrian said, convinced that he was right. He could feel the presence grow. Then, as consciousness returned, he could see the moment the Sowir realized that she was restrained, because she stilled. Her small all-black eyes opened and probably saw him.

For a while, nothing happened, and Adrian just stood there looking at her. Then he felt the Sowir reach out to his mind. It was nothing like what he’d imagined it would be. As soon as she made contact, he felt her shock, longing, and joy. It surprised him, threatened to overwhelm him, and he felt as his telepathy cut her off, throwing her out. He had acted on instinct.

“Are you alright, Adrian?” Iris asked.

“Yes…It overwhelmed me for a moment, but I threw her out on instinct,” Adrian said.

“She tried to take over your mind?” Iris asked, alarmed.

“No, no,” he said quickly. “I think that she was just surprised, like me.”

“You want to continue?” Iris asked.

“Yes,” he answered.

Now that he had seen how she’d reached out, he tried to do the same. The Sowir had retreated back, her eyes open, watching him. He tried to use telepathy to reach to her, but it proved harder than he’d thought it would be. He sighed in frustration. “Can you do it again?” he said in Nel, knowing that it was likely that the Sowir understood the language.

For a few moments, nothing happened, and then he felt a presence on his mind again. Only this time it was more controlled. Then, again on instinct, he tried to reach out. He felt something change, like he made a connection.

“Hello?” Adrian tried to say. When she didn’t immediately respond, he prepared to try again, but was interrupted by a voice in his head.

“Who are you?” he heard in his head. Caught a bit off guard with the clarity of communication, Adrian took a moment to compose himself, and then he answered.

“My name is Adrian Farkas, I am leader of Warpath Clan of the Empire,” he sent, deciding to go with a more professional exchange.

“I am Clear Waters,” she returned, and Adrian got an impression of an immense body of water that was completely clear and pristine. She then continued. “How are you speaking with me? I see no device. But your Empire is devious in its advances. Perhaps something like your implants?” she asked.

“No implants. I am speaking the same way you are. Through telepathy.”

“That is not possible, your kind do not possess it. What is the purpose of this?”

“We did not possess it, true. But we have evolved. I am the first to have awakened this ability. More will follow,” Adrian sent. Clear Waters remained silent; he could feel that they were still connected. But somehow he knew that the connection was small, only for the purpose of communicating. He was certain that if he wished, and knew how, he could push further and read her mind. He allowed her time to think, and waited silently until she decided to speak again.

“How are you mimicking a connection to the Spirit of the Universe?” she asked, and Adrian could feel her unease.

“What do you mean?” He tried to feel around him, to try and see what she was talking about, only to fail.

“You do not appear closed off, like the rest of your kind, like all other races that we have encountered. You have an imprint and connection to the Spirit of the Universe,” she sent.

“Can you explain to me what you mean? I don’t understand.” Adrian asked.

She deepened the connection, and showed him what she meant from her perspective, showed him how she saw him. Adrian immediately recognized what she was talking about; he had been familiar with it for some time. What she had shown him was what the People called a telepathic echo. He could feel her reverence for what she believed to be some higher unifying force. Yet the People had believed the same thing to be nothing more than ambient noise.

He looked at what she called the connection to the Spirit of the Universe, what the People knew as simple telepathic feedback, feeding into the echo that existed everywhere in the universe.

But to the Sowir, it was so much more. Adrian could imagine how it had happened. From early in their development, they’d had telepathy; they could always sense the echo. Unlike the People, who had added telepathy to themselves after they had encountered it in a lower lifeform—after they had enhanced and improved it—the Sowir had evolved with it. And they had no mechanism to tune the noise out. And for a race that had evolved deep in the oceans, it made sense that they’d looked for answers to their existence. And it had been there, always in the background. They’d interpreted it as a force of creation, the same way as the early humans had looked at the sun, the moon, and the stars and had seen gods.

“I can feel it too,” Adrian sent slowly, showing her how he saw it, taking great care to keep his opinions to himself.

“That is impossible,” she sent shakily. “We couldn’t have been wrong.”

“You told us that you believe that only those that are connected to the Spirit of the Universe are true beings. And that you fought against other intelligent races because they weren’t true beings, according to your belief, at least,” Adrian sent forcefully. “But you never entertained the possibility that we could eventually evolve to the point where we could make a connection.”

“It never entered our thinking that you could one day become true beings. That we would not be alone,” Clear Waters sent, and Adrian could feel a river of emotions and thought go by too fast for him to identify them. But the stream calmed and he could feel her horror and shame. “We made a mistake.”

Adrian took a few steps closer, looking up at the taller Sowir, and yet he could feel her being intimidated. He locked his eyes with hers. “You did. Every life that you took was precious. Your belief might be wrong or it might be right; it is not on me to judge a belief. But you should not have taken it upon yourselves to wipe out other intelligent life just because they were different than you. But there is still time for you to help save lives. My people are about to start the last offensive against your kind. We will win. And if you force us, we will wipe you out completely.”

***

Emperor’s palace

Tomas Klein, ruler of the Empire, sat in his small office with three other people. Two of which were currently sitting on one of his couches, cowering under the wrath of Fleets Master Laura Reiss.

“The risk was minimal. I took all the precautions to make sure there weren’t any incidents,” Seo-yun, his longtime partner, defended herself.

“Minimal!” Laura yelled out. “There wasn’t supposed to be any risk at all!”

“Everything went according to plan, and I am perfectly fine,” Adrian chimed in.

Laura swung towards him and prepared to rip into him when Tomas decided that it was enough.

“Laura,” he said firmly. She stopped and turned to look at him. For a moment, he could see her debating whether to ignore him or not, but finally she turned and walked to the window that overlooked the city.

Tomas cleared his throat and then turned to the two sitting on the couch. “What did you find out?”

“For starters, I know why the Sowir started wiping out other races,” Adrian said.

“We already knew that, because we don’t hear the Spirit of the Universe,” Tomas added.

“I mean, I know what they think this Spirit of the Universe is.”

Tomas raised an eyebrow, and made a Nel gesture for him to continue.

“Well, they think that this Spirit of the Universe is what binds all life, or rather all true life, together,” Adrian started. “In reality, what they call the Spirit of the Universe is actually a telepathic echo, the background noise of the Universe. At least, that is what the People thought. But I didn’t tell her that.”

“And how does this help us?” Tomas asked.

Adrian started to speak, but Seo-yun interrupted him. “When she realized that Adrian now fits into their belief of what makes a being real, she felt horror. She knew that her people had made a mistake; they hadn’t taken into consideration that a being could eventually develop telepathy and the ability to hear what they believe is the Spirit of the Universe,” she said enthusiastically. “If we show them that Adrian can hear it, they will understand that all life has potential to become what they believe is to be ‘intelligent.’ We can start talks, make peace.”

Laura turned and looked directly at Seo-yun. “Peace?” she asked scornfully. “After all they have done? They have wiped out two other races!”

“So, what, we will wipe them out in turn?” Seo-yun threw back. “What gives us the right to decide that they cannot be redeemed?”

“We can’t just leave them be, Seo-yun.” Tomas said. “And how would we even give this information to them? They don’t respond to our comms, and even if they are listening, they would not believe in it, not even from their own. Not from those that were captured. They will suspect a trick. The only way would be to get to their bigger worlds, directly to their leaders. But how would we do that? They keep millions of their agents close to them.” Tomas shook his head. “Let’s assume that you get them to listen, and we come to agreement. What then? We just let them go? Why even get them to talk if we are not willing to let them go unpunished?”

“We have no right to judge them, Tomas,” Seo-yun said.

“Why not?” Tomas asked. “What gives anyone in the universe the right to do anything? Nothing; we take the right ourselves. And the Sowir have committed genocide twice, maybe even more. Those they killed deserve justice.”

“So we kill them all?” Seo-yun asked.

“I agree with Tomas that they shouldn’t be absolved of their crimes,” Adrian said, looking at Seo-yun with regret. “But I also think that we should try and communicate with them. They must realize that they can’t win against us. If we can make them see that we are equal to them, we might be able to get them to surrender and keep their word.”

“Surrender under what terms?” Laura asked.

“We follow the same plan we already have, only they do it willingly. They abandon all systems they control, they stop using their agents, and agree to be confined to their home system. Agree to have our forces permanently inside their system. They will be allowed to move around the system, but they will be forbidden to have ships with FTL capability,” Adrian said.

“This all rests on us being able to convince them that Adrian can hear this Spirt or whatever it is,” Laura said.

“Yes.” Tomas nodded. “Which is why we are going to continue with our planned offensive. Adrian can try and find a way to open communications. Otherwise, we continue with our original plan.”

Chapter Three

October; Guxaxac – Guxcacul homeworld

Company Leader Sahib Adin read through the last communiqué from the Fleet Headquarters, letting him know that they would be starting a new offensive soon and telling him the timeline for the liberation of Guxaxac. He’d received the message through an FTL communicator that they had brought from the Empire. It didn’t communicate through normal space, so it being deep underground didn’t add any interference. Sahib sighed. He had spent three years living underground, surrounded by Guxcacul, as one of the Empire’s liaisons to the Guxcacul government. And while he had grown to like the big arthropods, he needed to see more people that looked like him, other than his team. Although he had received a promotion for his actions during the initial invasion of the Sowir territory. But sadly, his expertise had been needed for the mission on Guxaxac, as his team was probably the most experienced one in the Empire.

They had been relatively safe, and had seen little action over the last three years. The Guxcacul population had already been cut down to a small number, barely five million. And they all lived in the oldest Guxcacul city on the planet, Gaxasas, buried deep underground.

Before the Sowir had invaded Guxaxac, the city had not been occupied, aside from a few caretakers. The city had been a kind of a museum, and every Guxcacul would visit it at least once in their lifetime. Now it was their last refuge. After the Sowir invasion of the planet had started, a faction of the Guxcacul had taken it upon themselves to fortify the city. And they’d had enough time; the Sowir war had lasted a long time. Now this city held the last of the Guxcacul race. All other cities had fallen over the decades.

The only reason that the Sowir still hadn’t located the city was that its location hadn’t been recorded in any files. The city was sacred to the Guxcacul, so everyone who wanted to visit it would need to go on a pilgrimage, and the only clues of the city’s location were passed down orally. Now, the city was a fortress, reinforced over the decades to serve as the last bastion of the Guxcacul. And they had planned on making it their last stand. To them, it was poetic; the place of the birth of their civilization was also to be its end. Until Sahib and his team had given them hope. And soon, Sahib would be able to make good on the promise he had made when they’d arrived.

The Empire needed time to prepare to take the planet; they had never attempted anything like it. Time was needed to manufacture equipment designed for fighting underground, to train troops in its use, and come up with a plan. The easiest part was for them to clear the Sowir ships in system, but the ground was another thing entirely. The Sowir had hundreds of thousands of their soldiers—the animals they had genetically altered to be their slaves, and controlled via telepathy to be used as tools and agents—on the ground. The Guxaxac tunnels were filled with them. And now the Empire was finally ready.

Sahib got up from his improvised bed and exited what had been his home for the last three years. He didn’t need any special equipment to survive, as the Guxcacul lived in very similar conditions. The air here was dry and hot, which he could survive in, but thankfully the Guxcacul had rigged devices that cooled and moisturized the air inside the chambers for his team.

Stepping out into the city was always a bit of a shock, even after all of this time. First, there was the dry air, the heat, and the dim lights. But all that paled to the look of the city. The Guxcacul city was unlike anything that Sahib had ever seen. It had been built inside a spherical cave, with some buildings buried inside the walls, while others were suspended in the open space of the cave, connected to the “walls” of the city by bridge-like pillars. There were a kind of plateaus carved inside the walls, which was where his and the houses of his team were. The plateaus were the only areas of the city that were horizontal; the rest were all at an angle, which didn’t really bother the Guxcacul.

Sahib walked towards the edge of the plateau and one of the many “bridges” attached there. Once he reached it, he placed his feet and hands in the holes placed there and started climbing. The bridges were all at an angle, so it wasn’t as dangerous to climb as it would be climbing a near vertical mountain. After a couple of minutes, he finally reached a building attached to a few bridges and carefully moved from his bridge to the building, entering it through a rounded wall. The inside didn’t look anything like what the rustic appearance suggested. It could have passed for almost any house in the Empire, except for the fact that there weren’t any walls inside and that it wasn’t floor-oriented.

“Hey, Riss,” Sahib said to the Guxcacul that was hanging on the left wall by the computer console. The Guxcacul didn’t move, but he did respond.

“Sahib.” Riss spoke in his language and Sahib spoke in standard. Both of them understood the other one’s language, so they rarely used a translator to speak. The Guxcacul couldn’t reproduce many of the sounds required to speak standard—the language of the Empire, which was mostly English with a few words taken from the Nel language. The experts on Sanctuary predicted that in time it would become a complete blend of the two, as the majority of the Empire were Nel and human.

“I got some news,” Sahib said as he moved to the center of the room, where he sat down on a large pillow.

Riss turned the console off and then moved across the wall to the floor and joined Sahib. “Is this the kind of news I will be happy to hear?”

“Of course. If it weren’t, I wouldn’t have bothered climbing all the way up here,” Sahib said. “I received a message from the Fleet Headquarters. They will begin the offensive in five months, and Guxaxac will be the first world targeted. Five more months and the Guxcacul will be free.”

Riss stilled, but Sahib had known him for a long time now and could see that he was affected emotionally.

“Finally,” Riss said. “I will need to inform the Elders. Did the Fleet send any plans for the offensive?”

“Yes, I have them all in my imp. We can go see the Elders whenever you want,” Sahib answered.

***

Sahib and Riss entered the large chamber. It too was strange to his eyes. It was rounded, with nine pillars grouped together in the middle of the room. A small platform stood below them. The two of them made their way over to the platform, while nine of the Guxcacul Elders already waited on their pillars. The Guxcacul didn’t use chairs, or anything similar, so the nine stood with their two front legs on top while the four back were placed in small holes in the sides of the pillars.

Out of the nine, five were female. The difference between the two sexes was obvious. The males had carapaces in shades of gray and brown, and looked a bit bland, while the females had widening bone crests on their head plates, which were in various shades of red and green.

The chamber itself was brightly lit, a courtesy for Sahib more than anything else. The Guxcacul had very poor eyesight, but then, they relied on other senses to ‘see.’ In the middle of the platform was a chair, another courtesy. Sahib sat down, and Riss stood to his left. In front of them was a small table with one of the Empire’s translators, which the Guxcacul scientists had improved over the three years.

“Greeting, friend. We are told that you have good news for us,” one of the Elders, identified by Sahib’s implant as Sisstra, spoke in her language. Sahib heard her words in standard directly in his mind through his implant, which was aided in translation by the bigger device on the table.

“Yes, Elders, that is true,” Sahib spoke in standard, not bothering to speak up so that the Elders could hear his words; it was enough that the translator could. His words were translated into Guxcacul and played to the Elders on the devices placed on their pillars. “I have received a message from my people. The offensive will start in three months, and your world will be one of the first targets.”

“After all this time, our world will be free,” another Elder said.

“The Fleet will take care of the Sowir ships in orbit, while our troops attack their positions on the ground. The plan is for your troops to attack at the same time from underground,” Sahib said.

“We will be ready.”

***

A few hours later, Riss and Sahib sat in the middle of Sahib’s home. The meeting with the Elders had been surprisingly short. For a long-lived race, the Guxcacul where surprisingly quick to act. Already, their troops had started preparing for the coming fight.

“Do you plan on living here, once we free this world? Help in the rebuilding?” Sahib asked.

“No…” Riss said after some thought. “This is no longer my home. That place is Warpath. I have changed; the Empire is my home now.”

“Do you think that they will ask to join us?”

“Not at first. They will want to rebuild the homeworld, regain something of what we have lost. But, in time, yes, I think that they will ask that of the Emperor,” Riss answered.

“You know the plan, right? To imprison the Sowir in their home system? We haven’t told your people that yet. I must confess that I thought you would tell them.”

“There is no point, they have no power to do anything about it. I know that they will ask for a harsher action, but they have been living in fear for a long time. And they are not like you Humans; before the Sowir, we never knew so much death and war.”

“And what do you think, should they pay a greater price?” Sahib asked.

“I do not know. All that I am screams for vengeance, for their death. And yet I have spent a long time in Warpath. I am a Sentinel, and have studied Human history, and the history of the Consortium through Human eyes. I have read about the things you did to yourselves, in your own wars. I know that if we get what we want, if we do to the Sowir what they did to us and the Mtural, and the Pouute, we will not be the same. Your kind is younger than mine, but in this you are our elders. I support the Emperor’s decision.”

Chapter Four

Sanctuary

Adrian stood in his room on Sanctuary, surrounded by holograms. All of them were concerning the Sowir. Information on their population, their military, and their government—or rather, the closest thing they had to a government. Holos of their system spun around him. The Empire had scouted all of their remaining systems, of which there were eleven, except for their home system. Every time they sent a probe through the trans-lane, it was destroyed. Their remaining fleet outside of their home system numbered about two thousand, spread across those eleven systems. The same as the fleet they had gathered for the invasion of Nelus. Out of those eleven, the most fortified was their home system, at least according to the little they’d managed to get out of the Sowir prisoners. Even now, when they were willing to talk, the Sowir never revealed anything of substance about their home system. Apparently there was a limit to how much they were willing to reveal as amends for their crime. But still, Adrian knew that they could defeat them with little to no casualties, especially now when the Empire had upgraded all of their old ships.

And yet, he could see no way to get to them and show them that they had been wrong in attacking other races. From Clear Waters, who was a lot more cooperative now, he’d learned that the Sowir had very small population, barely ninety million. A price for their longevity; their solution for aging had not been perfect. But their tools and agents numbered in the billions. One Sowir could command hundreds of thousands from afar; perhaps not with the same effectiveness as if he or she was close to them, and they were fewer in number, but when you threw a million expendable solders at the opposing force, it didn’t matter that they weren’t as organized.

The problem Adrian had was how to get close enough to the Sowir for them to sense him. Their maximum range was around two hundred meters for their more powerful telepaths. That range was increased exponentially if they used an amplifier, but those were designed specifically to send instructions to their tools; it was only one-way. Sending a prisoner to them wouldn’t work, either; Clear Waters had assured him that they wouldn’t believe her memories, not unless Adrian was there too. But the problem was getting to the Sowir. Early attempts in the war to send back prisoners with surrender offers had proven unsuccessful. Sending previously captured ships back had led to them being destroyed from afar, or by the prisoners destroying themselves, as they suspected a trap. The Empire had shown them that they were capable and willing to break their word, and also to use subterfuge. After all, the Sowir and the Empire had had a non-aggression agreement. That the Sowir would have broken it if they’d had the chance didn’t matter. The Empire had broken it first.

Landing on a Sowir-controlled planet was risky as well, as there were rarely any actual Sowir on the ground; they would rather stay on their ships and control their tools from a distance. The only worlds where there were actually Sowir on the ground was their homeworld—which was covered completely by water—and on Guxaxac, which they were having difficulties pacifying. There was no hope that Adrian could land there and reach their leaders without being seen, especially when the Sowir tools could see right through Empire’s stealth tech, which relied on visual stealth, and their tool-soldiers had no eyes. He would be killed long before he could enter the telepathic range of any Sowir that would actually allow him to speak with them. Not without sacrificing a lot of people.

The more he tried to find a way, the more frustrated he got, to the point that he’d started to question whether he even should. He managed to spend another half an hour looking at the endless data before he lost his temper and cleared all the holograms with a swipe of his hand. He turned around and exited the room.

The shape of Iris appeared in front of him and floated backwards as he walked through the room. He grabbed an overcoat from a chair nearby. Sora and Akash raised their heads from where they were sleeping, but then lowered them, uninterested.

“Adrian, where are you going?” Iris asked.

Adrian put the coat on over his suit and walked out of his home. He looked at the darkening sky and realized that it was close to nighttime. He turned left and started walking. “I’m going to see Seo-yun,” he said.

“Alright…May I ask why?” Iris tilted her head as she asked.

“I need to talk to her,” Adrian answered.

“Right…Want me to call and let her know you are coming?”

Adrian turned and walked onto an overpass. “Sure,” he said as he walked into a park that had been built on the overpass. Sound-canceling fields surrounded it and blocked out the noise of grav-cars that passed below. He walked by kids playing, with the progeny center caretakers or their parents watching over them. Many of the adults noticed and recognized him, but they obviously sensed that he wasn’t in the mood, so they stayed away. Now he was focused on only one thing.

It took him half an hour to walk to Seo-yun’s research center. Olympus City was a small city, with only around six million people living there, and most of it stretched underground. They had made a point of not disturbing Sanctuary’s nature more than they needed to.

Adrian stepped inside the research center and made his way towards Seo-yun’s office. The clerk at the doors tried to stop him, but he pushed through. Seo-yun was already standing when he entered; she raised her hand towards the clerk following him and waved him off.

Adrian started pacing across the room. Seo-yun watched him for a minute before she spoke.

“What is it, Adrian?” she asked.

He stopped pacing and turned to look at her. “I won’t tell the Sowir about my telepathy,” he said.

He saw her face drop. “You can’t find a way to reach them?” she asked.

Adrian shook his head and started pacing again. “No, I mean I won’t. I haven’t found a way yet, but I am sure that eventually I could. It would probably involve a lot of risk to our people, but I could do it. No, I won’t do it.”

“Why? We can save innocent lives,” she said desperately.

Adrian turned on her and pointed directly at her. “That is why,” he said firmly. “You say innocent lives, but is that really true?” he asked her.

She looked at him, confused. “Of course it is true!”

“Really, Seo-yun? Think about that. You have studied the Sowir for a long time. Think!”

“I don’t understand what you mean.”

Adrian sighed in frustration. “The Sowir have a small population. They have longevity. They are a lot more united than any race we have ever encountered; all of them have a voice in their governing system, because they think alike. They are not a hive mind, but they have much less individuality than we do,” he said pointedly. When she still looked confused, he continued. “Most of the Sowir alive now were also alive when they met the Consortium. It was them who decided to attack and slaughter billions. It was them who committed genocide. So tell me, Seo-yun, why should I put my life, and the lives of my people, at risk to reason with them? They are not innocent, Seo-yun, none of them are.”

Seo-yun struggled; he could see it in her face. She was a good person—it was what Adrian liked about her—but in this he knew that she was wrong.

“Seo-yun.” He stepped closer and took her hand in his. “I understand that you struggle with us deciding the fates of other races. I know that you were uncomfortable with the actions we took against the Furvor. But the truth is that we have the power, which is the only right that the universe respects. And the Sowir had abused their power. They are delusional; they are no better than fanatics from Earth. They are guilty, and I will not risk our people in order to save theirs. We have already lost enough people to them. Or did you forget what happened to the Voyager? They killed our people with no cause. How many do you think they’ve killed in their pointless quest?”

Seo-yun took a deep breath; he could see her coming to terms with his words.

“After we have destroyed all of their military, and after we have taken control of their homeworld, I will show them how wrong they were. But they need to suffer punishment for their actions,” Adrian added.

“I know,” Seo-yun said softly.

***

A few hours later, Seo-yun walked into her and Tomas’s chambers at the palace. Tomas was in their bed, reading. When she entered, he raised his head with a smile that turned into a frown when he saw her face.

“Seo-yun, what is wrong?” he asked, standing and crossing the distance between them.

“Adrian came to see me,” she started. “He doesn’t want to tell the Sowir about his connection to the Spirit. He doesn’t think that he can do it without risking our people, and he doesn’t want to do that.”

“Oh…” Tomas said slowly.

“I can understand that. And I know that he is right; no Sowir is innocent. But still, it somehow feels wrong,” she said. “I know that I have said that I will not bring this up again, but I can’t help it.”

Tomas hugged her tightly. “That is why I love you. Because you care. But I have told you before, I will do everything in my power to protect my people and those who need protection. The Sowir are a threat, and Adrian is right, they are not innocent. They need to be punished. We will not wipe them out; they will live, and perhaps in time they might even prove themselves enough to start making amends for what they have done. But I doubt that they will ever be able to level the scales.”

“Yes…” Seo-yun sighed against him. “I just worry that we will someday turn into them, that we will start deciding that some races simply don’t deserve to live,” she said.

“That is why I created the Hand of the Empire, why I will make use of Adrian’s Sentinels if our plans for the future prove fruitful.” Tomas paused. Then he lowered his voice and continued. “There might be a time when we will be forced to do exactly that. And if that time comes, I pray to all that I hold dear that I don’t make the wrong choice.”

Chapter Five

Thanatos; Fleet Headquarters

Bethany hurried down the corridors of the large complex on Thanatos, one of Sanctuary’s moons. The entire moon was property of the Fleet, and it was covered in artificial environments, warehouses, and research centers. A great number of Fleet personnel actually lived here; there was a dedicated apartment complex that currently housed around a million people, all part of the Empire’s Fleet. Beth would need to find an apartment there too, seeing as the home she’d shared with Harry was no longer hers. She didn’t feel sad about it; she hadn’t stepped foot inside it for years, and Harry deserved to have it.

She had spoken with him a couple of days ago. The two had met at what used to be their home. They had spent almost the entire day talking, and at the end they’d decided to get a divorce. They didn’t love each other anymore. The process of getting the actual divorce didn’t last more than a couple of minutes. Together they had called, and after a few questions and their consent, they were divorced. They didn’t have any joint possessions except the house, and Beth let him have it. And so, more than thirty years of marriage had ended in an afternoon.

But since then, Beth couldn’t help but feel elated, free. She had dreaded that moment for so long, and when it had finally come, it had been anticlimactic. They’d spoken as two old friends, both understanding that there was no point in keeping up with the charade. They had no kids together; there was no need to try and fix something that had probably never worked in the first place.

Now, after she was done with her personal stuff, she could focus completely on Fleet. After reporting to the headquarters, she had been given a few days’ leave. The ships she’d brought with her had been sent to the shipyards orbiting Thanatos for quick upgrades before the offensive. And now with her leave over, she had to report to a meeting with the Fleet’s leaders.

She reached the meeting room and entered. The first person she saw when she stepped inside was Fleets Master Laura Reiss, who sat at the head of the holo table, her black hair pulled back in a tight bun. Next to her on her left was Oswald Mein, Commander of Fleets, who was Laura’s second-in-command. Across from him sat Fleet Commander Nair Hakeem of the Third Fleet. He and Beth were good friends, one of the few she actually had. They’d been the two commanders in charge of the invasion on the Sowir territories, and they had talked almost daily over the past three years. She nodded at him with a smile, which he returned. She then turned to look at the last person in the room, who was standing on the right side of the room, and froze.

Adrian smiled uncomfortably at her as she continued not to move. The Fleets Master saved her by speaking.

“Take a seat, Fleet Commander Jones,” she said, gesturing for her to take a seat by Nair’s side.

Beth saluted and took a seat. She watched as Adrian walked and sat down next to Oswald across from her.

“Well, now that we are all here, let’s start with the briefing,” Laura said. Then she reached to her overcoat and brought out a small data chip. She placed it on the table and the holo table turned on. Images of three Sowir systems started spinning above the table.

“These are our first three targets. The most important one is this one.” She pointed, and the holo changed to show only one system. “The Guxaxac system. This is where we will hit them the hardest. The Army is ready to take the fight to the ground; our job is to make sure that all Sowir forces in orbit are dealt with. To that extent, we will be sending most of our forces there.” She turned to look at Bethany. “Fleet Commander Jones, we will be sending you and the Second Fleet. In addition to your current ships, we will add another one hundred Kraken-class and eighty Furious-class missile ships.”

“Thank you, Fleets Master, I won’t disappoint you,” Beth said.

Laura nodded. “The forces in the Guxaxac system are not as large as in other systems, but we can’t risk them doing something rash once they realize that they will lose the system. We don’t want another situation similar to Earth,” she said grimly, then added, “The forces on the ground are much more formidable than in space, but that is for the Army to deal with. Their transports will also join your fleet.”

She again swiped her hand across the table, and the holo changed to show the second of the three systems. “This is Nuuar, a former capital of the Pouute. As you can see, the Sowir have a much greater presence here. Thirty-four defense platforms, five stations, and two shipyards. The planet is occupied by millions of Sowir agents, but according to the intel we got from the Sowir prisoners, there are only a dozen or so Sowir on the planet,” Laura said as she gave Adrian a strange look. “The Sowir are using their agents to adapt former Pouute cities to their liking before they move in themselves. Most of the Sowir are residing on the stations in the system. So you will ignore the planet.”

She turned to look at Nair. “Fleet Commander Hakeem, you and the Third Fleet will be assaulting this system. After evaluating the shipyards and stations we took from the Sowir in the last offensive, our people agree that there is little we would gain from taking more of them. Your mission is simple: destroy all their ships and stations, and bomb any other planet-based installations they have in-system from orbit.”

Nair nodded. “Of course, Fleets Master.”

Then she turned to Adrian. “Clan Leader, your target is this system.” The holo changed again to show the last Sowir system. “This is one of the original Sowir systems, as you can see this system has more defenses than any system we have previously attacked. There are two hundred military ships in system, in addition to their cargo ships. Our goal is only to hit military targets, but as the Sowir don’t really have a civilian population, if their non-military ships intervene, you may destroy them as well. Concentrate on destroying all of their facilities, defense platforms, and stations. If some ships want to run, let them,” Laura said.

She looked around the room before continuing. “Our plan is to isolate them in their home system, which is why the locations of these three systems are on different sides of their territory. We will basically herd them back to their home system, and crush their military there.”

Oswald then cleared his throat. “Clan Leader Farkas will command his Vanguard Fleet in addition to what we are now calling the Fourth Fleet, which consists of newly built Kraken-class ships and repaired ships that survived the battle at Nelus. Also, Clan Leader Farkas will act as Warmaster for this offensive. After you complete your primary objectives, he will guide the rest of the conflict. The Fleet will be here for advice, and we will keep watch over the Sowir systems with our surveillance drones and relay the information to your fleets. I will let him tell you about the expanded plan.”

Adrian stood and the holo changed, now showing Sowir territory with three points glowing red—the three systems they were planning on attacking.

“The rest of the offensive, following the opening, can go in many different directions depending on the Sowir reaction, so I will not bother you with plans that might not even be used. Our primary goal will always be the same: Isolate the Sowir in their home system. All our actions will be for that goal. The Sowir don’t follow any kind of doctrine that we can imagine. Their ships are operated by only a few of their people, with them using their telepathy to control their tools like additional limbs. But with their small numbers, that means that they never allow themselves to be without those tools, which makes capture extremely hard. We were lucky to have gotten any prisoners; we caught them off guard. That will not happen again. They will keep thousands of their tools between themselves and us. So don’t even try to take prisoners. No boarding disabled ships; destroy them and move on. We will not be taking these systems from the Sowir, we are wiping them clean,” Adrian said, looking both Nair and Beth in the eyes. She remembered this Adrian, the emotionless commander. It was one of the things that had infuriated her back at the Academy.

“We will destroy their presence in every system surrounding their home system. The projections indicate that they will figure out what we are planning and abandon their other systems after we pass through six of their remaining eleven systems. I agree with these projections. The Sowir prisoners have made it very clear that the Sowir ships will fight to the death; they will not ask for mercy, nor will they surrender. They are now aware that we know that they don’t keep their word to those they don’t consider true beings, and that we will not keep our word to them. They would rather all fight to the end, hoping to hurt us in the process. And we will deny them that.”

“Is there really no way to get them to surrender?” Nair asked, voicing Bethany’s thoughts as well.

Adrian shook his head sadly. “Perhaps there is a way, but it would require putting our people at great risk. The reason why they are not going to accept any kind of agreement now is simple. They know that we have Nel as part of our Empire. They understand that we will never allow them to live peacefully at our borders, so they see no point in talking. It is very logical to their minds.”

Nair nodded his thanks for the answer.

Adrian looked around. “Any other questions?” he asked. When no one said anything, he cleared the holo. “Alright, Fleet Commanders Jones and Hakeem, you are free to inspect your ships. If you want any changes or additions, you have until the end of the week to request them.” He nodded a dismissal.

People got up and started leaving. Only Bethany and Adrian stayed by some unspoken agreement. When the last person exited and left them alone, the silence somehow deepened and grew heavier. Adrian stood up and leaned on a chair.

“So, how have you been?” he asked. His cold, commanding demeanor was gone now. He looked uncomfortable, unsure.

“Good. You? I heard that you had a tough few years…” Beth said, equally awkward.

“I’m good, and yes, it has been an interesting couple of years,” Adrian said. After another uncomfortable silence, he spoke again. “How’s Harry?” he asked.

Beth shifted uncomfortably. “He is good...We are divorced,” she added quickly. Perhaps too quickly.

Adrian’s eyes widened a bit at that. “Really? I hadn’t heard.”

“Well, well the fact that it happened a few days ago is probably why. Not many people know,” she said with a crooked smile. That managed to make Adrian’s lip curl into a small smile. Then, before she chickened out, she stood. “Adrian, I know that we haven’t really spoken in a long time. That even though we’ve put the past behind, we still haven’t made any steps to actually talk again.”

“I know, Beth,” Adrian said sadly. “It wasn’t that I didn’t forgive you, or that I didn’t want to. It’s just that there were other more important things in my life. I would love to be your friend again, Beth, but you need to know that it won’t ever be more than that. You hurt me, but it isn’t really about that. I have changed. I am not the same person I was then. If you want to be friends again, I can do that. But if you want something more…Then it is better if we pretend we are only colleagues.” For a moment, she thought that she saw something in his face, but it was hidden too quickly for her to recognize it.

Beth dropped her head to hide the emotions on her face. She had hoped that they might move forward from where they’d left off years ago. But she knew that it was unlikely. She stood up and stepped around the table to stand in front of him. She extended her hand to him. “Friends?”

Adrian smiled and took her hand in a handshake. “Friends.”

Chapter Six

December; Vanguard Fleet – Trans-lane to Sowir system

Adrian sat in the command center of the Harbinger, three lead balls floating around him, and watched as the big timer in the middle holo ticked down, indicating the remaining time until they entered the Sowir system. It had taken a great deal of planning to coordinate the attack so that all three fleets attacked around the same time. The fleets would arrive within a half hour of each other. And Adrian’s fleet would reach its target first.

His fleet included ten Vanguard ships, one hundred Kraken-class warships, one hundred and fifty Furious missile ships, and ninety-three battleships that had survived the battle for Nelus. But in addition to those, he had thirty auxiliary ships, and also forty drones constructed by Warpath, designed to be the support for the Vanguard Fleet. And with the knowledge from the People, they had managed to upgrade their original designs significantly.

The drone ships were remotely controlled by the flagship’s AI, in this case Iris. But she only controlled their propulsion systems outside of combat. In combat, the ships themselves would be controlled by the Watchtower interface remotely. The new version of Watchtower was much better than the one Adrian had used at Nelus. With the tech from the sphere, they’d managed to lower the load and increase effectiveness by 580%, making it safe to use for anyone.

The drones were a radically different than anything they had built previously. Each drone was five hundred meters long and was a purely offensive ship. The drones had no indoor room delegated to crews, so that they could have more ammunition and weapons. They weighed almost as much as an 1100-meter-long Kraken-class warship.

Adrian checked the timer once again, seeing that there was only around two minutes until they would arrive. He got up from his command chair, pocketed the balls, and turned to his ship’s second-in-command, Paul Isaacs.

“You have the ship, Paul. Try not to break her,” Adrian said jokingly.

“I won’t. Unless you order us to ram something, then I can’t guarantee anything,” Paul answered, deadpan, as he took Adrian’s chair. Adrian shook his head as he exited the CC.

While Adrian used the Watchtower, Paul was in command of the Harbinger, as Adrian couldn’t really command a ship while he was in charge of the entire fleet and the drones. Adrian did realize that in the future they would need special command ships for their Fleet Commanders. And he suspected that soon the Empire Fleet would undergo another drastic change in structure—with all of the tech coming out of the sphere, it was a given.

Adrian walked towards the Watchtower room, followed by Akash and Sora. Once inside the room, he sat in the chair and felt the connection with the access point on his neck as the two wolions got into sitting positions in front of him. He closed his eyes, and a moment later he was floating in empty space. They were yet to exit the trans-lane, so there was little for the interface to show.

On his command, the timer appeared in front of him, with the last ten seconds counting down. Once the timer hit zero, the space around him started changing. First to appear was his fleet, and then as their sensors went active, the Sowir defenses. The system had a Sowir presence on two planets out of four, and their military ships were mostly spread between the two, with a couple patrolling the hyperspace barrier of the system.

The Sowir still didn’t know about his fleet, as it had entered the system through the incoming trans-station close to the system’s sun. But from his position, he could see the two Sowir worlds. One was high above the system sun’s plane, while the other was close to the middle. There was enough distance between the planets that the Sowir had no chance of reinforcing the other planet if Adrian chose to attack one of them. Too bad for them that Adrian had no intention of engaging their defenses from within their effective firing range. He designated the planet high above the plane as target A and the other one as target B.

With a thought, he spread his fleet in a wall formation. “Iris,” he called, and within moments, the shape of a human-sized fiery woman appeared beside him.

“Yes, Adrian?” she asked. She was connected to the interface through the ship itself, and while this space was in fact in his head, she could enter it through his connection to the Watchtower.

“Can you check my targeting calculations on this?” He sent her the targets through his implant. A moment later, he had the firing solutions for all his warships. With a thought, he sent out the order.

His ships opened fire with their kinetic weapons, firing from far outside the Sowir range. Massive 900mm tungsten rounds, both grav and explosive shells, blasted out of his ships on their way towards the Sowir stations, defense platforms, and stationary ships. Another timer appeared, counting down from thirty two minutes—the time it would take for his attack to reach the Sowir at target B.

He moved his entire fleet towards target B, the closer of the two planets. According to his calculation’s, the Sowir would detect his fleet just before his attack hit. And by that time, they would be just inside his ships’ maximum range. He prepared targeting solutions and sent them to his ships. Then he used the Watchtower to move his drones above his formation, and he adjusted the fleet’s formation to that of a concave lens, allowing all ships to fire on Sowir targets.

Then he settled to watch as his previous attack neared the unsuspecting Sowir, even as his fleet grew ever closer.

***

The Sowir sensory net at target B detected the Empire ships as they moved towards their positions. Immediately, alarms sounded throughout their positions around the planet. Ships started firing their drives, and their defense platforms brought their weapons online. In all the confusion, as the Sowir focused their sensors on the incoming fleet, they missed the danger about to reach them until it was too late. The Sowir sensors discovered the incoming hail when it was just a minute away. Immediately, those ships that had their drives already primed hurried to get out of the way, while the ones in the initial phase realized that they had no chance. Desperately, they turned their point defenses towards the Empire’s attack, but it was futile; their lasers had no hope of stopping the sheer mass of the Empire’s main weapon.

Tungsten explosive shells ripped into their ships, shredding their armor, which made the following effect of the 900mm rounds of metal that much greater. The massive rounds struck their ships with such force that they smashed them inwards and punched through, leaving mangled messes in some cases. But more often than not, a hit resulted in complete destruction of the Sowir ships, with short-lived explosions appearing by the dozens in the span of a couple of seconds as the air inside the ships burned out.

Their defense platforms and station didn’t fare any better. Massive grav shells hit the armored hulls of the defense platforms and the gravity generators inside activated, creating powerful gravity fields that resulted in small, contained implosions that tore their armor apart. Following them, explosive shells hit, resulting in the platform’s complete destruction in most cases. Thirty-two defense platforms out of thirty-seven were destroyed completely, with explosions so powerful that massive debris pieces flew outwards, only to impact nearby stations and ships docked with them.

Stations, too, suffered enormous amounts of damage, but they were too big to destroy outright. The debris from the defense platforms and destroyed ships was sticking out of the holes in the stations made by explosive shells previously. Six large stations were wrecked to that extent that most had lost all power. One of them had a lower part of one tower missing, leaving the station open to space where it had been ripped off by a grav shell.

In that initial attack, the Empire had smashed every defense platform, with thirty-two destroyed completely and five battered so much that they were no longer operational. All six of the stations were disfigured to the point that they no longer looked anything like what they previously had. None of them had power, and their weapons had all been destroyed.

Of the one hundred and twenty warships spread in various orbits around the planet, sixty-two were destroyed before they managed to move out of the way, and another thirty-three that did manage to move suffered various degrees of damage. Only twenty-five managed to move out of the fire, as their drives had already been primed.

The attack had also cost the Sowir hundreds of cargo and transport ships that had been docked with the stations when the attack hit. Those that had been on their way from the other planet or from outside the system were now quickly changing course and fleeing.

On the other side of the system, at the other planet, the Sowir managed to detect the incoming hail sooner and had their ships moved out of the way. But their stations and defense platforms suffered the same.

***

Adrian watched as his attack decimated the Sowir forces at both his targets. He wasn’t surprised at the effectiveness of the attack. It was extremely had to defend stationary objects in space against kinetic weapons, even if you knew that they were coming. There wasn’t much defense other than moving out of the way, and stations and platforms rarely could do that. All of the Empire’s stationary assets had specially designed defenses for those kinds of attacks. But the Sowir had none.

Seeing the effectiveness of the attack, Adrian changed his plans and issued new orders. His fleet changed course towards target A, while his Furious-class ships fired enough missiles towards target B to destroy every remaining military asset that the Sowir had left. He didn’t care at all for their nonmilitary ships that were even now running towards the hyperspace barrier. They also had assets on the ground, but most of them were mining operations where they used their agents for work. There might have been a few actual Sowir on the ground, but it was just as likely that they’d been on the stations in orbit. Either way, the ground was insignificant; if there were Sowir on the ground, they had no means to get off it. And if there were not, then their agents would lose control and either kill each other or die without the guidance of the Sowir.

Once enough missiles had been fired, he put target B out of his mind and focused on target A. Eighty Sowir ships were charging towards his own, in their usual suicidal manner. The eighty ships were mostly heavy cruisers, but there was a couple of battleships in their formation. With a thought, Adrian sent out orders, and one hundred Kraken-class warships pulled in front of his formation just as his Furious-class missile ships fired off missiles ahead of them.

***

The eighty Sowir ships saw the missiles speeding towards them and assumed the formation designed to defend against the Empire’s missiles. They moved close enough to each other for their combined defense systems to assess and provide firing solutions to their point defense. The last time that the Sowir had encountered Empire’s warships, their new system had proven very effective against the Empire’s missiles, but since then three years had passed. The Empire had upgraded their missiles accordingly.

One hundred Enforcer Mk 2 missiles speed towards the Sowir ships. As the Sowir ships opened with their point defense, the missiles engaged their evading protocols and their field generators just in time to negate the point laser fire from the Sowir ships. By the time the missiles crossed the distance to the Sowir ships, the enemy point defense had managed to take down only fifteen; the rest reached their targets and exploded against the Sowir ships’ hulls.

Fifty ships died outright. A couple more managed to survive the initial explosions, but succumbed to the secondary explosions from within their own hulls. Just as the survivors recovered, limping and damaged, the Vanguard Fleet’s Kraken warships opened up with their long-range particle cannons. Within moments, the remaining Sowir ships were eliminated. The Kraken-class warships then turned their sights on the remnants of the Sowir stations in orbit of the planet, followed close behind by the rest of the fleet. With their laser and particle weapons, the Fleet systematically reduced the stations and platforms still standing to dust.

At the second planet, target B, five hundred missiles reached the still standing Sowir stations. Without any defensive fire from the Sowir, three hundred Enforcer Mk 2 and two hundred MAHEM Mk 1 missiles reached their targets. The first to hit were the MAHEM Mk 1 missiles. Just before hitting the enemy hulls, their magnetic force generators shaped the liquid core of the missiles into a spearhead, which then punctured deep into the hull and delivered the explosives inside. The resulting explosions created vast, gaping holes in the stations, allowing the Enforcer Mk 2 missiles to get much deeper inside the stations. The result was the complete destruction of all Sowir stations.

***

Adrian watched as his fleet annihilated all their targets. The few surviving Sowir non-military ships were running towards the hyperspace barrier, along with a couple of their warships that hadn’t been at the planets. Adrian ordered his drones to follow them out of the system, but not engage, as his fleet regrouped and the ammo ships resupplied his other ships. He would need to wait to hear from the other two fleets before he decided what systems to hit next.

Adrian looked around him. In the Watchtower, he was floating inside a scaled-down system. He looked at the two planets and the destruction he’d wrought there. In no more than a couple of hours, he had destroyed what the Sowir had spent a hundred years to build.

With a thought, he disengaged the interface, opening his eyes to see Akash and Sora watching over him attentively. He got up, gave each of them a head pat, and then made his way to his quarters.

Chapter Seven

Third Fleet – Nuuar

The Third Fleet dropped out of trans-space at the system’s incoming trans-station. Four hundred and fifty ships—one hundred of the older Mark Two dreadnoughts, accompanied by two hundred Kraken-class dreadnoughts and one hundred Furious-class missile ships, followed by fifty auxiliaries entered the system very close to their target. Almost immediately, they were detected by the Sowir.

Fleet Commander Nair Hakeem was already in the Watchtower interface, and as soon as his ships entered the system, they started moving at his orders. He instructed the fleet to split into three taskforces. Within minutes of their arrival, the three taskforces opened fire on previously decided targets. The fleet fired thousands of shells and missiles and hundreds of particle and laser beams towards the Sowir ships, stations, and defense platforms, catching them unprepared. The Sowir managed to return fire briefly before the onslaught reached them, which meant that they had been on high alert already. They had probably received word that the Vanguard Fleet had attacked one of their systems on the opposite side of the border.

The Sowir, like the Empire, had FTL communications, but thankfully they did not possess the trans-travel technology and were forced to use much slower hyperspace. And while the trans-space was very limited in the way one could use it, it was also a huge advantage. Trans-travel allowed for ships to enter a system very close to the star, depending on where the trans-station was, as they were natural, while one could only use hyperspace a certain distance from the system’s star, which was usually in the outer reaches of the system.

But even if the Sowir had some advanced warning, they had no way of knowing where the Empire’s fleet would arrive in the system; they had no sensors that could detect trans-stations, which gave Nair a huge advantage.

The short defensive fire from the Sowir slowly waned and disappeared as the Third Fleet’s fire destroyed their defense platforms and stations. The Sowir warships were sadly able to move out of the way, and had set a course towards taskforce one. He formulated orders and sent them to the fleet.

***

Force Leader Altsoba Smith received the Fleet Commander’s orders through her command board, and she immediately relayed them to her crew. Altsoba’s ship, the Kraken-class dreadnought Gauntlet, changed course, followed closely behind by the rest of the taskforce she was in command of.

The turrets on her ship swiveled and targeted the incoming Sowir force consisting of some two hundred Sowir light and heavy cruisers, battleships, and even five of their dreadnought class, none of which were up to par with the Empire’s ships. Altsoba gave the order and the ships in her taskforce opened fire.

Lasers reached out and burned the Sowir ships’ hulls, forcing them into spins to dissipate the heat, but the Empire laser weapons were too powerful, with far longer firing time. The lasers burned the ships as they rolled, cutting wide stretches of their hulls apart and leaving gaping wounds. Many ships were cut in half by the fire from Altsoba’s ships; others, the ones that didn’t manage to get into rolls before the lasers burned through their hulls, had holes burned right through the ships. Then the particle beams hit and pulverized the Sowir light cruisers almost instantly with each hit.

Altsoba saw the Sowir try and get their dreadnoughts close, but she was not going to fall for that trick. The Sowir had modeled their dreadnoughts on the first dreadnought class of the Empire, with their main weapons being kinetic. But those weapons, while extremely powerful, had an obvious weakness. If you saw them coming, they were simple to evade, which was why you needed to close the range as much as possible in order to minimize the time your opponent had to react.

Altsoba sent orders for her ships to move around the Sowir at the maximum range that her ships were capable of firing their lasers and particle weapons, not giving the Sowir a chance to use their main weapons. Here and there they returned fire with their own particle weapons, but all of the Empire’s ships had the shimmering field technology now that dissipated any hit from those weapons, and the Sowir missiles were dying before even entering the inner envelope of her force. Her Mark Two dreadnoughts used their substantial capabilities to screen the entire space in front of her ships with a curtain of shells, preventing any missile from passing through.

Over the next twenty minutes, her ships destroyed the rest of the Sowir fleet, without receiving any damage themselves. It wasn’t even a battle as far as she was concerned. Her c-board chimed and she read the new orders from Fleet Commander Hakim. She relayed the order to the taskforce and then turned to her navigation officer and ordered a change of course.

***

Force Leader Nenad Krylov acknowledged the orders from the Fleet Commander and relayed them to his taskforce, changing course toward the Sowir shipyards. They had taken some fire during the initial attack, but they remained largely undamaged. They were massive, placed in orbit around the sun between the third and fourth planets in the system.

He could see on the holo as a few of the ships from the docks moved out and started running away. Nenad let them go; his job was to destroy the shipyards. As his ships entered range, he ordered them to fire with all weapons.

The shipyards had no defensive capability themselves, but they had eight defense platforms, which proved not enough as tungsten shells shredded them in second. Then the 900mm shells slammed into the shipyards, followed by a wave of five hundred missiles that opened them up to space, venting atmosphere. Then particle beams and lasers hit, cutting the shipyards to pieces.

***

Nair walked onto the CC and retook his spot on the command chair. As the battle was over, there was no longer a need for him to be inside Watchtower. Nair watched on the holo as his ship entered the orbit of the second world in the system above the factories on the planet. His ships were positioned around the planet above all the Sowir military installations, which surprisingly there weren’t too many of. The Sowir were a very strange race. They had a small population, and their agents outnumbered them greatly, which meant that they didn’t really need planets to settle—they just used them for resources.

Nair ordered his ships to take out the targets on the ground. Kinetic strikes rained down on the planet from the sky, blowing away the installations and their surroundings, raising dust and debris into the air.

Once they were finished, Nair ordered his ship to the other planets in system that had a Sowir presence on ground, while they completely ignored their non-military ships that were running away. It would take them several hours to erase all presence of the Sowir from the system.

***

Second Fleet – Guxaxac

A fleet of 650 warships and 120 Army transports dropped out of trans-space at the Guxaxac system’s incoming trans-station, firing up their drives and speeding directly towards the Sowir fleet in orbit of the Guxcacul homeworld. Bethany watched on her command board as her ship’s sensors painted a picture of the system. There were two hundred and eighty Sowir ships in the orbit, with no orbital stations or defenses. Only one hundred warships accompanying one hundred and eighty troop ships. According to the Sowir prisoners, each of those ships carried thousands of the Sowir agents in stasis, there to be used when the commander on the ground needed them.

They didn’t even have a lot of bases on the planet, only one outpost on the surface, and maybe half a dozen underground. But then, they didn’t need to have more. They had already killed enough Guxcacul that they owned the planet. And the Sowir didn’t need many bases; they rarely even left them, choosing instead to control their troops from afar, where there was no danger to them.

The troop ships in orbit were actually a sign of how much trouble the Guxcacul were giving them. The Sowir rarely needed to have reinforcements close and ready. But then again, they were not very good at war, especially at war underground; their soldiers were not designed for it. What they were designed for was to overwhelm their opponents with sheer numbers, which had been going extremely well for them, but not anymore. The races of the Consortium had been ill-prepared for the war when the Sowir had attacked, and they hadn’t had any mastery of war, at least not on the same level as humanity had. They were peaceful races that had evolved at the top of the food chains of their planets, united into a single entity almost from the beginning. Humanity, on the other hand, had mastered war a long time ago.

For a moment, Bethany wondered if she should have to use the Watchtower interface, but then immediately dismissed the thought. The Watchtower was an amazing tool, but she did not plan to be in a prolonged engagement with the Sowir. Her target was probably the most valuable of the systems that the Empire was attacking, but it was in actuality the one with the weakest Sowir presence. There were no stations or defense platforms, only debris floating where once Guxcacul stations had stood, and the Sowir had the smallest number of warships here. She could destroy them easily from afar. There were only two problems. One, the Sowir troop ships; the moment they detected her fleet’s attack, they would try to land. She would probably be able to destroy most of them, but some would land and make things harder for the people on the ground. And two, there was a chance that the Sowir had a weapon capable of destroying the planet.

It was a small chance, but Bethany needed to consider it. After all, the Ra’a’zani had done exactly that to Earth. That was why she would pull no punches, and would attack with everything she had. She manipulated the c-board, sending orders they’d programmed in advance to her ships. Using her imp, she made adjustments where she thought it was required, and then leaned back and watched her ships execute her orders.

***

As the Empire’s ships closed the range, they fired their missiles, sending three waves of 15,000 missiles each towards the unsuspecting Sowir. When the missiles passed the halfway point, the Sowir detected them. Immediately, they changed formations, putting their warships in front of their troop ships and getting ready to fire with their point defense. In addition, they fired their own missiles to intercept the Empire’s. The first wave of the Empire’s missiles was met with an amazing amount of defensive fire, but it was too little to take down the first wave; what did manage it were their missiles. Sending thousands of missiles towards the Empire’s attack allowed them to take down the majority of the first wave.

But it was not enough. Five thousand missiles reached Sowir positions and destroyed every one of their warships. Their troop ships had positioned themselves in a way that sacrificed the majority of them in order to allow a few to land. The remaining missiles from the first wave destroyed one hundred and seventy-two Sowir troop ships, with the remaining eight managing to enter the atmosphere on their way down to the planet. Bethany grimaced. There wasn’t anything she could do now. The eight ships, if their intel was correct, carried about 6,000 troops each, making 48,000 in total. She shook her head and sent the shutdown order to their missiles, as there wasn’t any need for them in the end. They would be picked up later after the battle was over.

Turning towards her Communications Handler, she started giving orders. “Contact the Army, let them know that they can approach the planet and start landing the troops.” Then, from her c-board, she ordered her fleet into the orbit of the planet, making sure that her ships stayed away from the range of the Sowir base on the ground. They knew that it had orbital defenses, but they had no idea of what kind or how much damage they could inflict.

Chapter Eight

Guxaxac

Field General Dayo Okoro stood inside the battle center on planet Guxaxac. The center was actually a big, rectangular container that one of their ships had brought down to the planet. Already, after only half an hour of being on the ground, they had walls around the base, and various other facilities. The walls and the facilities had been transported by Army atmospheric transports from the much larger transport ships in orbit. All equipment and supplies had been loaded into fabricated containers built for this campaign. Each container served as a dedicated facility: medical, soldier barracks, advanced sensory stations, and more. And all was designed to be easily assembled into a functional base.

That was actually the reason for why they had delayed the assault on Guxaxac this long. The Empire had never had a need to fight for an extended amount of time on any planet where they didn’t already have a presence. Time had been needed for them to design and build equipment. And they had—all of their equipment and their bases were modular. They could assemble bases and/or scouting stations for whatever the situation required.

As the base was expanded and areas for the soldiers set up, the transports started bringing down more troops to help with further assembly and to start setting up a perimeter. There was little danger; they had picked a spot high on a plateau at the top of a small mountain. There were no tunnels there, and they had a view of their surroundings for kilometers in every direction. The only Sowir base on the planet was half a planet away to the south, and without the support from the orbit, they had very little that could threaten the Empire’s position. There were other bases across the planet in various stages of completion, but this one would serve as the command center for the entire campaign, and Dayo would serve as commander for it.

He walked outside of the battle center and immediately felt the heat of the Guxaxac sun on his skin. He turned upwards and squinted at the reddish sun. Guxaxac was a lot hotter than Sanctuary, at least during the day; at night it was supposed to be more comfortable, albeit still dry. But it wouldn’t bother them much; most of the actual combat would happen belowground.

Looking over the base, he saw two more dropships leave off containers, his people already running and attaching cables from mobile power plants and from the other containers, establishing connections with the other centers. He turned and walked back inside the battle center. People were still moving around running operational checks and making sure that everything was properly set up. One of the walls of the rectangular room was already turned on, and displayed early reports from the other bases around the planet. It would take them maybe another twelve hours to get everything up and running, and during that time they would be most vulnerable. But thankfully most of the Sowir troops were underground, save for those that had been dropped off before his force had arrived.

They had landed and presumably left their troops at the Sowir topside base before trying to escape—unsuccessfully. Dayo knew that he couldn’t let them get all those troops out of stasis. They already had too many Sowir troops to contend with, and he couldn’t allow them to strike while a great majority of his troops were not yet on the ground, which was why he already had a plan for them. They could have tried orbital bombardment from the fleet, but aside from the damage that those weapons could do to the planet, like collapse tunnels and destroy entire areas, the Sowir had anti-orbital defenses. The Sowir had hidden their troop stasis units in the base, knowing full well that that would give them time to wake them up. The fleet would not risk getting into range of those guns, as they were kinetic in nature and able to inflict damage to the fleet. But the fleet would also keep its distance because the Sowir had missile silos. According to the intel from the Sowir prisoners, the silos had been built after their people had seen the power of those weapons in the fleet actions, for the purpose of defending against the Empire.

But after the non-aggression agreement between the Empire and the Sowir Dominion, they had halted the construction of further defenses. They hadn’t seen the need to spend resources; they had believed that the Empire would keep its word. Up until that point, they had only had experiences with civilizations that had dealt with them without duplicity. Their plan from the beginning had been to break the agreement, only they’d believed that it would be on their terms.

So instead of having the fleet slug it out with the defenses, he had assembled a force that would move and strike at them before they were able to wake up those troops. And perhaps even get some intel on the Sowir on the planet.

Their troopships had already been destroyed; after they’d left their troops, their ships had attempted to escape. They had risen from the planet and had even managed to get to high orbit before the fleet had destroyed them. His force would need to attack them on the ground. He wasn’t going to risk the few atmospheric gunships he had. He had few of them; as most of the fighting on Guxaxac would be underground, he had been given only a small number of those, and he wanted to keep them in reserve.

Dayo turned his eyes to the holo in the middle of the room, seeing one base shown there that had a ready signal above it. It was a small base set up for the purpose of launching the attack on the Sowir base. They had rushed its construction, and had dropped in personnel and weapons as fast as they could.

As he was looking at the holo, an incoming communication request came through from the base. Dayo reached over and placed his hand on the hologram, accepting the comm.

“Field General,” the shape of Andrew Mao said as he saluted. Dayo returned the salute, and then spoke.

“Are you ready, Force Commander?”

“Yes, all the machinery is down, as are the troops. We are still having trouble with setting up a sensory net, and need to rely on the fleet. And their info isn’t all that accurate in this weather; they are too far away for detailed scans,” Force Commander Mao said. Dayo nodded. Andrew was on the south continent, close to the area where the Sowir base was. There had been a storm there, and while the worst of the storm was over, clouds still remained over the entire area, making it difficult for the fleet to see.

“Proceed as planned. It is unlikely that the Sowir will send any troops to intercept your people from the base before you attack. They have very little in terms of ground transports, and most of their numbers are underground searching for the Guxcacul. It would take time to recall them,” Dayo said.

“Of course, sir. The troops are ready, and will set out immediately,” Mao said.

“Good,” Dayo said, and terminated the comm. Mao was in charge of that base, and would oversee the operation from a distance, while Dayo would get updates on his holo. He had a bigger picture to contend with now. First on his list was getting all the bases up and operational. He turned to his staff, who had just finished setting up smaller stations to the side of the room, and started asking for reports.

***

Company Leader Mira Johannes watched as her squad did the last checks on their equipment. Her squad was designated as heavy assault, and most of them operated heavy weapons. Each platoon had four squads with seven people per squad, meaning that her platoon had 28 soldiers. And this mission would be carried out by ten platoons, a total of 280 soldiers, which meant that her company had four extra squads attached to it for the purpose of this mission.

Mira walked up to her mech and with a command from her imp opened the cockpit. She climbed the six-and-a-half-meters-tall machine and entered. Inside was a protective cocoon, and after she stepped inside, she immediately felt the connector attach itself to the back of her neck and the access point implanted there. There were no controls inside the mech; it was operated by technology that had evolved out of virtual reality simulators.

Mira covered her nose and mouth with an air mask that was connected to the emergency air tank and to the outside, for cases such as these when the air on a planet was breathable, although it was filtered. She then closed her eyes and started issuing orders to the mech. First, her cocoon closed, and foam filled the inside, restraining her movements. It was designed to protect her from impacts and anything else that could damage her mech. Then she did a check on all her systems, and after everything came back green, she turned the mech on.

The first thing that happened was that her vision returned; fed directly into her mind, the images of the mech’s surroundings appeared. Then icons started popping up above the things in her view. She was the mech; she could see through its sensors and operate any of its weapons as if they were a part of her own body. She turned her head, and the mech’s visual sensors rotated. She looked around and saw that most of her people had gotten inside their own mechs or tanks, depending on the squad. Beyond her own platoon, the other platoons were getting ready as well.

Mira stood her mech and started walking towards the gate of the base. The 40-ton mech started walking on its two legs. The legs were set wide to provide the mech with more balance. Mira’s mech was the HAV-01 Juggernaut, the heaviest mech that the Empire produced. It could achieve speeds up to 87 km/h. It was heavily armed and armored, and its most powerful weapon was a Gauss cannon placed over its left shoulder, although when not in use it could be moved to the mech’s back.

On its chest it had six missile launch tubes, and each tube had four missiles in its magazine, for a total of 24 MAHEM MM-2 missiles. The missiles were of the same type as those used by the fleet, only smaller; they had half the explosive power and a fraction of the fuel, but then, they didn’t need to have as much fuel as the Fleet missiles when their range to the intended target was so much smaller. Attached on its right shoulder was a class 3 laser turret—in comparison, the fleet used class 5s for their ships. Its left arm had a powerful 70mm turret, and its right held a smaller-caliber rotary cannon that fired 30mm rounds.

But one of its biggest strengths was that it had the shimmering shielding technology. Inspired by the Ra’a’zani technology, it shielded the mech from energy-based weapons, and it could dissipate most explosive energy turned against it, barring a direct hit, as it wasn’t as powerful as the fields on fleet ships. It made the Juggernaut a true beast.

Mira called a battle map to the corner of her vision and saw that her platoon had followed her outside of the base. Six more mechs joined her, three LAV-01 Hawks and three LAV-02 Tigers. Then came the other three squads in her platoon with three Ravager Mk 5 artillery tanks, one from each squad, and three Fury Mk 3 light assault tanks.

Other platoons had assembled there as well. Those that were infantry were already in their TTVs (tactical transport vehicle). There were a few squads of people wearing powered armor suits who were just boarding their TTVs. She waited for everyone to send a ready signal, then turned her comms on the command channel and started giving out orders.

“Alright, all platoons move out!” she ordered, and slowly they started towards their target.

Tanks took the lead, followed by the mechs, and finally the TTVs. Collectively, they moved at the fastest pace they were able, which was the max speed of the mechs, as they were the slowest. Thankfully, the southern continent of Guxaxac was mostly rocks, and the terrain was good enough that there were no hindrances. The tanks used grav generators to hover above the ground, while the TTVs used caterpillar tracks.

Their mission was to engage and eliminate the Sowir force in their main base, and to capture it as intact as possible, as they needed information about the Sowir troop movements belowground, as well info on their other bases.

***

Forty-five minutes later, when they had almost reached the visual range of the area where the Sowir were, Mira started to wonder why they hadn’t yet seen any enemy presence. They’d had enough time to wake some of their soldiers at least, and there were many places where they could have attempted an ambush, although it would have done them no good; the Sowir didn’t have anything that could threaten her force, barring overwhelming numbers, which were at their underground bases. She glanced around to the many rises and rocks surrounding the downhill slope her force was on. The slope led directly to the edge of a vast canyon, and was the most direct path to the area where the Sowir base was. They hadn’t had time to send forces to the other side of the canyon to surround the base that was located on the edge and adjacent to a natural bridge across the canyon. But at least they had a good idea of the terrain, as they had detailed maps from the Guxcacul.

She turned her sights to the left to look at one of the rock formations when laser fire pierced the space between her force and the outcropping to their right. Lasers impacted the front of the formation, striking her tanks in short bursts and doing no damage to the tanks, who had their fields engaged. Immediately, the entire formation shifted; the TTVs slowed and stopped while three mechs moved back to cover them. Her mechs spread out, with two of her lighter units jumping ten meters to the cover on the left.

Mira gave the order to her people to return fire. The lead tank’s turret swiveled and targeted the outcropping; with no regard for the Sowir lasers, it fired.

The explosive shell hit the outcropping and blew it apart, debris exploding in all directions. Mira signaled two of her mechs to go and make sure that there were no enemy survivors. She doubted that there would be.

Two of her LAV-02 Tiger mechs moved quickly to the outcropping and disappeared in the dust, while the rest of her forces kept watch for the enemy. A minute later, her comm chirped.

“No survivors, CL. I count fifteen tool-soldiers with back-mounted laser turrets. No sign of Sowir,” the mech pilot reported.

“Good, get back here,” she said, and then switched to the command line. “Get back in formation and move. This was just a distraction.”

The mounted lasers were the most common weapons that the Sowir outfitted their tool-soldiers with. There was still a bit of confusion as to how exactly they controlled them remotely, but the most widely accepted theory was that it was similar to early human drones, only the Sowir used technology to gain sensory information via their tools, and then used their telepathy-boosting devices to actually give out orders. But the fact that they had sent only this small force to meet her meant that they were stalling for time.

They started moving again down the shallow slope, and soon they reached a cliff. Further away in the distance, Mira could see the beginnings of the Sowir base. It stretched along the canyon edge and outwards and was the size of a smaller city, with an area of just under one hundred square kilometers, arranged in four rings. It was surrounded by short walls, with turrets mounted on them.

Following the Force Commander’s plan, she sent out the orders for four of the tanks to set up in artillery mode while the rest of them continued towards the base. As they exited the relative cover of the cliff and its outcroppings and moved into the open, the Sowir opened fire. Defensive turrets fired energy-based weapons that did no damage to her mechs, tanks, or TTVs.

Then the artillery fire from the four tanks started raining down on the walls of the base, blowing pieces in the air. Mira ordered her force to one of the holes in the wall, while the tanks shifted their fire so as to not endanger them. Her mech was the first to enter, followed by the rest of the mechs, and then tanks. The Sowir had already placed barricades in the wide streets, and energy fire came from the tool-soldiers, but it only succeeded in revealing their positions. She targeted them with her turrets and fired.

Hundreds of bullets—both from her own mech and those around her—ripped through the barrier and shredded both the troops and their pathetic fortifications. In a matter of seconds, the enemy fire stopped. Mira looked behind and saw TTVs already inside the walls, with troops in the process of exiting the transports.

“Alright, everyone keep a clear head,” Mira said over the comms. “There are Sowir here, at any sign of telepathic interference, open comms and inform those in your area. Remember, they can’t control your mind, but they can distract you. Always move in pairs. Proceed as planned.”

After the troops that had left the TTVs started moving as squads among the Sowir buildings, Mira checked to see if her mech’s FTL comm was still transmitting operational data to the base, and then opened a channel to base.

“Company Leader, report,” the Force Commander said.

“There has been no sign of the Sowir, only their soldiers as of yet. But that isn’t unusual for their practices. They shouldn’t have had the time to wake up all of their soldiers, so I doubt that we will see a lot of resistance initially, but the deeper we move inside, the harder it will get. The Sowir must be in the center where they feel safest; once we reach their area of influence, their soldiers will get much more dangerous,” Mira said.

The Sowir soldiers fought much better when there were Sowir around to control them directly; that meant smaller groups, but also deadlier.

“I agree. Field Commander Okoro has agreed to send you some more troops from the fleet if you manage to take down the anti-orbitals,” Force Commander Mao said, and Mira shifted her sights to the large turrets in the distance.

“I’ll see what I can do,” Mira said. “Johannes out.”

Mira turned back to her troops, who had already cleared their immediate surroundings and had started placing defensive turrets. Her tanks were still bombarding the wall, as well as the buildings close to it, some distance from her force’s entry point. Most of the buildings in the base were barracks, or at least something similar. The buildings’ purpose was to house the Sowir tools, so most of them contained foodstuffs and stasis units. And the sheer number of them indicated just how much troops Sowir had on the ground; at one point, most of their troops had been housed here. Now they were spread out underground in bases built on the bones of Guxcacul cities.

Mira opened the channel to her troops and started issuing orders.

Chapter Nine

Dstrat moved inside one of the Sowir buildings in the second ring of the Sowir base, his powered armor’s sensors sweeping the room and coming back clear.

“All clear,” he said over the comms. The rest of his squad, all of whom were wearing battle suits, entered behind him. They took positions around Dstrat’s hulking form and then started examining the building.

“Another foodstuffs storage,” said his Squad Leader, Nathaniel Jürgen. “Exia, place a marker on the battle map and let’s move on.”

A moment later, Dstrat’s battle map updated with a blue marker at his location, meaning that the building had been checked, was clear, and was of no importance. They had yet to encounter the enemy—the tool-soldiers—in this ring of the base. And none of the Empire’s troops had yet encountered the real Sowir, although the Empire’s troops still had to clear the second ring of the base.

Dstrat moved first, turning in his battle armor, and with slow, hulking movements exited the building. His squad took cover behind him and followed as they moved down the street. They moved slowly, but Dstrat was glad to trade the speed and maneuverability of the battle suits for a battle armor; it made him feel unstoppable, and he could only imagine what it would feel like to pilot one of the Empire’s mechs.

The battle armor was one of the newer technologies developed, being only two years old. Its main and only weapons were the two plasma turrets mounted on the arms. And it had a big ten-centimeter-thick layer of armor that completely encased the wearer. It was operated similarly to the mechs, only without full immersion; he had the access point on his neck, but he still needed to move his limbs. The armor read his intent and his movements to assist in executing an action. It was, of course, powered; it used two newly developed batteries that allowed it to operate for five days, or five hours of intense nonstop combat. His version—as he was a Nel—had an added component to accommodate for his tail.

As they moved and cleared one more building, Dstrat couldn’t help but think about what he was doing. Forty years ago, he had been a farmer on Nuva, only waiting for the day when the Sowir finally turned to his world. Waiting for the day that he and his family died, followed by the rest of his race. Now he was hunting those same nightmares. It made him feel ecstatic. A part of him that was Nel relished in the opportunity to kill his enemy, the nightmare that had all but ended the Consortium and his civilization. But the other, more recent part of him that came from the teachings of the Empire whispered caution, restraint. He was not like his nightmare; he was here to help liberate the Guxcacul.

His squad moved to yet another building, and Dstrat used his implant to establish a connection with the door and open them. None of the buildings they had encountered used any kind of encryption; the door computers were simple, and based on those of the Consortium.

As the door opened, Dstrat moved one foot forward to step inside and then stopped. For a moment, he just stared at the opening.

“Dstrat? Do you see something?” SL Jürgen asked.

Immediately, as if a fog was lifted of his mind, he realized what had happened. He turned and shouted, “Move! It’s the Sow—” He didn’t have the chance to finish as an earth-shattering explosion threw him in the air and into the building across the street in a wave of fire and debris.

He smashed through the wall of the building, with the force of the explosion still following him in the form of red flames, and kept going, the force pushing him through the second wall as well. He slammed into the floor and landed on some crates that shattered under his weight with a force that shook him to the bones even with the layer of armor he was wearing, making him lose his vision for a moment.

After he shook himself off, he looked at the left side of his HUD and saw red indications on his armor’s systems. His communications were damaged, he no longer had power in his left leg, and he had lost a big chunk of his shoulder plate.

Slowly, he struggled to stand up, and barely managed it. He looked at the icons that represented his squadmates, and saw that he couldn’t read their suits’ telemetry any longer. He turned towards the hole that he’d made in the wall and started towards the flames, intent on finding out if any of his squadmates still lived, when something slammed into him, throwing him back to the floor.

Then something started firing point blank into his head, obscuring his visual sensors. Dstrat struggled to throw his attacker off, but it had already wrapped its limbs around him and held tightly. He raised his left arm, angled it above his chest, and fired. The first plasma bolt missed but the second hit, and he felt the hold on him weaken. With another shot, the firing on his head stopped and he rolled over his opponent. As his visual sensors recovered, he saw the body of one of the Sowir tool-soldiers, wearing a kind of battle suit he was not familiar with. Again, he struggled to get to his feet, when another of the enemy soldiers slammed into him from behind, pushing Dstrat’s head through the wall.

With his head stuck, he couldn’t see anything behind him, but his armor’s sensors told him that the enemy was firing into his back. The weapons fire did little damage, but Dstrat knew that his battle armor—weakened from the explosion—wouldn’t be able to hold on for much longer. He raised both of his arms and slammed the turrets there into the wall, breaking it and freeing his head. He turned and was met with another form flying towards his head. Instinctively, he pointed his plasma turret and fired, blowing a hole in the main body of the creature. Then he tried to shake off the one on his back, but because of the constraints of his armor, he couldn’t do anything.

As the tool-soldier kept firing its energy weapon into his back, Dstrat could see his armor’s integrity falling, the nanites furiously trying to repair the damage and failing as it accumulated. More shapes started entering the room from the hole he’d made in the wall when he’d crashed through. Not seeing any way out, he slammed his back into the wall, hoping to at least pin the enemy on his back and prevent it from firing. Then he pointed his turrets at the incoming enemies and started firing. Plasma bolts burned through them whenever they hit, just as the enemies fired their own energy weapons from the turrets mounted on their backs.

Eventually, the enemy on his back managed to free two of its seven limbs and wrap them around his right-hand turret. With ungodly strength, it pulled his damaged arm and moved his turret off his targets. Dstrat kept firing with his left, but it wasn’t enough to halt the tide that was crashing on him. Two new tool-soldiers entered the room, moving incredibly fast and wearing heavier suits than the rest. They came straight at him, evading his plasma bolts and slamming into him with such force that he could feel his armor crush and kill the tool-soldier on his back. They gripped and immobilized him with the metallic claw-like attachments on four of their limbs. Then one of them raised two of its limbs, and the sharpened spike endings on them started glowing red.

Dstrat barely had the chance to notice the sensors on his HUD register the increase of heat from them as they came down on his chest, biting into the armor. Completely disarmed and at their mercy, Dstrat could only watch in horror as the enemy started ripping his armor open.

As they reached his flesh, he could feel the heat on his body. But the enemy had stopped his attack. Dstrat watched in confusion, wondering what was happening, when he noticed another shape entering the room. It was tall, and walked/slithered on three tentacle-like legs. It had three arms, with the two placed similarly as those of humans or Nel, but the third one hung above its elongated head that was encased in a helmet. Immediately, Dstrat recognized the shape of his true enemy, the ones who had been moving through the shadows for centuries—the Sowir. It was wearing a suit, so he couldn’t see its eyes, but he felt it studying him.

The Sowir looked at him for a moment, and then it turned around and left. Then he felt the scorching heat and pain as the limb plunged downwards through the hole it had made in the layers of his armor and pierced through his heart, then nothing.

***

Mira raised her left turret and fired even as her mech staggered under the massive explosion from the building on her right. A hail of bullets shredded through the approaching enemy troops. Her mech smashed with its side into the roof of the building on her left, but Mira managed to right herself and regain balance. She targeted the enemy with her shoulder-mounted laser and unleashed a devastating storm of heat and light, burning scores of the enemy troops in seconds.

The enemy was firing with their energy weapons, choosing to focus on the front of her formation. Their energy beams hit her tanks, with varying degrees of success, as a few of the tanks had had their field integrity compromised by the debris from the building that had exploded. But quickly they recovered, and the enemy fire became ineffective again.

Her tanks returned fire with their turrets, destroying buildings and the enemy positions with ease. Seeing that their attack had failed, the enemy quickly retreated, a clear indication that there was a Sowir present. Quickly, Mira issued orders for her force’s lighter units—battle armors and heavy infantry—to follow, find, and eliminate the Sowir that was guiding this force.

Then her comms and battle map started flashing, with reports of a Sowir counterattack. They had lost contact with three squads, and seven others were reporting casualties and injured. The reports were indicating massive Sowir tool-soldiers numbers that threatened to overwhelm her troops. Mira glanced to her battle map and the location of the Sowir anti-orbital weapons. She ordered the majority of her troops to find defensible positions and to hunker down, and then ordered her small force forward towards the anti-orbitals.

Her tanks and mechs moved quickly through the streets, ignoring any attempt by the Sowir to ambush them and draw them into a fight. Her tanks cleared barricades placed in front of them and fired in passing on any Sowir troop positions in their way. As they drew near their target, the number of Sowir troops increased, but still they didn’t have anything that could seriously threaten Mira’s force. The Sowir, like all of the other races of the Consortium, had never really had a land war where they fought against someone that was their equal. They’d never had the need to develop technology and weapons for anything more than police force. And the Sowir had defeated the other races in the Consortium by using overwhelming numbers and treachery.

Mira targeted the Sowir tool-soldiers between her force and the anti-orbital facilities, firing her laser into their barricades, melting the defenses and killing the enemy. Her other mechs pushed forward and destroyed the gates of the facilities allowing her tanks inside. Seven anti-orbital turrets were placed at the corners of the large wall-enclosed facility. She ordered her force to proceed and destroy them, just as she settled her mech and targeted one closest to her. Bolts slammed from her mech’s legs into the ground anchoring her as the Gauss cannon from her back rose and settled over her shoulder. As it powered up, she targeted the base of the turret, and then fired. The night turned to day as a white streak of fire and metal erupted out of the electromagnetic coils of her mech’s turret. The projectile hit its target and blew a hole through it.

A few moments later, an explosion rocked the turret and sent it into the air in a cloud of red. She was about to turn and target the next one when something entered the courtyard from the other side. It was a vehicle of some kind, with turrets mounted on it. It fired as it moved, its energy beams bathing Mira’s mech and dissipating as they were met with its shimmering field. Mira turned her right arm and fired with her 30mm rotary cannon, and watched as the bullets shredded its armor. A few moments later, it stopped dead, its weapons no longer firing.

Mira looked around and saw fire and destruction; dead Sowir tool-soldiers lay down on the ground in hordes. The remaining anti-orbital cannons were crumbling under the combined fire of her mechs and tanks. Seeing the last one fall, Mira opened a channel to the base.

“The anti-orbital weapons are down. Requesting immediate reinforcements,” Mira said.

“The reinforcements are on their way, ETA twenty-four minutes,” Force Commander Mao said over the comm.

Mira glanced at her battle map, seeing the numbers her people were relaying back at her. The Sowir were pushing hard, and there had been reports of them taking to field and controlling their tool-soldiers directly. And her troops were taking casualties, even though they were now defending.

Mira started giving orders for her force to reinforce their defensive positions inside the courtyard as they waited for the reinforcements.

There were a lot more Sowir tool-soldiers than they had anticipated, certainly more than what had been in the troop ships. Either they had a lot more troops available to them than the Empire had previously believed, or they had pulled some of their underground troops to the surface. But ultimately, their numbers would mean nothing belowground in the tunnels of Guxaxac, where most of the fighting would take place. The Empire’s superior technology would prevail, as now the Sowir didn’t have near unlimited troops to draw on. The rest of their Dominion would be far too busy to send reinforcements.

Chapter Ten

Gaxasas city – 17 hours later

Sahib shot a Sowir in the head. As it dropped, he could feel a fog lift of his mind and he could see the tool-soldiers around them freeze and get mauled down by the bullets, plasma, and energy weapons. He moved quickly, exiting from building he was in and jumping on the Guxcacul walker-transport, grabbing hold of the railings not designed for human hands. Immediately behind him followed his six squadmates and Riss. He held firm as it started walking up the pillar to the next level of the city that the Sowir now used as their base.

He had stopped counting how many Sowir and their tool-soldiers he had killed after the first hour of combat. It seemed as if there was no end to them. He and his squad had been a part of the Guxcacul offensive. Every able Guxcacul soldier was a part of it, thousands of soldiers attacking the Sowir bases from beneath, just as the Empire pushed from above.

The walker reached the next level, and some of the Guxcacul soldiers started moving from the back of the transport to the buildings. Sahib, the rest of his squad, and Riss waited for the Guxcacul troops to disembark, as they would be of limited use fighting in the strangely built Guxcacul buildings—at least, the humans would. Then, after they were alone on the walker, it started moving further up the pillar to a carved-out platform. He and his squad disembarked there, and two more walkers arrived soon after from the other pillars or bridges that connected the various parts of the city.

Sahib, Riss, and his squad followed the Sowir troops into the main city building, and what the Sowir now used as the base headquarters. Upon entering, the Guxcacul soldiers opened fire with energy weapons similar to those of the Sowir mounted on their middle arm set, while they used their top scorpion claw-like arms to batter away any Sowir that tried to get into melee range. The Sowir wore full body armor suits, similar to the Empire’s battle suits. Riss wore his Warpath battle gear, which allowed him better movement, as it covered only his critical areas.

The energy beams from the Sowir slowed and then stopped as the Guxcacul cleared the entrance. Sahib and his people followed deeper inside the building. They took the twisting bridge-like staircases that led to the top level, where they encountered another enemy force. Sahib raised his NP-04 plasma rifle and fired at the tool-soldiers racing towards him. The bolt went right through the first, and scorched the second enemy. Then another tool jumped out of the small defensive wall, this one dressed in a heavier armor. Sahib fired at it, but its armor soaked up the hits, although Sahib could see damage. As it almost reached Sahib, Bella stepped in front of him carrying a shield, one that had been designed to fight against the tool-soldier in melee combat.

She used the full strength of her powered suit to bat the attacker to the wall. Then she stabbed at him with her monomolecular blade. The mono-blade pushed through and impaled the creature, but it wasn’t enough to outright kill it. So Sahib approached and fired three more shots point blank and killed it. As more of the enemy troops left the wall, Riss moved in front and let loose with his own, more powerful plasma rifles, mowing them down.

The Guxcacul soldiers charged the wall, crossing over and killing the defending enemy. Sahib and his squad followed, but as they entered deeper into the building, they were forced to split. Sahib, his squad, and Riss took one of the side tunnels, while the other Guxcacul soldiers took the other four.

Riss led the way with Sahib and his team following. Sahib noticed his sensors ping on movement ahead, and he and his people spread out in the cramped passage. The enemy came at them from around the bend, firing their energy weapons from their backs. But his force quickly cut them down.

They continued moving forward, clearing rooms and nearing the most probable location for the Sowir control room. All tunnels eventually led to that central room, but when Sahib and his people arrived, none of the other had reached it yet. Instead, they were met with another fifty tool-soldiers and five Sowir. Immediately after noticing them, the Sowir directed their tools to attack.

Loca stepped forward and pointed her heavy weapon, the CFG-02. The centrifugal-based weapon fired and sent thousands of bullets into the room, smashing computer screens and furniture and ripping through the enemy. The Sowir hid behind their tools, but even with that, two of them fell to the onslaught.

Behind Loca, Riss charged inside, firing his plasma rifles and smashing into the group of the enemy tool-soldiers. The arthropod grabbed them with his upper claws and then fired his plasma rifles point blank. His movements were quick, precise, and deadly, and Sahib was reminded that Riss was a Sentinel from Clan Warpath, and that even though he had a completely different body shape, he had trained with Adrian, who’d helped him develop fighting styles.

Riss was unstoppable as he used his greater mass to pin and kill the enemy, whether by his claws, stabbing through them with his feet, or by liquefying their insides with his plasma rifles. Sahib provided help and covering fire from the entrance of the room, just as his squadmates moved inside and started clearing the remainder of the enemy. The three Sowir survivors, seeing that they would lose, decided to charge Riss in a futile attack. They were armed with energy weapons similar to what they had given their tools, but it didn’t matter. Upon seeing them, Riss turned and blew one apart with his plasma rifle. The second he hit with his clawed hand and sent flying into the wall on the other side of the room, while he grabbed the third one and squeezed with his other claw, slowly decapitating him.

Sahib motioned for his squad to sweep the room, and then opened a channel to the Guxcacul forces, telling them that they had secured the control room.

***

Squad Leader Zhu “Pyro” Zhang Wei ducked behind a rock as the Sowir threw something at him. He heard it impact the wall not far from him, and then he was shaken by a small explosion. He peeked out of his cover and fired his CF-13 light assault rifle, sending centrifugally propelled bullets right into the Sowir, puncturing him with dozens of holes.

“Take care, they have some kind of grenades. Less powerful than ours, though,” Zhu warned over the comms.

“It won’t help them much,” Anton said over their squad comms.

“You should really work on that arrogance of yours,” Dson chimed in. “If they bring to bear enough troops, there won’t be anything that we can do. They will overwhelm us.”

“I doubt that they will be able to d that. We are hitting them all across the planet; if they pull forces from one side to help another, we get through,” Toferami added.

“Let’s focus on taking this base, then we can weigh in on the probable Sowir decisions,” Zhu said. Then he proceeded to move to the next rock in the vast tunnel leading downwards towards a former Guxcacul city, which was now a Sowir base.

There were many different types of tunnels, from small tunnels barely large enough for a human to move through them, to vast tunnels large enough for several tanks moving beside one another to pass. Zhu glanced backwards and saw exactly that, four tanks moving towards the massive gate below that led into the city proper. They knew that those tanks would be of limited use inside the city, as they weren’t really built anything like human or Nel cities. But the Sowir had the gate closed, and they would need the firepower to open it.

Zhu raised his rifle again and killed the remaining enemies in the vicinity of the gate. He then stepped back and let the tanks park themselves across from it, preparing to fire.

Zhu watched as they started bombarding the gate, blowing away chunks of it with each hit. The Guxcacul gates were tough, and the Sowir had repaired and improved them a bit after they’d taken the city. But in the end, they wouldn’t hold against the tanks’ assault.

As the tunnel walls shook, Zhu glanced at the ceiling, and yet again admired the ingenuity and skill of the Guxcacul engineers. The tunnel might have looked rough, but it was anything but. It was reinforced from all sides, so that even the detonations of Empire’s tanks against the gate didn’t compromise its integrity.

Then he felt the ground shake as the gate blew inward and dropped on the floor of the city. Tanks moved inside and immediately came under fire from Sowir turrets placed on the city’s dome ceiling. The tanks shrugged off the attacks and returned fire, blowing the turrets and the buildings on the dome ceiling apart, raining dust and rocks down on the rest of the city.

Then they moved along the entrance platform and took positions near the bridges leading to buildings suspended in the middle of the air. Then the Empire’s walkers entered, built based on Guxcacul specifications, exactly for easier movement around their cities. Zhu and his squad got onto one and held on tight as it started walking on one of the city’s pillar bridges, on its way to the next level.

***

Field Commander Dayo Okoro looked at the holo in his battle center, following the many battles around the planet. He was getting real-time updates from every battle via FTL comms. His forces had been pushing the Sowir on all fronts, just as the Guxcacal pushed from below. The Sowir had been unprepared to fight on many fronts at the same time, and were losing ground because of it. Already the kill count for his forces had reached 5 digits, and soon would pass into six. Although the confirmed kill count for the true Sowir was lower than what he’d expected, only around four hundred. But even with their success, there were areas where they were having difficulties.

The Sowir just had too many of their tool-soldiers available to throw at his forces, slowing down their advance and giving the Sowir a chance to set up traps. And those traps and ambushes were where most of his casualties came from. The Sowir had a very small arsenal, and very few things they possessed could actually harm his people, aside from accumulated fire and their melee weapons.

The problem was—as they had anticipated—numbers. And the Sowir could use their troops as sacrificial pawns in order to get bigger rewards. Dayo knew that this campaign would be a long one. For now, their main focus was in taking out as many Sowir as possible, as that lowered the effectiveness of their troops. If they managed to take them all out, they would have a much easier job later. Their tools couldn’t function for long without guidance, and they would turn feral and start attacking each other and everything around them.

The other problem was the Sowir food supply. According to their intel, Sowir had about three years’ worth of supplies for both themselves and their troops. Which was why Dayo had chosen to focus on attacking as many of their underground bases as possible.

His campaign rested on their ability to lower the effectiveness of the Sowir troops, which meant direct attacks on the Sowir and their supplies. His people had orders to ignore the Sowir attempts to pull them into prolonged fights with hordes of their troops, and instead focus on those troops that were clearly guided by a Sowir. This early in the campaign, killing one Sowir was worth tens of thousands of their troops.

With a flick of his hand, Dayo focused the holo on the deep underground, where the Guxcacul counterattack was taking place. They had taken the last three years while the Empire prepared and told the Guxcacul how to build FTL comms, and had them integrated into the Empire’s systems. So Dayo had real-time updates from their side as well.

The Guxcacul counterattack was very well coordinated, and while their equipment wasn’t as advanced as that of the Empire, they were a match for the Sowir. They were advancing a bit slower than what Dayo would have liked, but they were gaining ground. He saw that they had almost captured one of the Sowir bases deep underground. There was a great amount of risk for them, because they didn’t have anywhere near the number of troops as either the Sowir or the Empire, and they could be overrun far easier if the Sowir decided to amass troops and send a large force against them. But it was neither Dayo’s nor the Empire’s place to tell them that they couldn’t fight for their world.

Dayo would need to make sure to minimized the risk by taking out as many of the Sowir troops as he was able. As he started reading reports from the various fronts, he was interrupted by a comm from the fleet.

“What can I do for you, Fleet Commander?” Dayo asked.

“Our cargo ships have arrived. As soon as they place the defense platforms in orbit, I will take the fleet out of system. If there is anything else that you need, now is the time to ask for it,” Fleet Commander Bethany Jones responded.

“Of course, Fleet Commander. I doubt that we will need anything, but I will check with my people,” Dayo said.

“Very well, Field Commander. You have a couple of hours before we leave,” she said, and then ended the call with a salute.

Dayo signaled to one of his aides and sent him off to the quartermaster building on the other side of the base. With that taken care of, he returned his attention to the holo and the many battles raging across the planet.

Chapter Eleven

January; Year 36 of the Empire; Thanatos – Fleet Headquarters; Nineteen days later

Laura sat in a chair that had become uncomfortable three hours ago and listened to the presentations from the Fleet’s best scientists and engineers. They were presenting her with the new technologies that could be used for their ships in the future, based on the technology they had received from the sphere. There was surprisingly little technology on weapons and military.

As it was told to her, the People hadn’t really had a military, or a need to develop weapons. They were the oldest race in the galaxy, and their technology had been so far ahead of anyone else that any attack against them had been laughable. They had had weapons, but all of those had been energy-based weapons, far ahead of anything that the Empire could even attempt to make. It required resources and elements that they hadn’t even discovered yet. But there were other things, nonmilitary in nature, that Laura and Seo-yun hoped they could adapt and turn into weapons.

She gave out a mental sigh of relief when they reached the last item on the list.

“Energy shields,” said Ritsarni, one of Fleet’s leading scientists, but also one of the youngest.

Laura looked at him without speaking, willing him to continue.

“Ahem, well…we found blueprints for the energy shield, which we are confident we can adapt for our needs and install onto our ships,” Ritsarni said.

“We already have shimmering field technology,” Laura added tiredly. A lot of the technology they had presented to her today, the fleet already had something similar. But she knew that she shouldn’t have been surprised about that. They couldn’t really make a big jump in technology, even if they had the knowledge, because they lacked the means to build what they found in the sphere. It would take them at least ten years to reach a level where they could start utilizing some of the more advanced technologies from the sphere. At least, advanced compared to the Empire’s technology. What the People had had at the peak of their civilization was so far ahead of them that it might as well have been magic. They had the data, but they lacked knowledge and understanding. But that would come with time.

“Yes. But the shimmering field technology doesn’t really stop the energy weapons, it dissipates them around their impact point, basically robbing the energy beam of its power. A powerful enough weapon would still transfer some of the energy through the field,” Ritsarni said.

“And an energy shield does what, exactly?” Laura asked, and immediately regretted her choice of words as she saw the look on Ritsarni’s face.

“Well,” Ritsarni started enthusiastically, “the shield matrix works in combination with the applied energy source to—” Laura stopped him by raising her right hand. She then covered her face with her other hand and took a deep breath.

“Could you explain it in layman’s terms, please?” she asked weakly. She had spent the last six hours being bombarded with terms and facts that she barely understood, and she could not take one more.

Ritsarni looked crestfallen, but Laura refused to be swayed, so he righted himself and started speaking.

“The shield basically negates the energy that comes in contact with it. It’s not really that simple; it doesn’t just negate energy, it makes it…It is a bit more complicated than that. It is—” He’d started to steer back into scientific talk, but one look from Laura made him focus. “Right. It negates energy by pushing with equal force from within, basically,” he said, and Laura could see that he wasn’t happy with his explanation.

“Alright,” Laura said. “Convince me that it is better than what we already have.”

“The People didn’t invent these shields as defenses against attacks; they were used for deep mining of suns,” Ritsarni said.

“Mining of the suns?” Laura asked incredulously.

“A certain type of sun, yes. Apparently some suns possess an element that was essential for their more advanced technology, and could only be found inside certain suns. Although later they discovered a means to make it artificially, but that was hundreds of thousands of years after. The energy shield allowed them to build their mining facilities inside the suns. The shield we are capable of building now won’t be able to do that, of course. We don’t have a power source strong enough to do that yet. That is the limit of these shields; the amount of power we can pump into them dictates the level of energy they can stop.”

“So, will they be better than the shimmering field?” Laura pressed.

“In some ways yes, in others no. The shimmering field doesn’t require an equal amount of energy to dissipate the attack. If an attack more powerful than our field hits it, it will still lose some of its power from the field. If an attack more powerful than the energy shield hits, it will disrupt the energy matrix and simply pass through.”

“That to me sounds like our field tech is superior.”

“As I said, in some ways yes, in others no. The greatest advantage I believe this technology holds is that it can be configured to stop kinetic energy,” Ritsarni added.

“It can stop kinetic weapons?” Laura asked, intrigued.

“Yes. It can rob the weapons of their energy, if the matrix is properly configured, making the attack effectively stop moving. The People used them on their world ships to stop dust or anything else that might impact their hulls. The shields are limited by our power-generating capabilities, but as the team on Sanctuary draws closer to building a working prototype of their old power source designs from the sphere, I think that we should take a look at energy shields as a possible addition to our newer ships.”

“Well, that is interesting. We won’t start building the new fleets for a few years, but yes…this can be something that we consider for that.” Laura nodded. “Thank you, Ritsarni. I will think on this, and we will see.”

***

Laura was at her home on Thanatos when a call came in for her. She sat down at her holo table and answered. A video window popped out above the desk and Adrian looked at her.

“Adrian!” she said. “I’m glad that you called. I have been wanting to speak with you.”

Adrian smiled at her words. They had of course been in contact almost daily, as he gave her reports on the offensive. But this wasn’t about Fleet business; it was a personal call.

“I didn’t have anything better to do, honestly. We are still waiting for the Third Fleet to arrive, and I have done as much to prepare as I can,” Adrian said.

The Second and the Vanguard Fleets were in a staging system, waiting on the Third Fleet and some more reinforcements from the Empire, preparing to attack the Sowir home system. The fleet had passed through seven Sowir systems in the last nineteen days before the Sowir had decided to abandon the other three and move all their assets to their home system. But as the fleets had passed through the abandoned systems, they’d found that the Sowir had already destroyed their own assets in them.

Laura glared at him in faux anger. “You want to say that you only called me because you are bored?” Adrian gave her a boyish grin that reminded her of a time when he was much younger, and her face softened. “How have you been?” she asked.

Adrian’s face changed, and she could see that he was tired.

“I’m good,” he said, and Laura gave him a look of disbelief. “Okay, I’m tired.” He grimaced. “The Sowir don’t know when to stop. Any sane race would have surrendered long ago. The more I think about it, the more I become convinced that we made a mistake when we broke our agreement with them. That made us untrustworthy in their eyes; they will not let themselves be fooled again. They would rather die than let what they believe we would do if they surrender happen.” He shook his head and his right hand made the Nel gesture for frustration.

Laura shared in his sentiment. At the time, it had been a good decision, and she would not allow herself to dwell on it. But she knew from their prisoners that the Sowir believed that the Empire was on the side of Nelus, as they knew that Nel were part of the Empire. And that, along with the fact that the Empire had broken its non-aggression agreement with them, made them think that humanity would allow the Nel to do the same thing to the Sowir as what they had done to the Nel and the other races of the Consortium. They might not have seen anything wrong with what they were doing, but they understood that the Nel did not share that opinion. They knew the Consortium laws; their crimes were unforgivable.

“Do you think that you can force them to surrender?” Laura asked.

“We can enforce a surrender even without their compliance; we just destroy every asset they have in space and blockade the planet. Even if they don’t want to talk with us, there is little that they can do. But I think that eventually, when they realize what we are doing, they will start responding to our attempts at communication, if only out of curiosity.”

Laura nodded. “Let’s not talk about them anymore. We spend most of our time with them on our minds as it is,” she said. “So…I hear you and Bethany have been talking again.” She feigned disinterest.

Adrian rolled his eyes at her. “It was just one lunch!” he said, then narrowed his eyes at her. “How did you even know? We were here, on Harbinger…” Then he raised his hand and looked at the bracer on it. “Iris? It was you, wasn’t it? I told you to stop doing that. Oh, and now you ignore me, of course you do.”

Laura smiled at his ramblings. “Don’t be mad at her, she worries about you.”

“There isn’t anything for her to worry about.”

“She thinks that you are alone too much,” Laura added gently.

“Alone? I’m constantly surrounded by people!” Adrian argued.

“Yes, but you are their commander. And yes, I know you have friends. But you don’t have anyone with whom you can share your life.”

“Beth and I are just friends,” he said.

“Whatever you say, Adrian. But there was a time when you were in love with her.”

“Once. I don’t have the time now for those things,” Adrian said stubbornly.

“Perhaps you can try and make time,” Laura retorted.

Adrian sighed. “Perhaps.” He paused, and looked conflicted for a moment before his face cleared. “Tell me, how was your day?” he asked, changing the subject. Laura resigned herself to the end of that conversation and went along with his not-so-subtle topic change. She proceeded to describe to him in excruciating detail the flow of her meetings that day.

***

Adrian stood as Bethany entered his quarters. They embraced warmly and she took a seat at the table. Goran, Adrian’s steward, entered from the kitchen and started putting food on the table. Bethany sighed in satisfaction as Goran removed the covers from the plates and the smell of the dishes spread through the room.

“That looks delicious,” Bethany said. “I skipped lunch and have been looking forward to this all day.”

Adrian smiled. “Well, then, there is no need to wait,” he said, and grabbed a big chunk of synth meat. He cut off a chunk and put it in his mouth. There was no difference in taste from real meat, and over the years it had replaced meat harvested from living animals. Now meat was grown in vats on “farms,” but with no actual living animals. But cooked meals weren’t really that commonplace nowadays; they were for special occasions. Most of the Empire ate food prepared in bio-fabricators, and while it could be made to taste like anything you imagined, it was always in the form of gray paste.

Beth released another sound of satisfaction as she took a bite of her own piece.

“This is the best thing I have ever eaten,” she said blissfully.

Adrian nodded in agreement. “It is pretty good. I’ve been trying to get the recipe from Goran for years, but that man is one tough nut to crack,” he said. Then he made a Nel gesture for interest as he asked, “So why did you skip lunch?”

They made small talk as they ate, exchanging funny stories and swapping experiences from their various positions in command over the years and how they dealt with insubordination. Adrian told her about their old team from the Academy, which she had lost touch with, and he promised to get them all together again.

Then Beth paused and looked at him strangely for a moment before shaking her head. “I don’t think that I will ever get used to that,” she commented.

“Used to what?” Adrian asked, confused.

“Those gestures you are making as you speak,” she answered.

Adrian looked at his hand and saw that his fingers were bent and pointed upwards in a Nel sign that meant comfortableness. Startled, he dropped his hand to the table.

“Oh, I didn’t realize I was doing it,” he said.

“No, no. It’s not bad, I’m just not used to seeing that. I don’t really interact with any Nel privately; I have only seen it from a few of my subordinates.”

“I do spend a lot of time around Nel, and count some among my best friends. I guess that it just became a part of me,” Adrian said.

Bethany looked at him sadly. “I knew that you must have changed, but these past few days have just served to show me the extent of it. We lost so much time…” Beth said remorsefully.

“Neither one of us is the same person we were then.”

“No, we are not,” Beth said softly. She picked up a fork and started playing with it in silence for a few moments before speaking. “I heard some rumors…”

“Rumors?” Adrian asked.

“Yes.” She raised her eyes to look at him, and she dropped her fork to the table in front of them. “About a floating ball.”

Adrian smiled. “Floating ball?”

“You know what I’m talking about.”

Adrian glanced down at the fork, then pointed his hand at it and slowly raised the object using telekinesis. Technically, he didn’t need to move his hand, but he had found that telekinesis was much easier for him to use with hand motions; it was easier for his mind to recognize what he wanted to do. He didn’t need to concentrate as much.

Bethany looked at the floating fork openmouthed. Then Adrian slowly moved it in front of her and lowered it to the table, releasing his grasp on it. Beth reached and picked it up, studying it in fascination.

That allowed Adrian to study her in turn. Her red hair was now about the same length as it had been back in the Academy, cut to her jawline. But her green eyes no longer had the same shine as they used to. There was tiredness in them, on her face as well. She was still as beautiful as she was the day he met her—there was no sign of age on her face—but Adrian could still see it in the movement of her facial muscles. There were times when his mind made him see more than he should, more than the person he was talking to intended to reveal.

His mind could process and interpret her slight movements, tell him what was hidden behind believable smiles and deft topic changes. That skill was something that gave him an edge over his opponents in fights. But it was also what had given birth to the chasm between him and his friends. He knew that was one of the reasons why he interacted more with Nel. They were capable of hiding their emotions behind bland faces that they wore in public with much greater skill. They had evolved that way. It was why they used their hand gestures to make their emotions clear. It made it much easier for Adrian to connect with the people who could reveal to him only what they wanted to.

It was also one of the main reasons why he hadn’t pushed himself to learn more about his telepathy. Even without Iris and Laura telling him, he had seen what was happening, how he was becoming isolated from people. If he could read people’s minds, it would have only made that worse.

Adrian looked at Beth and found he could see right through her. He had seen everything that day when he’d told her that they could be only friends. She wanted more, he knew it. And he also knew that he wanted that as well.

After a moment of hesitation, he stood and took the two steps to stand in front of her. She was so engrossed with the fork in her hands that she didn’t notice until he gently placed his palm against her cheek and turned her around. He saw her startle, and then he leaned down and kissed her.

She hesitated for a moment before giving in. The kiss was everything he had dreamed it would be, and more. But too soon it ended. And Adrian straightened. His hand was still on her face, and both of them were flushed and breathing heavily.

He lowered his hand, taking hers in his and helping her stand. He felt her against him, and then guided her to the doors leading to his bedroom.

***

A few hours later, Adrian gazed at Beth as he tenderly traced circles on her bare shoulder. They were in his bed, and Beth was asleep. Adrian just couldn’t let sleep take him. He had imagined this moment for years, and now it was real. He was afraid that if he went to sleep, he would wake up with all of this being just a dream, or the same delusion but induced in his mind space.

He knew that it couldn’t be a dream, but the fear was still there. He had never let anyone inside his inner circle. Never opened himself to another, except for Iris, who was almost a part of him. But he felt that he was ready to do that with Beth.

It was close to morning, and Adrian knew that they wouldn’t be able to hide this. By midday, everyone would know, if they didn’t already. But there wasn’t really a problem; personal relationships weren’t forbidden, although there were some stipulations. And Adrian technically wasn’t a part of the Fleet; he was a Clan Leader.

Beth moved in her sleep, getting closer to him and making herself comfortable. And Adrian finally allowed himself to drift away, and fall asleep.

***

Harbinger – three days later

Adrian sat in the command chair in Harbinger’s command center juggling eight lead balls in the air around him and watching on the holo as the three fleets formed into one formation. With the reinforcements from the Empire, he now commanded eighteen hundred ships, the bulk of which were the Furious-class missile ships and the Kraken-class dreadnoughts. And after a bit of shuffling, Adrian had leveled the size of the three fleets, getting all three of them to six hundred ships. Along with the reinforcements had arrived a special ship, carrying Sowir prisoners from Sanctuary, for the part of the plan that would come after they took the system.

All ships slowly formed into the formation that Adrian had chosen, and soon ready signals started arriving at his c-board. When all of the ships were green, Adrian sent the countdown for their entrance into hyperspace.

They wouldn’t be using the trans-lane to enter the Sowir system, as every probe or drone they’d sent through had gotten destroyed before it managed to send anything back to them. There could be many reasons for that. But the most likely one was that the trans-station in the Sowir system was blocked; perhaps it now resided inside a planet. It was strange, as it had worked when the Union ship had passed through. That system was one of those that they had sent their smaller scout ships to explore. But that had been a long time ago; orbits of planets could change, or something else could have been moved inside the trans-station.

That was why they would arrive at the Sowir system through hyperspace. The travel time was around 35 days, and Adrian planned on dropping out of hyperspace further away from the system’s barrier and then coming in slowly after they had a picture of the entire system.

The countdown reached zero, and Adrian felt his ship engage its hyperdrives along with every other ship in his joint fleet. A moment later, they were on their way towards the Sowir home system.

Chapter Twelve

Sanctuary – Ten days later

Emperor Tomas Klein walked through a cave, surrounded by glowing crystal trees. At his side was Seo-yun, the woman he loved, his partner. He liked walking through this specific cave, as it was the place that soothed him, and allowed him clarity at times when he needed it the most.

“The Trivaxians are not happy,” Tomas said as they stopped in front of an unusually tall and bright crystal formation.

Seo-yun snorted. “Of course they aren’t happy. They have been trying to get our advanced technology for the past three years.”

“I gave them the conditions for their inclusion in the Empire. The longer they try to circumvent them, the longer it will take until they attain our level of technology.”

“It is not that simple, Tomas. You want them to do all of it on their own. And it’s not easy, inventing hyperspace generators and then building a hyperspace-capable ship without our help. Let alone then founding a viable colony in another star system,” she said seriously. “And I am not even considering the other conditions you have set for them. It is too much, Tomas.”

“It is,” he agreed. “But the things we know and possess are dangerous. I will not give them technology they are not ready for.”

“We received our knowledge from the Union ship, and are now learning from what Axull Darr left us,” Seo-yun pointed out.

Tomas nodded. “Yes. We were given a lot, but we were more mature than them. In our time bound to our homeworld, we have experienced many things, seen many horrors and misuses of power. That is why we have a responsibility. Both because of the trust our ancestor put in us, and because we know what the price for careless and incompetent use of such power is.”

Seo-yun started walking without responding, but Tomas knew that deep down she agreed with him; that was why she argued with him about it constantly. It had taken both of them a long time to come to terms with the fact that they had power and influence, and that they were the ones making the choices that could affect and dictate the lives of many.

Tomas hastened to catch up to her, and then matched her pace as she walked deeper into the cave. Behind him, their escorts kept out of hearing distance. Tomas looked around as they walked, seeing all the different crystal colors and the countless different shapes and forms they grew in. After a few minutes of silence, he spoke again.

“The Furvor are doing very good. They have implemented every change we asked of them,” Tomas said.

“They had also attacked and killed many Trivaxians,” Seo-yun added.

“And they will suffer penalties for that. But eventually they too will be a part of the Empire.”

“It will be a nightmare trying to convince and explain that to the Trivaxians.”

“By the time they complete their own conditions, years will have passed. And if I allow them in, it will be after they have completely adopted our ways. And if they are truly a part of the Empire, they will understand,” Tomas explained.

Seo-yun was about to respond when one of their escorts approached.

“Apologies, but you are needed back at the palace. Doctor Singh has urgent news.”

Tomas cast one more glance to the glowing forest stretching in front of him, then turned to the man.

“Let’s go.”

***

“I don’t know how long I will be able to keep this under wraps, but it will get out sooner or later. That’s why I need to see how you want to handle this as soon as possible,” Doctor Singh said as she paced in front of Tomas’s desk.

“And what exactly is ‘it’?” Seo-yun asked from the couch where she was sitting.

Singh paused and looked at Seo-yun before responding. “We are going to have the first interspecies child,” she said excitingly.

“The first what?” Tomas asked.

“A couple came to the Olympus City hospital this morning, because the woman was feeling ill. After a couple of tests, it was confirmed that she was in fact two and a half months pregnant. She is human, but the father is Nel,” Singh said.

“That’s possible?” Tomas asked, surprised. It had never really crossed his mind before.

“Before today, we had believed that it was not, in fact, possible,” Singh said. “Our DNA is too different, even with our common ancestry. Both ours and Nel experts had agreed that it wasn’t possible. Until today. After it was confirmed, I called our best geneticists and doctors to try and figure out how it happened and what we can do to help the process along,” she said energetically. “What the geneticists determined was that apparently there are markers and triggers inside both Nel and human bodies—or more precisely, our reproductive organs—that facilitate interspecies breeding.”

“Axull Darr…” Seo-yun said, grabbing the attention of both Tomas and Singh. “He knew that eventually the races he fathered would meet. He must have made sure that no matter how much of a different path we evolved on, we would always be able to reproduce with each other.”

“We think so as well,” Singh said. “The fetus is undergoing changes that are not normal in either Nel or human pregnancies. It is molding and changing the genetic information from both of its parents to create a stable being. We believe that the pregnancy will last a bit longer, maybe around a full year, to accommodate this phase in the development.”

“That is amazing, and interesting. And while I am surprised that this hasn’t happened sooner—with how close our peoples became—I don’t see how it will really change anything,” Tomas said.

“Oh, but it will,” Singh said. “Now, or rather after the baby is born, and if it is whole and healthy, we will need to reevaluate the entire progeny program.”

“You want to mix human and Nel programs,” Seo-yun guessed.

Singh nodded. “If everything goes well. There is no reason not to do it; we are currently randomly matching seeds and eggs, but are keeping Nel and human separate. What we need to decide is whether we want to have a rule that matches a human with a Nel, or just keep the randomness and only merge the programs,” Singh said.

“If we use one of each, we will eventually see only people with mixed heritages, no pure humans or pure Nel. We will see that anyways in the long run, once it comes out that it is possible, no matter what we do,” Seo-yun said.

Tomas raised his head to the ceiling. His life was so much stranger than what he’d imagined it would be when he had created Olympus. He turned to Singh.

“Alright, tell me everything…”

Chapter Thirteen

February; Guxaxac – Seven days later

Platoon Leader Mira Johannes stepped on a Sowir tool-soldier with her mech as she entered the platform carved into the side of the former Guxcacul city. Her turrets were constantly firing at the waves of enemies charging the broken gate of the city, killing them in such numbers that soon a wall of the dead was formed some twenty meters in front of her and her troops. The tool-soldiers were climbing their dead and charging to their deaths while they fired the turrets on their backs that did nothing to falter the slowly moving line of mechs. From time to time, one or two would get close enough to try and use their melee weapons, but they were always either killed by a mech stepping on them, or by soldiers that had taken cover behind the mechs.

Eventually, they cleared the platform and moved to its edge, with the mechs firing on targets in the distance. The mechs themselves were ill-equipped for fighting in the cities—they were too heavy and wrongly built to move on the Guxcacal pillar-bridges—so aside from clearing the gates, their job was to fire on targets of opportunity with their long-range weapons.

Mira targeted a group of enemy tool-soldiers that were just exiting one of the buildings suspended in the air in the center of the city. She fired three missiles and blew it apart, along with any other enemy tool-soldiers and hopefully some Sowir.

The fighting had been hellish; there was no end to the numbers that the Sowir could throw at them. And they had started pulling back before the Empire troops could get to them, choosing to sacrifice large numbers of their tools for escape and time. And every time the Empire’s troops tried to follow them, they ran into traps and ambushes that often ended in the Sowir’s favor.

The Sowir might have had inferior technology, but there was not a lot that the Empire’s troops could do when their enemy placed hidden explosives and collapsed several tons of rocks on their heads, or when they sent a hundred times the Empire’s numbers to confront them.

Mira and her other mechs stood at the edge of the platform, covering the rest of their troops as they moved into the city. To date, the Empire had taken five Sowir bases, while the Guxcacul had taken two, with this one being the one that they had coordinated to attack together and join the two forces, as this one was deep enough that the Guxcacul could reach it from their last city.

As Mira provided covering fire with her mech, her battle map updated with signals from the Guxcacul, who had just breached the gate on the other side of the city. She used her visual sensors to magnify and watch as the Guxcacul troops attacked.

They went in with their counterpart to human tanks, their combat walkers, which they had designed and built during the Sowir invasion, but too late to actually help. The combat walkers cleared the platform and Guxcacul troops in their armor suits entered with their transport walkers.

She knew that it would be easier for the Guxcacul to fight. This was their home turf; everything inside the city was designed and built to accommodate Guxcacul and their tech. The Sowir had adapted a lot, but there was no way that they could change the entire structure of the city.

As another target presented itself, Mira changed focus and fired on the group of tool-soldiers moving over one of the pillar-bridges. It would be a long couple of days as they cleared all the Sowir from the city.

***

Sahib held on to Riss’s back as he raced up one of the city pillars, and then into one of the buildings suspended in the air. As soon as they entered, Sahib dropped down and readied his weapon as the two of them moved through the building in pursuit of two Sowir. They knew that the only reason the Sowir would run to this building was if they had some of their tool-soldiers stashed and waiting on orders.

And as the two of them moved through the first chamber into the second, three tool-soldiers dropped from the ceiling onto Riss’s back. Sahib immediately dropped his plasma weapon, as it would be useless in the situation, and extended the two mono-blades on his forearms, which were much more effective in close quarters. He jumped onto the first enemy, slashing and stabbing as Riss tried to shake them off. The big arthropod’s build and combat suit made it very hard for him to turn and take care of his attackers.

Sahib took care of the first enemy with a quick stab and slash into the main body, then moved towards the second, who had already noticed him and moved towards Sahib in an attempt to stab at him with his own melee weapon. But Sahib was faster. He raised his left hand to block and prepared to stab with his right when he froze. He knew instinctively what had happened, and shook it off immediately. The Sowir telepathy was not as effective on intelligent beings as it was on their tools, and Sahib had fought against them before and could recognize when they were making an attempt on his mind.

But the slight moment gave the Sowir tool-soldier a precious moment to move out of the way of Sahib’s blade. It wrapped one of its limbs around his right hand, then pulled him forward to where it could wrap a few more limbs around him. Sahib managed to bring his left hand and cut into one of the limbs that it used as a foot, but he didn’t have enough strength to push through and cut it off.

Just as he was about to try once more, his opponent pulled him closer, and then in an impressive effort threw him into the side wall. Momentarily stunned, Sahib raised his head, only to see the enemy rushing at him with two of its limbs—which carried their versions of Empire’s mono-blades—raised high. Sahib reached to his thigh and pulled out his pistol, angling it from his hip upwards towards the tool that was mid-jump towards him, aiming carefully towards the ceiling so as not to hit Riss by accident.

Three bullets flew and punched through the enemy, and Sahib noticed a slight shiver that probably meant that he had hit one of its brains. Then, as it was coming down, he raised his hands and let it impale itself on his blades. The enemy struggled for a moment or two before Sahib turned the blades and widened his arms, cutting into it. Once it stopped moving, he pushed the heavy thing off of himself and looked around the room.

Riss had dispatched his enemy as well and was moving into the next chamber. Sahib stood and moved quickly to follow him. The next room was empty, as was the one after that.

“They got away,” Riss said regrettably.

“Yes,” Sahib agreed, “but they will never escape the city, not with two forces hunting them.”

Riss remained silent, and simply moved to the small terrace and another pillar-bridge. He waited until Sahib jumped on his back, and then started moving back to the action.

***

“The reinforcements won’t make it in time,” Dayo stated.

“No, sir,” one of his aides said.

Dayo watched on the holo as his troops attacking one of the Sowir underground bases were overwhelmed from all sides and killed to the last man and woman. The Sowir had sacrificed two other bases with almost no struggle in order to decimate one of his taskforces. And the thing that made Dayo angry the most was that it gained the Sowir nothing. They had only accelerated their deaths. The defeat his forces suffered was a strategic win.

“I want group seven rerouted to this position here,” Dayo said, pointing on the holo. His aides moved in a flurry of activity to execute and relay his orders. “And group five here. And I want a calculation on what we need to do in order to collapse that city. We don’t have enough troops close by to take it intact with so many Sowir forces present.”

“Guxcacul built their cities well; it will be a difficult,” someone said.

“I want that Sowir force buried alive,” he said through his teeth.

“I’ll let the teams know,” his aide said.

“Get someone from the Guxcacul command on the comms, let them know that we plan on collapsing one of their cities. I doubt that they will mind, and they might have an idea on how to do it,” Dayo said, then put the whole thing aside and focused on other battles throughout the planet.

***

Mira sat on the foot of her mech, dressed only in her skin-suit as she ate her meal. There was no longer any danger; they had defeated the Sowir forces in this city and taken it. Now she watched as the Guxcacal troops moved around; the two forces had worked together to clear the city.

As she was relaxing and eating her gray goop, she saw a human soldier jump off the back of a Guxcacal and start walking straight for her. She frowned at him as he waved at her. Then when he came close enough for her implant to identify him, she read his name on her HUD.

“Oh no,” she said out loud.

The man removed his helmet, and Mira saw the irritating face of Sahib Adin. He grinned with that stupid face of his and called out to her, “Mira, love! It has been too long.”

Mira looked around, but she knew that there were no weapons close enough. And none of her team were anywhere near her. She glanced up, towards her mech’s cockpit, and tried to figure out if she had the time to get into it before he reached her.

She must’ve taken too much time debating, because before she knew it, he was standing in front of her.

“Mira, it is so good to finally be able to see your beautiful face. I must admit that over the years I had almost forgotten what you look like. But it was the only thing that got me through my time here, underground, with no light of a sun. It would have been better if you had responded to my messages, but I know that you are a busy lady,” Sahib said, and somehow managed to look hurt.

Mira looked at him as he gave her his puppy eyes look, and fought against giving in to him. He did look kind of cute like that, if only he didn’t talk as much. She tried to say something, but Sahib continued speaking.

Mira tried to give him a look that said she had no time for his antics, but he either didn’t see it or he ignored it. She did admit that he was attractive enough; she had never really given in to him because of the age difference between them. But now, after so much time had passed and he still pursued her, she admitted to herself that he wasn’t really as annoying as she’d thought initially. She sighed, and resigned herself to listening to him talk.

Chapter Fourteen

March; Harbinger – Sowir home system

Adrian floated inside the Watchtower interface as his fleet exited hyperspace. In front of him was the Sowir home system, with the positions of planets and moons as they believed they would be based on the Consortium data. Then his ships went active with their FTL scanners. The system had six planets in total, with about a dozen moons. The three planets closest to the sun were the smallest, and uninhabitable, as they had no atmosphere. The fourth was a planet with a toxic atmosphere, also uninhabitable, but at the time that the Consortium had last entered this system, it had had stations and facilities on its surface. The fifth planet was an inhabitable one, the Sowir homeworld. It was an ocean planet, with most of it covered in water and only a few small islands speckled about. The sixth was the gas giant, about ten percent larger than Jupiter.

As the Empire’s fleet’s sensors sent a tachyon ping, the space started to fill up from the edge of the system inwards. The fleet had come out of hyperspace on the side of the system where the gas giant and the Sowir homeworld were, as their orbits ran very close to each other and Adrian wanted the shortest route to the Sowir homeworld. He had several plans that included the gas giant, but as the interface started to fill up, he realized that his plans wouldn’t work.

Hundreds of stations started appearing around the gas giant, surrounding it completely, at least on the side that he could see, as the sensors were not that effective in seeing through planets. But he could tell that there was something on the other side of the gas giant. Then there was the number of ships, thousands upon thousands, all moving around the system and its many stations.

He noticed the area where the trans-station was supposed to be, and saw that one of the Sowir’s massive stations was there. He also saw that it was missing pieces, and had a debris cloud and dozens of ships around it. The probes they had sent had probably caused the damage as they’d entered the system. It was extremely unlikely that the Sowir station just happened to be there, so the most likely explanation was they were able to detect the trans-particles but couldn’t yet utilize them. But as they knew that his ship could, they’d moved something there to block the passage, which would have been a herculean task judging by the size of the station.

Adrian continued watching as he got a clearer picture of the system, seeing many Sowir military ships popping up in space in front of him. Numbers started appearing above the representation of the system, but he didn’t really need them; the interface poured all that information directly into his brain.

By his count, there were at least two and a half thousand Sowir warships throughout the system, and he assumed that number would climb to three thousand as some must be obscured by the planets. There were rings of shipyards around the moons of the third and fourth planets in the system, with massive towers reaching from the planets’ surfaces to the rings. Those shipyards themselves were equal to all the shipbuilding capacity the former Consortium worlds had.

“I guess we know how the Sowir matched four other races,” Adrian muttered to himself.

He kept watching as his fleet’s scanners finished, and he now had a clear picture of the system. There were still blind spots; they could see very little behind the sun, and scans behind planets or moons were inconclusive, as there was interference. But there was one strange thing that he noticed. He switched to the virtual image of the system they had made from the historical data they’d taken from the Consortium archives. He looked at it and then switched back.

“Iris,” he called.

“Yes?” Iris appeared beside him in her fiery image, only here she was human-sized.

“Do you see something strange at the gas giant?” Adrian asked.

“I do. There should be two moons on our side of the planet. The scans have detected something big behind it, but it is not where the third moon should be. The other two are missing,” she said.

Adrian nodded. “There is something around the giant that wasn’t there before—a small ring, but there aren’t enough rocks to add up to the mass of even two moons,” he said.

“The two moons were rich in metals; perhaps they mined them all, taking them apart,” Iris suggested.

Adrian thought it unlikely. The Sowir didn’t use metals as their main construction material. And the amounts they could have mined from them would have had to be enormous.

“It doesn’t matter,” he said finally. There would be time later for him to solve that puzzle. Now they had other business. He gave the order, and his fleet started moving towards the gas giant and the hundreds of stations, defense platforms, and ships in its orbit.

***

As the Empire’s fleet neared the hyperspace barrier, their light reached the Sowir stations closest to it. Immediately, the Sowir on them used their FTL comms to confirm what they already knew, since they had detected the tachyon ping spreading through their system. The Sowir might not have possessed the tech, but they could detect it. The Empire had arrived in their system.

They had been expecting them, of course. And they were ready. They knew that it was unlikely that they would win. But they would hurt the invaders as much as they were able. By the time the battle was over, the Empire would regret invading the Sowir Dominion’s home system.

***

As the Empire’s fleet entered its maximum range, it opened fire. Thousands of explosive shells moved through space, targeting the stations and defense platforms, followed by tens of thousands of missiles, half of which were targeting the couple hundred Sowir warships in high orbit.

The explosive shells reached and ripped through the stations and defense platforms, destroying many outright and crippling others, reducing their capacity to defend against the incoming missiles.

The missiles reached them soon after, blowing apart the remaining stations and platforms, as well as destroying the entire taskforce of warships that futilely tried to defend against the onslaught.

***

Adrian watched as his fleet’s attack cleared all of his targets. The other Sowir warships in the system had meanwhile been on the move, coming at full speed towards the gas giant. He saw that if he continued on this course, he would clash with most of the enemy’s forces at the gas giant. Adrian could clearly see that the Sowir wanted to force that planet as the battlefield. Adrian could change that; he had the upper hand. If he wanted to, he could run circles around the system, firing from far outside the Sowir’s maximum range. He was the one who had all the power here.

But that would take time, and he was here to make a point. The Sowir needed to be punished, made to see that they could not harm his fleet. So he would allow them the advantage of choosing the battlefield. And he would crush them in spite of it. He sent out orders to Lighthouse, one of his Vanguard ships, which had the most sophisticated sensors in his fleet. It and its sensor drones were to move above the fleets and get a better look at the system. He then gave the orders to Bethany to split from his force and move around the gas giant from the right, while Adrian’s and the Third Fleet moved from the left. That would allow Bethany to intercept some 700 Sowir ships coming from that direction, while the rest of Adrian’s force clashed with the remainder of the Sowir force

.

Chapter Fifteen

Audacious

Bethany acknowledged Adrian’s orders via her c-board and relayed them to her fleet from her flagship, the Mark Two dreadnought Audacious. It had been upgraded with the latest of the Empire’s tech, and at kilometer and a half in length, it was a force to be reckoned with. Her six hundred warships split from the joined force and started on a curved course that would take them around the gas giant and allow them to intercept some seven hundred Sowir warships. The Sowir force was mostly cruisers, and would be easily dealt with by her ships.

Beth watched as the two Empire forces approached the planet, using its gravity to slingshot around on different sides of it. As Beth’s force exited the high orbit of the giant and set a course towards the incoming Sowir force, her Sensor Handler spoke out.

“Ma’am, we are detecting a massive energy signature from an unknown object.”

Beth glanced at the now updated holo and saw the enormous object that had been obscured by the planet—a huge spherical station, 5220 kilometers in diameter, covered with docking ports and weapons, and throwing off a massive energy signature. It was surrounded by hundreds of defense platforms.

Immediately, Beth saw the danger to her ships. “Change course! Get us away from that thing and into the Sowir formation,” she said, just as the massive station and the defensive platforms opened fire.

***

Harbinger

Adrian saw the Sowir object before his force came into its visual range, as the Watchtower received the scans from Bethany’s fleet. Immediately, he started adjusting his orders to the entire fleet. And designating the new station on the fleet’s holo as Construct. As he was about to send new orders to Bethany’s fleet, the Construct and the defensive platforms surrounding it opened fire. Thousands of particle and laser beams struck the shimmering fields of the Second Fleet’s ships, but thankfully did no critical damage.

Adrian released a sigh of relief as information started flowing into his mind. The attacks coming from the Construct were powerful, almost as powerful as the Empire’s current weapons. But the fields held, although they wouldn’t be able to take that kind of fire forever; already some of the ships under attack were losing field integrity under so much fire. Recognizing the threat that the Construct presented, he order the Second Fleet to move and engage. That would allow the Sowir taskforce to move around and encircle it, but those ships couldn’t breach the Empire ships’ defenses with their weapons.

As Adrian’s force exited the shadow of the planet, he started getting information from his own ships on the Sowir Construct, and then the Lighthouse gained line of sight and its superior sensors focused on it. Adrian got a much clearer picture; their sensors detected a heavy gravity disturbance from it, which he assumed was why the Construct, already massive on its own, could stay so close to the planet without being pulled into it.

Adrian was impressed. He doubted that the Empire could have built something like that; it would take an enormous amount of fuel and resources just to keep it there. As more and more information kept coming in, Adrian realized that the Construct was most likely built around the gas giant’s third moon and then moved closer to the planet—for what purpose, he didn’t know yet. And the materials for it must have been mined from the two other moons. It must have taken the Sowir at least a hundred years to pull that off. The Construct still prevented most of the deep scans, allowing them only a surface look at it. It was made from metal, similar in makeup to the materials that the Empire used, which meant that his kinetic weapons would have a tough time blowing through all that armor. But he saw no other choice. What he saw was enough to convince him that they needed to take care of it first if he planned on taking the system.

According to what the scans were telling him, the Construct most likely had a firing range greater than that of his ships, and with the amount of power their weapons had, it could present a real danger. The weapons hitting the Second Fleet were not more advanced than those of the Empire; they were just boosted versions of the Sowir’s usual weapons.

Adrian composed and sent the order to all his ships to focus on the Construct and the defensive platforms surrounding it, ignoring the Sowir ships moving to engage. His ships fired their kinetic weapons, followed by thousands of missiles and particle and laser fire. The Sowir Construct started firing its energy weapons on Adrian’s force, and then it opened up with its own missiles. Thousands, then tens of thousands of missiles launched and kept launching. Soon, the number of Sowir missiles dwarfed those of the Empire’s.

Seeing the danger, Adrian was about to order all his ships into defensive formation when errors popped in front of him.

“Iris!” Adrian called.

“Adrian, we have lost our FTL comms capability!” Iris said frantically.

“What? That isn’t possible,” Adrian argued.

“The Sowir Construct is emitting some kind of jamming field directly into hyperspace; we can’t get anything through.”

“Oh no.” Adrian realized what no FTL comms would mean. Immediately, he sent the orders to the Harbinger’s command center, as it was still connected to the Watchtower, and then he disengaged from the interface. It relied on FTL comms to get sensory info from other ships and to send out orders to them, but that connection was also what allowed Adrian to control the 40 drones he had brought with him.

Adrian opened his eyes and jumped out of the chair, running outside of the room and towards the command center. The two wolions that had watched over him were now running close behind him, and all the while he was using his imp to order the backup crews on the Harbinger to take control of the drones via light speed comms. As he entered the command chair, Paul, his Ship Master, had already moved out of the command chair and was issuing orders to the crew. Adrian sat and studied the c-board, which had now switched to communicating with the fleet via light speed comms. It wasn’t as much of a disaster as it could have been. His ships were still relatively close to one another; even with the Second Fleet, the lag was not even a full second. But so much of their missile tech relied on the FTL comms.

The Sowir missiles had already passed the halfway point. Adrian’s ships slowly moved into formation, and their point defense started taking down the Sowir missiles, but at much slower rate than was optimal, as their systems and AIs couldn’t coordinate in real time. The lag was extremely short, but it was enough to hamper their defense when every moment counted.

“Fire the seeker countermeasures,” Adrian ordered.

***

In space, hundreds of Sowir missiles exploded as the Empire’s point defense fired, but it wasn’t enough. The majority of them passed through. Then, the Empire’s ships started firing more missiles, smaller ones, whose only job was to seek out the enemy missiles and kill them. The number of Sowir missiles started to drop significantly over the long minutes, even as the fire from the Construct’s energy weapons bathed the Empire’s ships. But eventually the Sowir missiles started to get through the walls of fire put out by the Empire’s defenses.

***

Audacious

Bethany watched as the enemy Construct fired an impossible number of missiles in response to her own attack, but she trusted that her ships could take the onslaught. Then, suddenly, she lost contact with the flagship, and a moment later realized that they had lost their FTL comms. Reports started coming to her c-board through light speed comms that the entire force had lost FTL capability.

Cut off from the Watchtower interface, she assumed direct control of her fleet and started giving orders through her c-board and relaying the orders from the flagship to the rest of her fleet, as her ship now acted as a hub. Her ships opened with their point defense, and she sent out orders for her ships to start firing their new missile countermeasure.

She watched as the incoming Sowir missiles numbers dwindled, but there were still too many coming; she knew that some would get through.

“Incoming missiles from the Sowir taskforce!” her Sensor Handler yelled out, just as Beth’s holo updated with tracks on new missiles as their visual sensors detected them. Immediately, she started sending out orders to other ships, splitting them so that some could meet the incoming missile waves from her fleet’s side. But she knew that it would be too little too late; with missile attacks from both the Construct and the Sowir cruisers, there was little chance that her ships could take them all out.

***

Thanatos – Fleet Headquarters

“What just happened?” Fleets Master Laura Reiss demanded in the Fleet combat center.

“We’ve lost contact with the fleet!” one of the aides yelled out.

They had been monitoring the battle in the Sowir homeworld system, analyzing data for any insight that might help the fleet.

“What? How?” asked Oswald Mein, Commander of Fleets.

“We don’t know, sir. They just stopped transmitting.”

“Figure out what happened!” Laura yelled out, and watched as her subordinates frantically moved around her.

Chapter Sixteen

From both sides of the battle, Empire shells struck the massive Sowir Construct and the defensive platforms, denting and in some cases blowing holes into the Construct, and destroying the platforms outright. Laser fire scorched and melted the hull, doing only superficial damage, while the Empire’s particle weapons blew holes that apparently had no effect on the overall capability of the Construct. All that was minor damage to the Construct; its armor was too thick and anchored deep inside the massive moon beneath its hull. Behind the Empire’s kinetic assault followed their missiles. Thousands of the Empire’s missiles blew up in moments as the Sowir’s sophisticated point defense systems ravaged the crippled Empire missiles.

The Empire’s missiles evading protocols relied on their FTL comms capability, with a few relay missiles mixed in the waves receiving the evading patterns from the AIs of the ships that fired them. Now without their FTL capabilities, they were picked apart and destroyed before even one could reach the Construct.

On the other hand, a great number of Sowir missiles punched through the Empire defensive nets from both the Construct and the Sowir cruisers and struck their targets. Missiles hit the massive Second Fleet ships, their field generators in most cases managing to deflect a lot of the explosive force, even while the ships themselves suffered damage. As the number of missiles that breached the Empire’s defenses increased, so did amount of damage that the ships received. Soon, one of the Second Fleet’s missile ships exploded as its field failed and several particle beams struck it, followed quickly by another.

On the other side of battle, the combined Vanguard and Third Fleets had an easier job. Their greater numbers gave them stronger defensive capability, but even they faltered and missiles passed through, hitting their targets, weakening the ships’ fields enough to allow the Construct’s lasers and particle beams to destroy ships.

***

Harbinger

Adrian watched as he lost twenty-nine ships to the Construct’s weapons, with another thirty-two that had sustained various amounts of damage. The Second Fleet had lost forty-six, and their reports showed another eighteen damaged. It could have been worse, especially if the full Sowir fleet had been around. But they needed to take care of the Construct before the rest of the Sowir’s forces arrived. As he watched the holo, he saw that another Sowir force would soon enter the battle on his side, at least one thousand ships strong, and this force wasn’t just cruisers. He had no time to spare; he couldn’t allow his ships to be caught in the middle. He sent orders to the Second Fleet for it to renew its assault on the Construct and close the range, focusing most of their ships on it. A few dreadnoughts could hold off the Sowir cruisers.

Then he sent orders to Tiamat and Titan to close the distance to the Construct, enter the range of their molecular disruption cannons, and weaken the Construct’s hull. Then he sent orders for the Harbinger to get in position to fire its main weapon, the massive rail-gun that stretched half the length of his ship, capable of cracking small moons. He planned on showing the Sowir just how outmatched they truly were.

It was then that the Sowir Construct fired another salvo of missiles, twice as large as the one before, while its energy weapons continued to batter his ships.

***

Audacious

Beth sent orders for her dreadnoughts to shield the damaged ships, most of which were her missile ships. Her Krakens and Mark Twos had managed to get through the Sowir fire with very little damage at that point; most of their fields still operational. As she received new orders from Adrian, she modified her own and sent them out.

Leaving behind twenty ships—ten Krakens and ten Mark Twos—to take care of the Sowir cruisers, she ordered the rest of her fleet to focus their attacks on the Construct, while they adjusted their formation to meet the new missile salvo.

Her Mark Two dreadnoughts took positions at the front of the formation, with her Audacious in the lead, and burned towards the Construct, making themselves targets for the incoming missiles even as their point defense struggled to reduce the numbers thrown against them. Her ship’s turrets fired shells constantly, and she decided not to keep anything back. She ordered her missile ships to fire all of their remaining missiles at the Construct.

***

Tens of thousands, then hundreds of thousands of missiles launched from the Second Fleet’s Furious-class missile ships. All types of Empire missiles intermingled in one large wave of destruction. But as they entered the Sowir Construct’s point defense range, they started to die. Their evading protocols, designed to work exclusively with FTL, had no chance of escaping the Sowir fire. But the sheer number of missiles forced the Sowir to use all of their available assets to defend, and in the end they destroyed most of the missiles.

But a couple Enforcer missiles with their field generators made it through and exploded against the Construct’s hull, blowing holes, opening compartments to space, destroying weapon turrets. But it was still not enough; even with the constant fire of the Empire’s ships, lasers, particle beams, and explosive shells, the Construct was still operational. Its surface was scarred, battered, and burned, but thousands of weapons were still operational and continued to fire at the Empire’s ships.

The second wave of Sowir missiles smashed through the Second Fleet’s point defense, thousands of missiles striking the dreadnoughts in the lead of the formation, crippling their field defenses and burning their hulls. But the Mark Two dreadnoughts were tough; even before the Empire’s scientists had developed the field technology, they had been juggernauts that could take punishment. Now, with most of the dreadnoughts having no field defenses, the Construct’s energy weapons reached their hulls. But the thick hulls and reflective coatings that all Empire ships possessed allowed them to weather the storm as even as many other ships succumbed to the impossible amount of fire. All the way the Empire’s ships were firing and blowing chunks of the Sowir monstrosity away.

***

Sowir Construct

The Sowir operating their greatest weapon noticed the shift of the enemy’s forces. The enemy fire on their battle station intensified. Their ships started firing waves after waves of missiles; their lasers scorched the station’s hull; their shells smashed at the battle station’s armor. It was not going to be enough, though; the Sowir had spent a long time making sure of that. Eventually, they knew, the enemy would destroy them, but by then the enemy’s impressive fleet would be reduced to a fraction of what it was now.

Chapter Seventeen

Harbinger

Adrian studied the battlefield, seeing the Second Fleet survive the second Sowir missile wave with another eighty-four casualties, with many others damaged. And then the Second Fleet’s missiles pushed through and hit the Construct. Adrian watched the scans of the Construct; its power and gravity signatures barely fluctuated at the havoc that the Second Fleet’s fire inflicted. Adrian quickly thought through hundreds of scenarios; he knew that the heart of the Construct had to be deep inside the moon buried beneath the rocks that were surrounded by armor. Its weapons systems and power plants were most likely compartmentalized, each section working independently. It explained why his forces hadn’t yet hit something that shut down an entire area of weapons. Until now, only weapons that were disabled were too damaged to fire or had been destroyed.

As the Second Fleet continued to move forward, spewing fire at the Sowir Construct, his own force was shooting down the Sowir missiles at an amazing rate, but was expending their new seeker countermeasures fast in order to do so.

Adrian watched carefully as the enemy missiles reached and hit his ships. By now, he too had put his heavier Mark Two dreadnoughts and the heavier Vanguard ships in front, shielding his Furious- and Kraken-class ships. The enemy missiles exploded and his Mark Twos punched through them, and he lost another thirty-eight ships. Others made it through with varying losses in field integrity, with some even losing it completely.

As the storm passed, Adrian focused on a small taskforce, including his Harbinger, which split from the main force and moved towards the Construct. At the front of the formation were Titan and Tiamat, surrounded by twenty drones, shielding the other twenty drones that were flanking Harbinger, which was following close behind.

The Titan and Tiamat fired their lasers and particle beams at the defense platforms in their way, clearing a path to the Construct. Then, as they entered the effective range of their molecular disruption cannons, both ships fired.

Two gray-white bolts of energy left the cannons from the two large ships speeding towards the Sowir Construct, and then impacted against its hull and spread in a spider web pattern around the impact site until their energy was expended. The attack did no outward damage, but Adrian knew that it had done its job. Harbinger positioned so that its front was angled towards the Sowir Construct, as its main weapon was built into the ship.

Glancing at Paul, he gave the order.

“Fire,” he said.

Immediately, Adrian felt the Harbinger shudder. Lights dimmed for just a fraction of a second as the massive rail-gun drew power. And then a boom echoed throughout the ship as the weapon fired.

***

The forward point of the Empire’s warship Harbinger exploded in fire and light as a massive 18600mm caliber explosive shell blasted out of it in a shower of electricity. The thirty-ton ri-steel shell sped towards the Sowir Construct at amazing speeds. In fifteen seconds, it crossed the distance between the Empire’s taskforce and the Construct. Striking its target and bursting through its armor as if it were nothing, it pushed inside the rock below, the force of its impact cracking the crust and tearing it apart. The cracked pieces of the moon shifted, crushing and blowing apart the facilities that the Sowir had built underground. Their massive power plants, ammunition depot, and fuel storage facilities ignited and blew, adding to already massive explosion spreading from the heart of the moon.

***

Harbinger

Adrian felt his lip curl upwards as his fleet’s scanners detected massive fluctuations and explosions coming from inside the Construct. He watched as internal explosions started blowing the Construct from within. And then the Construct started falling apart, its insides blowing outwards.

As he watched the holo and the read the information from his scans, his smile slipped. Time slowed down, his mind going into overdrive; he read the data and then read it again, checking and checking hundreds of times in a span of moments. He was still looking at the holo, at the positions of his ships. He was helpless.

I’ve miscalculated, Adrian thought to himself as time resumed its normal flow. I didn’t account for the amount of fuel; I didn’t account for their ammunition stores, their power plants, and gravity generators. Frantically, he reached for the comms to his left, opening a channel to the Second Fleet even though he knew it was too late.

***

Audacious

The crew of Audacious’s CC cheered as the Harbinger’s main weapon hit the Sowir construct. Its weapons fire died off, and Beth saw multiple explosions appear all over its surface. Then her comms chimed.

“Beth, get away from there now!” Adrian frantically yelled out.

Bethany was about to respond, when she saw what was happening at the Sowir Construct.

Immediately, she opened the comms to her entire fleet.

“All ships turn around immediately. Get as far away from the Construct as possible,” Bethany ordered, even as she realized that her dreadnoughts were too close and wouldn’t have enough time to get away.

The pieces of the moon blew outwards in a storm of fire, the explosions from the Sowir power plants blowing them in all directions. The massive station surrounding the moons disappeared in a fast-expanding rain of fire and debris. The moon and the Construct exploded, the debris field moving in every direction.

Bethany’s dreadnoughts were too slow; they wouldn’t be able to get out of the way of the rapidly approaching danger. Her ship was firing at all the closest pieces, hoping to shatter or deflect some of them, but with no success.

Beth watched as her crew desperately tried to get more out of her ship, but the Mark Twos were not built for speed. She realized that she would die, and that there was nothing she could do about it. She recorded a message and sent it off, just as a three-kilometer-wide piece of rock smashed into her ship.

***

Harbinger

The Harbinger turned using its massive auxiliary drives and was speeding away from the oncoming carnage and towards the gas giant, where the rest of the fleet was now heading in order to escape the debris field. Titan and Tiamat were following with the drones, which the command crews used now to ram smaller, faster pieces of debris that threatened to hit the three warships. The Vanguard ships were much faster than the Empire’s other ships, and had little problem with keeping ahead of the danger.

Adrian looked at the holo. Bethany’s dreadnoughts were trying to get away, but he could see that they wouldn’t get far; the old ships were tough, but too slow. He saw ships fire all their weapons, but to no avail. He saw ships turning around and ramming the bigger pieces of the moon, hoping to save their friends, but it didn’t matter.

Adrian forced himself to look at Audacious on the holo, to look as a big chunk of the moon he’d destroyed bore down on Bethany’s ship. He watched as the rock struck the large dreadnought in its side, breaking its spine and then plastering it on its surface, followed by a big, short explosion as the Audacious disappeared. He watched as Bethany died.

Grief threatened to swallow him. Iris appeared in front of him.

“Adrian,” she said in his mind. “Bethany sent you a private message, before she—”

“Not now, Iris, I don’t have the time,” he said, and she looked at him for a moment before disappearing, focusing on guiding the Harbinger’s systems again.

He saw Sora looking at him, angling her head. He knew what she was asking, but he was not the same person he’d been so long ago. He had spent a great part of his life with two empathic animals, and he had learned a lot from them. He didn’t need her help. He pushed his emotions aside and focused on his task.

“FTL comms are back online,” his Communications Handler said somberly.

Adrian looked at the status of his ships. The Vanguard and the Third Fleet had managed to get away with only minor damage; most of their ships had been further away from the Construct when it blew, and Adrian’s Vanguard ships had been fast enough to escape. The Second Fleet, on the other hand, was gutted. Bethany had taken all of their Mark Twos close to the Construct, and all of those ships had been destroyed. Of those further away, only one hundred and eighty managed to escape.

Adrian glanced at the crew, all of whom were studying him. They had all known about him and Bethany. Paul’s look was the hardest to bear; he’d known her personally too.

“Is Watchtower operational?” Adrian asked Paul.

“Yes,” Paul answered.

Adrian stood and turned, icily stating, “Set a course towards the Sowir fleets.” And then he exited the command center. He still had a mission to finish.

***

The force consisting of the combined Third and Vanguard Fleets moved in formation towards the Sowir ships. Behind them was the carnage of the destroyed Sowir Construct. The Sowir were not running away; they knew that they had no chance of escaping, so instead they opened fire. Thousands of missiles launched from their ships, speeding towards the Empire’s fleet. In retaliation, the Empire’s fleet opened fire. Lasers, particle beams, and kinetic shells closed the distance between them, destroying scores of Sowir ships every second. The force of more than a thousand Sowir ships was rapidly shrinking down.

The Vanguard ships led the charge, their lasers cutting ships in half, their particle beams smashing holes through entire ships, their shells pulverizing the Sowir ships’ hulls.

In a short time, the Sowir fleet died, just as the last of their missiles died from the point defense of the Empire’s fleet.

The invading fleet continued forward, hunting down any and all Sowir warships. An unstoppable force that destroyed everything in its way.

Chapter Eighteen

Seven days later - Sowir homeworld

Lurker of the Depths stood with eleven others of his kind in a circle inside the oldest building on their homeworld. The Sowir race didn’t really have a ruler or a ruling body; all of their people were part of the whole. Their ability to communicate mind to mind had resulted in all of them having a singular voice. And their ability to see/hear/sense the Spirit of the Universe allowed them to always feel the collective of their race, even if they couldn’t speak with each other across vast distances. But while they were united, their beliefs and will singular, they were still individuals, and some parts of the voice held more weight than others.

The twelve gathered here were those whose knowledge, experience, and will pulled ahead of the others of their kind. The purpose of their meeting was simple: their entire race was about to end.

The ungifted who were even now dismantling their system had used their superior void travel technology to strike fast and hard before his people could respond. The Sowir Dominion had known that they were coming from the moment they appeared in Sowir border systems, thanks to the FTL communication systems that his people had developed. But it mattered little when their enemy could move faster than they could respond.

At the start of their conflict, the Sowir had decided to sacrifice a lot of territory, keeping the enemy busy in order to reinforce systems that were far away from the front, leaving the border systems to fall and buy them time. Over four cycles after they had taken those systems, the enemy had solidified their hold on the greater part of the former Consortium territory, including the shipbuilding facilities that the Sowir had repurposed for their use.

The loss of those facilities had been a blow to the Sowir, but Lurker of the Depths knew that it mattered little to the war effort. The Empire had even allowed them three full cycles during which they had not tried to push further into the Sowir systems; rather, they had ignored their advantage and only solidified the systems they had taken, which at the time had baffled the Sowir. The Enemy gave them time to rebuild, to fortify their systems.

And then the calm ended. The Enemy attacked their systems, and effortlessly blew through them. The Sowir decided to fall back to the system that had birthed them. Here they had spent hundreds of years building defenses; there they thought to make the Enemy pay. And now, they watched from the depths of their world as the Enemy systematically destroyed every piece of military technology or facilities in their system. Although, strangely, they chose to keep the facilities that had no military use intact.

The twelve of the greatest Sowir were connected through their telepathy, speaking and discussing in moments what would take an ungifted much longer.

“The last of our war vessels have been destroyed. Our cargo and transport vessels have been disabled and left floating in the void. The enemy vessels are moving in orbit around home. Their actions make little sense,” Sand Shard sent.

“I concur. They could have wiped the home clear of life with their weapons,” Shallow Water agreed.

“Ever since our battle station was destroyed, they have been sending surrender requests over all channels we use, in all the languages of the Consortium, even ours. They say that we will be spared, and treated fairly if we do,” Sand Shard added.

“They  captured some of our translating equipment early on, along with some of our people. But their requests for surrender are illogical. Why should we stop fighting and let them kill us?” Dark Stream sent.

“The last of the Consortium are a part of their community; they must want to hold a trial before they finish us. Under their laws, the only sentence for our acts is death. We would be spared until then,” Lurker of the Depths sent.

“Idiocy. If they could use the Spirit, they would have no need for those trials,” Last Wave added.

“It is the way of the ungifted,” Lurker of the Depths added.

“We have failed. There is nothing more that we can do. We will die,” Last Wave sent, and all agreed.

***

Harbinger – High orbit over Sowir homeworld

Adrian waited in the Harbinger’s landing bay for the shuttle from the prison ship. Beside him stood Akash, Sora, and Paul.

“You shouldn’t do this. I know that you are hurting, but this insanity will only get you killed,” Paul said for the hundredth time.

“This has nothing to do with Bethany’s death,” Adrian said more harshly than he’d intended. Then, after a beat, he continued calmly. “This was always the plan. It’s why I brought the prisoners here. By now, the Sowir on the planet will be wondering why we haven’t attacked the planet yet. Why we are still transmitting surrender offers. It does not fit into what they believe about us, and that will make them curious.”

“I still think that you should still take people down with you,” Paul added.

“No,” Adrian said. “They need to see me vulnerable; they need to know that I am in their power if they are to talk with me.”

Paul sulked silently. Adrian knew that his friend worried, that he believed that Bethany’s death was making Adrian careless, reckless. But it wasn’t so; he would end this war because of her. Because he wouldn’t let another die to the lunacy of Sowir beliefs.

The shuttle landed and Adrian entered it alone, leaving Paul and his two wolions behind. Inside, he was met with the pilot and the two soldiers who were guarding the Sowir prisoner—Clear Waters—. Adrian nodded at them, and the three exited the shuttle, the doors closing behind them, leaving him alone with the prisoner. He looked at her, for the first time seeing an unrestrained Sowir.

“I trust that you realize this is your people’s last chance. If they kill me, all of you will die,” Adrian sent to her.

“Yes. The island is the one place where there is a chance that they will meet with you,” Clear Waters responded.

Adrian didn’t respond to her thoughts; instead, he closed the telepathic link and sent out orders through his implant. The shuttle shuddered and took off, piloted remotely from Harbinger. It dropped down to the planet and towards one of the islands. Adrian took the time to look at the feeds from the outside as they dropped through the atmosphere. The vast Ocean covered the surface, its gray and muted water giving the planet a kind of bland look. Eventually he noticed land, a small island that was their destination. The shuttle lowered itself in the middle of the island. Adrian and Clear Waters exited the shuttle and walked a bit away and towards the beach as the shuttle doors closed and it flew away and back to its ship.

“How long do you think we will need to wait?” Adrian sent.

“They will send some of our tools first to investigate. Then they will come themselves not long after if they decide to talk,” Clear Waters responded.

“And if they decide to use the tools to attack us?” Adrian asked curiously. He wasn’t really worried; he might have been taking a risk, but he didn’t plan on dying. He was wearing a light assault suit with only a mask for air over his mouth, as the Sowir world’s air was thin. He had no weapons other than the mono-blades on his arms. But he himself was a weapon. He could hold out until rescue came, provided that the Sowir don’t bring any heavy weapons.

“The tools will not be a problem. I can take control of them once they are close. They have been made so that orders from the closest Sowir take priority,” Clear Waters sent.

Adrian turned back and studied the grayish water and bleak sky of the Sowir homeworld.

***

Lurker of the Depths and the rest of the twelve watched through the eyes of their tools as they surfaced onto the island. They saw one of their kind with one of the alien ungifted, standing there alone.

“It is a trap,” Dark Stream sent, just as they lost control of their tools. They could still see through their eyes, but no longer could they control their movements.

Lurker of the Depths felt disbelief and anger through the link coming from some of the others.

“They turned one of our own against us!” Sand Shard sent angrily, and others pulled by his emotions joined in his anger.

Lurker of the Depths watched through the eyes of his tools, studying the strange alien. It looked strangely like a Nel, only without their tails. “It is impossible for one of us to be turned; the Spirit binds us,” Lurker of the Depths added.

“Then they have found a way to force us to do their bidding. We should kill them now, before they shackle the rest of us!” Sand Shard sent.

“No.” For the first time in a long time, Lurker of the Depths used the full power of his abilities, drowning out the emotions of others. “Too much is wrong; their actions do not make sense. I want to know why they have done as they did. I will go and look into their minds myself.”

“And if you get turned as well?” Last Wave asked.

“Then there is no hope for any of you,” Lurker of the Depths said, and left the room.

***

Adrian watched as a small shuttle rose from the water some way off the coast, then flew straight at them, landing on the beach close to Adrian and Clear Waters. After its doors opened, a Sowir walked out, dressed in an ornate, tight suit. The Sowir crossed the distance and stopped in front of them, his attention on Clear Waters.

“What is this? How does this ungifted appear connected to the Spirit of the Universe?” the Sowir sent at Clear Waters.

Adrian grimaced at the power of the voice in his head; this Sowir was strong, much stronger than Clear Waters. Before Clear Waters could respond, Adrian used his own telepathy to speak.

“This ‘ungifted’ can speak for himself,” Adrian sent forcefully in the way he’d learned from Clear Waters.

The Sowir’s attention on Adrian intensified, and a massive force slammed against Adrian’s mind, trying to get in. Adrian staggered a step back, but managed to fight the attempt off, just barely. The power was so much greater than that of Clear Waters that he doubted he would be able to fight off another such attack. Then Clear Waters interfered. Adrian felt the two Sowir make a link and start exchanging thoughts far faster than what Adrian was able to comprehend.

Once they were done, Adrian could feel an emotional wave coming from the new Sowir—disbelief and horror.

“We were wrong?” Adrian heard it send in despair, painfully, and he knew that the war with the Sowir was over.

Chapter Nineteen

Three months later – Warpath

Adrian sat at his holo table and looked at the comm message from Bethany in his queue, still unopened. The words recorded inside were her last to him, moments before she’d died because of his mistake. Because he hadn’t been good enough. Because he had grown accustomed to using the Watchtower where all the information was fed into his mind, so much so that outside of it he had forgotten to check everything. He hadn’t accounted for how much larger the fallout of the destruction of the Sowir Construct would be once the massive power generators that ran it exploded. He had failed her, and the people under his command. He feared her words. He feared that she had condemned him, cursed him for killing her.

For the first time ever, he had let his guard down, let someone inside. He had had her for one night, and even then only a handful of days before he’d lost her. His thoughts were a mess. He couldn’t focus. Couldn’t allow himself to grieve. He didn’t allow the loss he felt to show; his face was a cold, emotionless mask. It was his arrogance that had put them in that position. He wanted to make a point to the Sowir: it was he who gave the orders.

He had heard the whispers of those around him. How they called him merciless, without a heart. They questioned how he was able to not care about someone close to him dying. And yet they didn’t know, couldn’t know, that he feared breaking. His friends had tried to talk to him, Laura too. But he didn’t allow anyone close. After his mission in the Sowir home system was finished, he’d rushed to Warpath and shut himself inside his quarters. His only company was Akash, Sora, and his steward, who he only saw during meal time.

And the thing that scared him the most was that he knew in his heart that if he could turn back the time, if he could go back to the moment before Harbinger had fired its weapon and destroyed the Sowir Construct, he would have done the same thing again. They’d needed to destroy the Construct, or risk getting surrounded by Sowir warships on the one side and the Construct on the other. He would have given the order again, even if he’d known beforehand that Bethany—the woman he had loved since he was barely a man—would die. And that was what threatened to break him, the knowledge that he was willing to sacrifice anyone in order to win.

Adrian focused back on the message blinking above his holo table. Gathering all his courage, he played the message. He was met with sounds of battle, chaos in the command center of the Audacious as its crew struggled to survive. And at the center of it all was Bethany, her hair plastered to her sweating face and her lips upturned in a sad smile.

“Adrian. I am sorry that we didn’t have much time together; that was my fault for allowing my pride to rule my decisions. But the few days we did have were the happiest I have ever felt.” Her hand reached up and moved a strand of her red hair from where it had stuck to her forehead. “I want you to know that I love you, Adrian. I always did, and always will.” With that, her other hand reached and stopped the recording. The video went to black and Adrian stared at it.

His breath quickened, and he stood up, walking to the middle of the room. Images flashed through his mind—Bethany at the Academy, their fights during training, them making up, them being given positions together on the Athena, the fight against the Concordis ships, coming to Sanctuary, their long talks while they were on patrols, him finding out that she was getting married, her lashing out at him, then years later their reconciliation, and finally the last days. Their first and only night together.

Rage filled his body, and he felt himself trembling. He spun around and his hand pointed at his holo table and chair. He grabbed hold of them and ripped the table from the floor with his mind, throwing both the table and the chair across the room, smashing them against the wall as he released a gut-wrenching scream. Items on his shelves shook and trembled as his telekinesis reached around him uncontrollably.

Then everything left him as he drained his energy supplies, and Adrian dropped to the floor with tears flowing down his face.

“She didn’t blame me,” he whispered.

Iris appeared in front of him, looking at him with compassion. She tried to touch him, but her holographic hand went right through Adrian. “Of course she didn’t blame you, Adrian,” Iris said. “She was in the Fleet; she was one of the best commanders in the Empire, same as you. She knew that you needed to destroy that Construct or risk many more lives.”

“It was my mistake. I shouldn’t have charged into their system like that. I shouldn’t have ordered her ships so close. I should have known how big the fallout would be,” Adrian said softly, and Iris stayed silent.

“You are good, Adrian, one of the best. But not even you can know everything. You are not omniscient,” Iris told him gently.

He didn’t know how long he sat there crying, but eventually he gathered himself, took a deep breath, and stood.

“Adrian, are you alright?” Iris asked hesitantly.

“Yes…I think so,” Adrian responded.

He turned towards the door to his room and opened them, only to be tackled to the floor by two massive animals. Sora and Akash were nudging him with their snouts, and he petted them while making soothing sounds. He’d left them outside on purpose, not wanting to fall into temptation and have them muffle his emotions.

“It’s okay. I’m okay,” he told them. And then finally after a few more minutes, they allowed him to get up, and he entered his living room and started towards the main doors.

“Where are you going?” Iris asked.

Adrian grabbed his coat off the back of a chair and answered, “Sanctuary.”

Chapter Twenty

June; Year 36 of the Empire – Sanctuary

Tomas stood as Adrian entered his office. He had spoken with Laura the day before and had seen that she was much more relaxed now compared to how she’d been over the last three months. She had been worried about Adrian and his refusal to leave his home on Warpath. But Tomas could understand Adrian’s grief and him wanting to be alone. He had gone through similar experience when he’d lost people back in Sol. He’d known that Adrian would recover; Adrian was far too strong to break.

“Adrian,” Tomas said as he walked around the table and shook his hand.

“Hello, Tomas,” Adrian said.

“Come, sit.” Tomas guided him to the two couches to the side of the room. “How have you been?” Tomas asked once they were comfortable.

“I could be better, but well enough,” Adrian responded.

“Good. It will lessen over time, the pain, become easier to live with. You will never truly forget, but I think that you wouldn’t want to,” Tomas said.

“No,” Adrian agreed.

“So, tell me, why have you come?” Tomas asked.

Adrian took a breath and released it slowly. “I wanted speak to you about the Sentinels.” Tomas quirked his eyebrow, and Adrian continued, “I want to accelerate our plans a bit.”

“In what way?” Tomas asked.

“I know that originally we planned on making the Warpath system the base for Sentinels, but lately I was thinking of moving it to someplace else. We would still train people in Warpath, choose Sentinels from there. But the actual base would be somewhere else. I want to keep Warpath out of it, make it a place where people can train to be warriors, not turn it into a Sentinel choosing ground. We will make an offer, and if someone wants to take it, we transfer them to the program,” Adrian responded.

“I think that we are still a few years away from that, Adrian,” Tomas said.

Adrian made the Nel gesture for agreeing. “We are. But I want to build the base now, to get everything up and running. And there is one more thing. I want to give Sentinels psionics.”

Tomas scratched his head for a few moments, thinking. “Why do you think that they will need them?”

“Besides making them much more formidable, it is the telepathy that will make their work much easier,” Adrian said.

“We don’t know how to use the psionics yet. And our bodies aren’t yet up to par,” Tomas commented.

Adrian looked uncomfortable for a moment before sighing. “I have talked with Seo-yun, and will be going through the treatment she devised in a couple of days. And after I recover, I plan on going to the Sowir homeworld to learn how to use my telepathy.”

“You would go to them to teach you?” Tomas asked, taken aback. He didn’t know if he could have done the same thing.

“They are my only chance of mastering it. The other psionics I will need to discover and master on my own,” Adrian said. “And I didn’t mean that we give psionics to every current Sentinel, and not for a long time. The current Sentinels aren’t ready, they need to learn more. They don’t even know our plans. I will need to see which ones want to take it on. And our people haven’t figured out how to trigger the change in grownups yet. But in five, maybe ten years, we will, and I think that we should give it to them. By then I will have learned enough to train others, and then they can come back and train more.”

Tomas nodded thoughtfully, agreeing. “Yes. And by then we could start triggering the change in infants, in the progeny centers. By the time their psionics manifest, there will be people who could teach them.” Tomas looked at Adrian, impressed. “That is a good plan. And which system do you plan to turn into Sentinel home system?”

Adrian made a Nel gesture that Tomas didn’t recognize and then spoke, “Sol.” He smiled and added, “More precisely, Mars.”

***

Several days later, Tomas sat in his office with his top advisers and friends: Laura, Jack, Nadia, Seo-yun, and Sumia, who was visiting from Nuva.

“The Sowir have apparently kept their word. We haven’t had any incident since Adrian talked with them,” Laura said. “The effort of securing the system is going well, and soon we will be able to let them have a limited control over their system back.”

“What about their tools?” Jack asked.

“They put those in their home system in stasis, and we will transport them out of the system soon,” Seo-yun said. “Those they had left on their other worlds have already turned feral and killed each other or starved. We can’t do anything about those.”

“How is the situation on Guxaxac?” Tomas asked.

“The fighting is still intense. The Sowir are refusing to communicate, even when we broadcast the recordings from their brethren or bring a Sowir from their homeworld to speak with them. It is just as Lurker of the Depths warned us. They will keep fighting. And in truth, I doubt that the Guxcacul would have appreciated or allowed the Sowir to surrender. There is a lot of hate towards the Sowir there,” Jack said.

“At least the Sowir that surrendered don’t appear too broken up about their fellows dying,” Tomas added.

“They are a very strange race. They knew that it was impossible to get their people off Guxaxac, so to them, they are already dead,” Laura added.

“I still can’t believe that the Sowir are defeated,” Sumia said. “It has been so long…before your people came, we were counting days until the Sowir turned and finished us off.”

The others didn’t respond, and the room lapsed into silence, until Nadia broke it.

“The Nelus government is moving. They are going to start angling to get their former worlds back,” she said, “and I’m sure that the Guxcacul will do so too once they get their own world under control.”

“Well, tough luck,” Tomas said. “We took them back; they are ours.”

“Once they see that you won’t budge, they will want to join the Empire,” Sumia added.

“And when they ask, we will speak about it. Until then, I am keeping what we conquered,” Tomas added firmly. He would not allow anything to compromise the strength of his Empire. If the Guxcacul and Nelus wanted to join the Empire, they would have to work for it.

***

Sowir homeworld

Lurker in the Depths swam aimlessly in the ocean that had birthed him. For the first time since he’d ben born, since he had become aware of himself, he was feeling unsure of himself, of his path and that of his people. He had always believed that to feel the Spirit of the Universe was to never know doubt for your actions. What his people had always believed to be the truth was nothing more than an incorrect assumption. They’d been wrong.

One moment had changed everything. And now his entire people knew guilt, a thing that they had never felt before. They knew that they had done a horrible thing, and they didn’t know how to handle that.

Already some of his fellows had sunken into madness. The ones on Guxaxac had all gone insane. Lurker of the Depths had lied when he’d told their jailors that they wouldn’t respond to the messages, that they wouldn’t believe them. When they had sent people from the homeworld, let them get close enough to send messages through the Spirit, they had listened. And they had gone mad. They would continue to fight not because they didn’t believe, but because they could not handle the truth. It was they who had almost wiped out an entire species.

Most of those on the homeworld had not been in such positions, where they commanded their tools from the ground to slaughter and kill.

Lurker of the Depths himself was close to madness. He might not have commanded troops on the ground, but he had commanded fleets. He had killed. And he knew that they would never be able to redeem themselves for what they had done.

And yet, there was a part of him that refused to give in to the madness. It would be an insult to all he had killed, all the lives his people had taken. And he would not allow that. The Sowir race would change. It would take time, but Lurker of the Depths would make sure that the Sowir were not remembered as mass murderers.

***

Sanctuary

Adrian, Sora, and Akash stood at the edge of the plateau on which Olympus City was built. Behind them was the city, and below them spread the endless sea of trees, illuminated by the two moons and the nebula. The vista was amazing, with mountains in the distance piercing the teal-tinted sky.

And this was the spot where his former squadmates had held the wake for Bethany. Where they’d said their goodbyes. Even though they had lost touch over the years, she was still a part of their team.

Adrian studied his surroundings for a few minutes in silence, an alien world that was the new cradle of humanity. He turned to the sky and spoke.

“Hey, Beth. I…I wanted to make a promise. A promise to myself, and I wanted you as my witness,” he said to the sky. “I will never stop pushing myself. I will never stop trying to better myself, to push against my limits. And I will not retreat into my shell again. You were the first person that I let inside, but I will not let your death be something that breaks me, turns me away from other people. I don’t think that you would have wanted that.” He paused, a tear rolling down his cheek. “I know that there are still so many areas in which I can improve, so many things that I need to learn and master so that what happened never happens again. I will become the example that others will want to follow. And I will never forget you.”

Adrian looked down at a couple of rocks lying around him. He reached out with power, and slowly several rocks rose to float around him, and he grabbed one of the larger ones and pulled it above his palm. With a surge of power, he broke it into three pieces.

Yes, there are still many things that I need to master.

INTERLUDE

Fourteen years later; Year 50 of the Empire – Ra’a’zani space

A flash of violet light announced the arrival of a hostile fleet inside the Ra’a’zani system. The Ra’a’zani fleet was ready when they came, and three thousand war vessels moved in unison to intercept the invaders.

Ra’tran watched as his fleet moved towards the hostile force, which numbered some eighteen hundred, fewer than his force. But their vessels were powerful, and he knew that while his force would hurt them, he and his vessels would die in the end. The invaders were too strong, and the sacrifice of his fleet would serve to give the Ra’a’zani people time to build new fleets, research new technologies, and finally strike back against the invaders.

For as his fleet was dying, the people on the planets and stations of this system were destroying every mention of the other Ra’a’zani worlds. Only three clans had survived until now, and only because their territory was further away from the core. The Ra’a’zani had sent all that they were able there—people, slaves, materials, everything that they would need in order to someday defeat the invaders.

Every world that the invaders took died after they had destroyed their data about the other clans and locations of their worlds. But this system was the last and the largest core world. There was so much here that it would take time for everything to be destroyed. And every moment that they kept the enemy occupied here was a moment gained for those in the last three clans.

Ra’tran ordered his fleet to fire their Pasha’ka, and thousands of them launched from every vessel, speeding towards the enemy. He watched as they fired their own Pasha’ka. Half of them slammed into those of his fleet, destroying a great number of them, while the rest continued towards his vessels. He didn’t order the Srasah’uk used; it was useless against the Pasha’ka of the enemy. Instead, his vessels fired their own modified Pasha’ka to hunt and destroy the enemy’s. But it was not enough; the enemy Pasha’ka got through, and he lost three hundred vessels.

Pasha’ka from his ships had passed to the enemy as well and had impacted their ships, only they did nowhere close to the same amount of damage. The enemy lost only two vessels, with one other being damaged.

Ra’tran watched as his fleet entered the range of his other weapons, and he ordered his Larsha’ka and Tarsha’ka to fire. The space between the two forces was suddenly filled with beams of light and heat, energy weapons and plasma.

***

Shara Daim forces – Bloodbringer

Anessa, Dai’Sha of the First Legion, commanded her fleet against the Daksinn—those marked for death. The Ra’a’zani had killed Shara Daim. For that, there was only one possible punishment: death. The Ra’a’zani ships were adequate, and they had powerful weapons. But that did not mean that they had any hope of victory. The only thing that they were able to do was prolong their lives by denying her the locations of their other worlds, making her devote time and resources to exploring their area of space in order to find them. But in the end, it would not matter; she would find them and destroy them.

And now she had one more thing to do. She had found a mention of a Ra’a’zani slave race, Humans. And they looked very similar to the Shara Daim, barring a few differences. They could only be one of the three that the Shara Daim lore spoke of, descendants of the People. She remembered how she’d felt when she’d learned of them, another race who was their equal. Someone with whom they could share their legacy. But as they’d found more information about them, she’d learned the truth. They were weak; they had allowed themselves to be made slaves. And so they were not of any use to the Shara Daim. She had sent a message to the Shara Daim Elders; it was they who would decide what would happen with the Humans. She would try and find information about them, the location of their homeworld, but it was not her primary task.

Anessa looked at her battle map as the Ra’a’zani started to retreat behind their stations and defense platforms. It was to be expected; they too would try and prolong this fight, as all others of their kind had. But in the end, the Shara Daim would spill their blood and bring their deaths, as they always did.

Two years later; Year 52 of the Empire – Unknown space

Anessa, Dai’Sha of the Shara Daim, entered the great Hall of Ages, the heart of the Shara Daim civilization and the seat of their rulers on their homeworld of Shara Radum. She moved below the high-reaching arcs and paintings of Dai’Sha of the past. One day, after she no longer walked the realm of the living, she too would be immortalized up there. Hundreds of years of history were painted on the walls, back to the time before they’d conquered their homeworld—ending the war with the Nazaari, who were the second race that had evolved on this world—and left to explore the stars.

She reached the end of the hall, and the two guards wearing the traditional chestplate armors that left their dark arms bare, the intricate white markings there shown to all who could see, moved as she approached. They were bearing the traditional Doams—the long staffs of their ancestors—and as they moved, they grabbed the handles and pushed the massive ornate doors open. Anessa entered the darkened round room, walking down the stairs to the podium below. She stopped in the center and dropped to one knee before the nine Elders sitting in high-backed chairs on pedestals in a half circle in front of her, obscured by shadows.

“Greetings, Elders, I answer your summons,” Anessa said.

“Rise, Dai’Sha of the First Legion,” one of the Elders to her left said.

Anessa stood and turned her eyes upwards. Here inside the hall, she didn’t need her secondary eyelids that had evolved to shield her people’s eyes from the deadly radiation of their homeworld. Her eyes were now a white iris surrounding a dark pupil inside a black backdrop.

“Why have I been summoned in the middle of a war?” she demanded. Dai’Sha standing was second only to the Elders, and she was the first among the Dai’Sha. In time, as she grew older and lost her prowess in battle, she would replace one of these Elders. Her previous name would be taken from her and a new one given so that she could become one of the rulers of her race. As such, she could demand answers from them. She had just finished taking the last Ra’a’zani system they knew about, and had been sending ships to look for others. It was taking her too long to finish the Ra’a’zani, and she was growing impatient and agitated.

“We wish to speak to you about the information you reported, about the Ra’a’zani slave race,” another Elder, this one a woman, said from Anessa’s right.

“The Humans,” Anessa said. “I have not yet been able to find a Ra’a’zani world with these Human slaves on it. The Ra’a’zani we have defeated had made sure that we got no information about their other clans. Three of their clans still live. Until I find them, we cannot be sure that they are the ones that the lore speaks of.”

“We have reviewed what you have found in the Ra’a’zani records,” said one of the male Elders, “and we are certain that they are indeed the same as the ones the lore spoke of. The physical resemblance is undeniable, apart from their strange coloring—but then, the skin of the People is not the same as that of the Shara Daim. They have the blood of the ancients.”

“You wouldn’t have summoned me only to tell me of this,” Anessa said, irritated, partly because of their summons, and partly because of her inability to find the last of the Ra’a’zani.

“No, we have not. We want you to shift the priorities of the First Legion. You need to find the Human homeworld,” an Elder said.

“I was already doing that,” Anessa argued.

“You have been trying to find and kill the Ra’a’zani for their crimes, to punish their arrogance. Finding the Human homeworld was secondary to that task; you were hoping to find out more about them as a byproduct of your conquest.”

Anessa narrowed her eyes at the Elders, whose faces she couldn’t see. “Why are you so adamant about this? Finding these Humans might be interesting—we could test them to learn more about ourselves and how we differ from the People—but aside from that, they would serve no purpose towards our goals.”

“The location of their homeworld is more important than the conquest of the Ra’a’zani,” another Elder said.

Anessa reached for her power; her eyes tingled as power of the Sha flowed into them, revealing the dark room to her sight. “The Humans have allowed themselves to be enslaved; they are weak and deserve no consideration from the true heirs. Their existence only confirms that the lore is truth, and perhaps sometime in the future we will find the last that the lore spoke of. Maybe they will prove themselves worthy. The Humans are not, and I will not allow their existence to hinder me in spilling the blood of our enemy.”

She pointed at the Elders, whose faces she could see clearly now even in the dark. “Marked for death. Pronounced Daksinn by you,” she said calmly, and saw them flinch as power made her voice resonate. “You would have me abandon my honor, my duty? In order to search for slaves?” she finished pointedly, glaring at them, waiting for their response.

She saw them turn to look at one another, felt their minds touch. They conferred privately, and it took all that Anessa had for her not to try and break into their conversation.

Finally, the Elder in the middle turned to look at her. “We apologize, Dai’Sha. We had asked much of you without providing knowledge of the why,” he said.

Anessa held the Sha for a moment more, and then released it. Accepting their apology with a shallow bow of her head, she spoke, “Then let me understand why this is so important to you.”

She watched as he glanced around at the other Elders, and felt more than she saw them shifting uncomfortably before he turned back to look at her. “What we are about to tell you has been a closely guarded secret, known only to the Elders of their times, since the time our people awakened to the Sha.”

Then another Elder, a woman, continued.

“As you know, before our people awakened to the Sha, we were losing the war with the Nazaari over control of our star system. Our history tells the story of how the Sha gave us the power to defeat them. But the truth is a little different,” she said. “Once we gained the Sha, our people heard a beacon and, following it, they discovered a gift left by the one who created our race, Axull Darr of the People.”

Confused, Anessa interrupted, “What do you mean, ‘created’? The lore speaks how we were their direct ancestors, one of three forgotten colonies that got left behind, the last of our kind. It speaks of how our skin changed to accommodate this world, and we lost the Sha only to regain it once we became strong again.”

“The lore was written at a time of hardship, to make us feel special; it is what allowed us unity at a time when we were close to being broken. It allowed us to spread this far and gain strength,” another Elder said.

“And what is the truth?” Anessa asked.

“The truth is that the People were dying; there was only a handful of them left. They tried to prevent their own deaths, but failed. Axull Darr split from the others of his kind because he did not agree with their methods. He created three races, using his own genetic code to mold them. He then placed them on three different worlds, so that they had evolutionary variance. The lore does not lie about everything. We are the heirs to the People who ruled the entire Galaxy. Our blood is their blood.”

“And what does this have to do with the Humans?” Anessa asked.

“As we were saying,” the Elder in the middle continued, “Axull Darr left us a gift. A device containing all the knowledge and technology of the People. It was that technology that allowed us to end the war in our star system, to defeat the Nazaari. But, as the Nazaari neared their end, they learned of the device.” The Elder said regretfully, “With their last strength, they mounted an attack on its location and managed to destroy it.”

Another Elder to her right then spoke. “We lost all the knowledge that the device contained. At the time, we didn’t have the technology to transfer all of that information; what we did transfer were only bits and pieces that barely scratched the surface of what the device contained. And those small remaining pieces of technology that survived are what have made us this strong. Even now, hundreds of years later, we are benefiting from those technologies. It is why other races fear us,” the Elder said.

Anessa studied them for a moment before speaking. “You don’t care about the Humans. You want their device,” she concluded.

“Yes,” the Elder sitting in the middle said hungrily as he leaned forward to look at Anessa. “Axull Darr left a copy of the same device with each of the three races. The Humans have been enslaved by the Ra’a’zani, who had no concept of the Sha when they met with us. That means that the Humans do not have it, and have not yet heard their beacon. Their inheritance is still hidden on their homeworld. And with it, we can finally regain our birthright, and rule this Galaxy.”

PART TWO – INHERITANCE

Chapter Twenty-One

September; Year 53 of the Empire – Warpath

Aileen blocked an attack from her opponent, then pushed in and delivered a direct punch to his chest. Surprised by Aileen’s speed and strength, her opponent took the brunt of the punch, which lifted him off his feet and sent him to the floor on his back. Aileen stood her ground and watched as her opponent got back up on his feet.

The man rubbed his chest for a moment and then brought his hands together at chest level and bowed. “Thank you for the chance to learn from you, Sentinel,” the young Nel adept said.

“It was my pleasure,” Aileen said, bringing her own fists together and bowing in return.

The young man then turned and left to join his friends, who were observing from the sidelines. Aileen watched him go, realizing that he wasn’t actually a young man. He looked young, like everyone in the Empire, but a quick check with her implant told her that he was thirty-four years old. Aileen didn’t know her exact age, but she believed that she had passed the seventy-year mark. She shook her head. It had been a long time since she’d been a Ra’a’zani slave on Earth.

Aileen looked around the training room, seeing young trainees practicing forms under the watchful eye of Master Hayashi Hideyoshi. A few adepts were moving around helping the old master with the instructions, adjusting the stances of the students and offering advice. Aileen was there simply to train, as she had finished her learning with the old master years ago. All of Master Hayashi’s classes were open to his former students; they could come and observe, join in, or simply use the facility to train.

She heard a gong, and saw everyone stop what they were doing and move to sit in front of Master Hayashi. Aileen moved to the back and leaned against a wall.

Master Hayashi walked up and down the line of students, looking each in the eye for a moment before moving on to the next. Finally, after a couple of minutes, he finished and moved to the middle of the line.

“This day is marks three months since you came to my class. In that time, all that you have been taught were stances and forms of various martial arts, even though all of you already have martial experience. That has been a test,” he said evenly. Aileen felt a side of her lip twitch upwards. She knew the frustration that these ‘students’ felt at being forced to practice forms that they already knew.

“All of you have combat knowledge. Many of you have been in the Empire’s military, some have studied various martial arts in other Clans, and some have been police officers. And yet all of you chose to come to Warpath. That tells me that you have felt something missing. That you wanted to expand your knowledge. But that is something that you could have done anywhere.” He paused for a moment, looking at the students. “To come to Warpath means that you want something more than that. You want to be leaders, philosophers, warriors. And that is what I am going to help you with. I am not going to teach you how to fight; I am going to teach you when not to. I am not going to teach you how to follow orders; I am going to teach you when to ignore them. I will teach you how to see the far-reaching consequences of your actions, both in a fight and out of it.” His eyes softened for a moment before he continued. “And when I am done, you will be one step closer to becoming true warriors.”

With that, he dismissed them, and then started walking towards Aileen. When he was maybe halfway across the room, one of the students called after him.

“Master? What was the test?” a voice asked.

Master Hayashi turned and showed the student his best confused face. “Why would I know that?” After looking at the students for a beat, he shooed them away with a gesture. Then he turned and made his way to Aileen as the students left.

“Aileen, coming to see an old man before you go?” Master Hayashi said with a childlike grin on his twenty-something-looking face.

“Of course. I couldn’t leave without saying goodbye to my favorite master,” Aileen responded with a soft smile.

“Thank you for that. But I haven’t been your master for years. You outrank me now, Sentinel,” he said with a mischievous twinkle in his eye.

“Perhaps, but we both know that you could be a Sentinel if you wanted to,” Aileen said. Warpath ranks were divided into four ranks: Novice—those who had just joined Warpath; Adept—those who had passed the minimum requirements to stay a part of Warpath; Master—those who had mastered at least one area; and Sentinel—those who had mastered at least four areas and had proven themselves exceptional in all of them. Master Hayashi Hideyoshi was, as his title said, still a Master. But not because he was not capable of being a Sentinel. He was the greatest martial artist in Warpath, probably in the entire Empire, second only to the former Clan Leader Adrian Farkas, now the leader of the Sentinels, who was once his student. But he was the exception; he alone had managed to surpass his master.

Master Hayashi sobered a bit. “I like being a master and I like teaching. Always did, even back on Earth.” Aileen felt herself stiffen at his mention of Earth; it had been a long time since then, but still the memories were always at the back of her mind.

Thankfully, Master Hayashi didn’t notice, so Aileen quickly changed the subject. “What do you think of the new novices?”

“They are good enough, but they are not up the standards that the old generations set. All of them were born in the Empire; they don’t know struggle the way we do. But they are good kids; in a few decades, they might become something.”

Aileen smiled at his choice of words. Calling people that were already past their thirty “kids” might have seemed like an insult, but they were kids to Master Hayashi, who was more than a hundred years older than them.

“If we follow the path that the Emperor and the Clan Leader envisioned, we will need more Sentinels,” Aileen added.

“Hmm…We will, if it works…but we are not the Hand. Their jobs are to keep the peace and justice of the Empire according to its laws and codes. What you will be doing is very different. You will be making decisions based on your own thoughts and whatever information you have available,” Master Hayashi said.

Aileen nodded. Clan Leader Farkas and Emperor Klein had come to an agreement concerning Warpath’s Sentinels long ago. They would act in the similar capacity as the Hand of the Empire, only while the Hand worked inside the Empire’s borders, Sentinels would work outside of it. They would be working both attached to the exploration fleets and on their own in order to seek out other races and make contact. They would evaluate their strengths, find their weaknesses, and inform the Emperor of the manner in which the diplomats should approach them. But not only that, they would provide tactical and strategic counsel to the commanders on the fringes of the Empire’s territory, which had been rapidly expanding over the last fifteen years.

That meant that Sentinels themselves had to possess a wide array of skills, diplomacy included. Aileen glanced at her bare left forearm and the five symbols tattooed there. Five aspects that she was proficient in. They were hand to hand, fleet command, xenology, diplomacy, and computer sciences. That was the way of Warpath; every member had tattoos that signified his progress. Every aspect was represented with a symbol inside of a circle; the color of the circle represented the person’s main focus. Aileen’s were black, meaning her main focus was in the combat arts. Smaller orbs were tattooed close to the circled symbols, and those signified the level of proficiency. Aileen’s hand to hand and fleet command had five and four orbs, respectively. Her xenology also had four, while her diplomacy and computer sciences had three. She was one of the more accomplished Sentinels, standing below only the Clan Leader himself, which was why she had been chosen as the first Sentinel to become the part of the Emperor’s vision.

“I understand,” Aileen said in response to Master Hayashi’s words. He in turn watched her intently, and then, after he didn’t find whatever he was looking for, he spoke.

“So, how are you feeling?” Master Hayashi asked with a twinkle in his eyes.

Aileen looked at her hand, clenched her fist, and released it. She turned to Master Hayashi and smiled. “Good. I am still getting used to the additional weight and strength. Still trying to figure out my new limits. And I need to hold back a lot more now,” she answered. “Plus, I feel sore all over,” she added. The aftereffects of the treatment that had upgraded her body were still not completely gone, even with months of rehabilitation.

“I saw you with that adept earlier. You lifted him clear of the floor with one punch, and he was taller than you by half a head at least,” he said.

“Yes, I didn’t hold back enough. It’s hard sometimes to gauge exactly how much strength I am using,” she said.

Master Hayashi hummed thoughtfully, then the childlike twinkle returned to his eyes. “And what about the…?” he asked, his voice trailing off as he raised his hand and wiggled his fingers in a strange gesture that Aileen recognized the meaning of.

She rolled her eyes. “I don’t know how to use any of the psionics yet,” she answered in a monotone tone that came from answering the same question a hundred times. “Although, I did have an accident a few days ago.”

“What kind of accident?” he asked.

“Well, I was in the bathroom, and…” She stopped. “On the other hand, I’m not telling you about that, it’s too embarrassing.”

Master Hayashi grinned, but didn’t press her. Then his face straightened, and he spoke seriously again. “Are you sure about going with him?”

Aileen shifted uncomfortably. “No, but I am the only one that can do it,” she said.

“There is always someone else.”

“What I meant to say was that I am the one who can do it best. It makes sense to take someone who is intimately familiar with the Ra’a’zani. And I was the personal slave to the Earth Overlord, I know them best,” Aileen said.

Master Hayashi grimaced. “Perhaps, but you know that no one is forcing you to go, right? You can say no.”

“Of course I know. It has been made very clear to me,” she answered with a sad smile. “But I want to. I need to face them again. And I can’t back out now; he is the only one that can teach me how to use my new abilities.”

Master Hayashi nodded grimly. “That might be for the best.” He then studied her with a strange look in his eyes. After a few awkward moments of the two of them standing there, Aileen broke the silence.

“What is it?”

Master Hayashi blinked and the look was gone. “You remind me so much of him.” He sighed.

“Really?” Aileen said, surprised.

“Yes.” He nodded. “You have the same drive, in here.” He pointed at her heart. “And the same way of thinking up here,” he said, pointing at her head. “I can see it in the way you fight, in the way you reason your actions.”

“I doubt that; we have led very different lives.” Aileen shook her head.

“Yes, very different lives. Yet trust me when I say this, you are far more alike than not. Adrian was born with a raw talent unlike any I have ever seen, and not just for fighting, but for everything. He pushes himself so far, so much. He pushes not to be the strongest, but for the simple reason that he knows that he has not yet reached his limit. And I believe that when he reaches that limit, he will not stop. He will push further and further simply because he can.”

Master Hayashi laid a hand on her shoulder. “That unyielding drive is what you share, although it comes from different reasons. Things always came easily to him, and he knows it. It is what has made him complacent at times, made him suffer great grief. But his goal was never to be the best for the sake of being above others; the only thing he craves is the challenge of that imaginary boundary that he intends to push through,” he said with a respect that Aileen had rarely heard from her master.

“Things come easy to you, too, but not as easy as they come to him, because you are weighed down. You push to run away. You remember what you once were, and you train to get away from that person. But you will never escape her; she is you,” he said sympathetically. “That is where you and Adrian differ. He has left his past behind him, remembering it but not allowing it to pull him backwards. He faced his moment and didn’t break, and he emerged stronger. But his past was not like yours. He had never been left at the mercy of another, and he has never felt helpless to the same extent as you have. He is free. And you can be like him if you face that person, look her in the eye, and let her go.”

Aileen turned away from her former master, feeling his hand drop from her shoulder. She was shaken, because she knew that he was right. She was held back. She hated her past self; each time her dreams took her to that time, she wanted to scream at that pathetic, beaten slave, to grab her and shake her to ask her what the hell was wrong with her that she would allow them to own her, to make her turn on her own people. It was that time that drove her now. She would never be that helpless and weak again.

She had been broken when she’d arrived in the Empire, one of the few survivors from Earth. It had taken her years to learn all about who humans were, their history, their legacy. And then she’d had a choice; she could be anything she wanted. Some of the survivors had left to found their own Clan, but Aileen had never really felt like a part of them. She was the only one who had been in the service of the Ra’a’zani, and they never let her forget that. Instead, she had chosen to stay on Sanctuary, and eventually she’d started working at the progeny centers as a caretaker. It was those children that she’d raised that had helped her heal, had helped her find herself.

But it still hadn’t been enough. She’d needed to feel strong, to regain the control over her life. So she’d joined Warpath, had started learning what it truly meant to be a warrior. With a deep breath, she gathered herself and turned around to look at her former master. He had waited, not trying to make her feel better.

“I guess that we will see if I can do that. I will meet with the Ra’a’zani sooner or later,” Aileen said.

“You will, and that will be your moment,” Master Hayashi said. Then in a single second, his demeanor changed back to his regular cheerful self. “When are you leaving?”

“Tomorrow,” Aileen said, relaxing as they changed the subject. “They are adding some last-minute cargo to the ship now.”

At the mention of the ship, Master Hayashi got a wistful look on his face. “Ah…I hear that it has the new drives,” he said.

“It does,” Aileen said. New drives that were born from the knowledge the Empire had gained from Axull Darr’s sphere. They allowed the ship that was already capable of traveling through both trans-space and hyperspace to move at faster-than-light speeds inside a star system through normal space. But only in relatively short bursts, and with moderate recharge time. Aileen didn’t know much about the technology, aside from the fact that the techs nicknamed it ‘skimming’ and that it was similar to technology humanity had once theorized about called the Alcubierre drive. All the newer Empire ships had the technology.

“The new drives are probably the only reason why I am not worried that I will go crazy on the trip,” Aileen said with a smile. “I should go, there are still a few things I need taken care of before I leave.”

“Of course, child,” he said, reminding Aileen of the man that was the reason she was alive now. She stepped forward and took the much older man into a hug. With no hesitation, he returned the embrace. And then she stepped back. Master Hayashi smiled. “Don’t forget to send me a message when you have a chance.”

“I won’t,” Aileen said.

Chapter Twenty-Two

Aileen stepped into the large docking stations inside Warpath’s Forge, one of its three asteroids that served as the center of the Clan. She walked towards the area where the ship she would take to Sol was docked, all the way avoiding people running around the halls and large open areas where cargo was constantly moved around. It took her a good half hour to get to her destination. She could have taken a train cart, but she still had time to kill until her scheduled departure. As she entered the docking area where her ship was, she saw a flurry people moving about, still putting cargo boxes on the ship.

She was just to ask someone what they were doing when she noticed a familiar person standing in the middle of the commotion talking with the dock master. She made her way towards him.

“Clan Leader,” she said as she reached him.

“Ah, Aileen. Good, I was just about to comm you,” Clan Leader Isani said.

Alieen looked at his Nel face and tried to catch any indication of his mood, but Nel faces were always hard to read. “Well, here I am. Why did you want to speak with me?” she asked.

“I wanted to let you know that we have made some last-minute additions to your cargo. They are some things that Adrian ordered from the research department. We managed to get most of them done before now, so I thought that you might as well take them to him,” he said while he gestured with his left hand, making a circle, meaning tiredness. “Adrian would have annoyed me to no end if he’d found out that these things were finished and I’d waited another four months until the rest were done to send them.”

Aileen smiled, relieved that it wasn’t anything concerning her departure. “Of course, Clan Leader, I’ll make sure that he gets them.”

“Good.” Isani brought his palms to his stomach and turned them sideways, thanking her. “I shouldn’t even be here, I have too much work to do. But more work is worth it if it keeps Adrian from not annoying me.” With that, he turned and left.

Aileen watched as the dockworkers finished loading the cargo, and then she boarded her ship. She walked through the access hatch and made her way to the observation deck. Once she entered, a hologram appeared in front of her. It was of a male Nel, dressed in typical Empire garbs—tight skin-suit with an overcoat.

“Welcome on board, Sentinel,” he said.

“Thank you,” she said. “Will we be departing soon?” she asked as she sat down in one of the chairs. A holographic interface appeared in front of her. She tapped the few hard light switches floating there and the walls of the room disappeared, showing the area around the ship as if seen through a wraparound window.

“The Forge gave us permission to leave at our leisure, Sentinel,” the ship’s AI said.

“Good,” she said, sitting alone in the observation deck. This wasn’t a passenger ship, and the rest of the crew was busy with their jobs. She was just hitching a ride.

She watched as the ship slowly disengaged from the docks and started towards the tunnel that led out of the asteroid. She looked around at the thousands of ships docked. Some were in various stages of construction, while others were there simply to leave off supplies or take them from Warpath to some other system.

Aileen watched in awe as the ship exited the massive asteroid and set a course towards the outgoing trans-lane that would take her to the Waypoint system, and from there she would make her way to Sol and Mars. Once, the trip would have taken her more than a year. But that was mostly because ships lost a lot of time trekking through star systems between trans-stations. Now, with the skimming technology, they could move from one trans-station to the other in a matter of minutes. The trip to Sol would take her barely a month and a half. They even had much better hyperspace tech now. With the new power generators and hyperspace generators, they had vastly increased their speeds. A hyperspace trip to Earth would take barely nine months, compared to the 60 years it had once taken Olympus to cross that same distance. It was amazing. But trans-space travel was still faster, especially now when they could skim from trans-station to trans-station.

The cargo ship reached the outgoing trans-station and waited as more ships scheduled for transfer to Waypoint arrived. The transfer to Waypoint occurred on a schedule, as a trans-lane couldn’t be used while ships were still in transit. Transfer from Warpath to Waypoint happened once per day, as travel time was about twenty hours.

Aileen waited for another twenty minutes, looking around her at the many different kinds of ships. From transports to cargo ships, to even two patrol ships. Then the massive station placed just outside of the trans-station sent out a countdown to transfer. The cargo ship wouldn’t be using its own trans drives to pass through—it had nowhere near enough power to send all ships inside the area through, as the amount of mass that had to be pushed through was great, and that meant a more powerful field was needed. Instead, the massive station would project the field and send them through.

The timer reached zero, and all the ships in the trans-station disappeared in a flash of violet light.

Chapter Twenty-Three

October; Year 53 of the Empire – Sanctuary

“And I need to do that why, exactly?” Tomas asked.

“They fulfilled your demands, Tomas,” Nadia said, infuriated with her Emperor, “and you already set the precedent when you accepted Nuva into the Empire.”

Tomas sighed in defeat. “If I summon the Clan Leaders outside of the scheduled meetings, I am going to pay for it. They already grumble because they need to come here twice a year.”

“Do you want the Trivaxians to feel slighted on the day they are finally accepted into the Empire?” Nadia asked pointedly.

“No,” he grumbled.

“Then summon the Clan Leaders,” she told him.

“Fine. But they better not try to make this about more than a simple acceptance ceremony, or I swear to everything the next meeting we have I am going to just let them yell at each other.”

“No, you will not,” Nadia said, and stood from her chair in front of Tomas’s desk. “Now, I have another hundred things to care of,” she said, and left the office.

Tomas cursed under his breath. It had taken the Trivaxians more than sixteen years to complete all of Tomas’s demands. To remodel their society, to invent and build a hyperspace generator all on their own, and then go and colonize another system, with the Empire only supervising. And they had done it. Their colony was thriving. Their society had adopted the ways of the Empire, and now they would join them and get access to all the technology Empire possessed, everything that they needed to start as the newest Clan of the Empire. There would be oversight, of course, until they grew comfortable with the technology. But in another five years, they would have all the advantages of being a part of the Empire.

They would be the first non-human or Nel race in the Empire, whose numbers were now almost equal. Both the Nel and the humans numbered around a billion, placing the Empire’s total population at just north of two billion. It was all thanks to the laws he’d put in place when he’d created the Empire regarding the progeny centers. But now, with the Trivaxians being added, that number would skyrocket, and people of Trivax would outnumber both the humans and the Nel. Their population was close eight billion. And the other race that was trying to be accepted, the Furvor, had about nine billion, and they too were close to finishing all their requirements. But they would suffer penalties because of their attack on Trivaxians.

And then there were the Guxcacul, who would also ask to be accepted, if what he was hearing was correct. They had a small population, and as they already possessed a lot of advanced technology, Tomas didn’t need any special requirements for them. But they were still trying to rebuild their homeworld back up after the war with the Sowir.

And lastly there were the fifty billion Nel living in the Nelus system. They were holding out, trying to recover on their own through trade with the Empire, but over the years Tomas had seen their frustration. They were watching the growth of the Empire and were likely wondering what they could do if they were a part of it. But he knew that he couldn’t just let them in like that; they needed to change their beliefs fundamentally if he was going to accept them.

Tomas turned his holo table on and started looked at the countless number of reports. With a sigh, he opened one and started reading.

***

Laura Reiss, Fleets Master of the Empire, stood in the fleet command room of the massive command-class ship. Around her were countless floating holograms, surrounding people sitting in chairs around the room. In the middle was a dais, and from there she gazed around at the people working. To her side was a hologram of the ship. Its enormous size was not apparent on the scaled-down hologram.

“It is impressive,” Laura said.

“Thank you, ma’am,” Fleet Commander Nair Hakeem of the First Fleet said from her side.

Laura studied the wide arrowhead-shaped ship. Sitting at 4200 meters in length, another 3000 wide, and 1800 tall at its tallest, it really was impressive. It held the most sophisticated communications and battle sensors that they possessed. But it was not meant as a ship for battle; it was the ship that guided the battle. Designed specifically as a flagship of a fleet, it had few weapons, sacrificing that for armor, shimmering fields, and shields with enough power to make sure that nothing could pass through them. It of course had the latest Watchtower interface that now ran on multiple levels of communications, hyperspace communications, lasers, radio, and the newly developed normal space FTL comms built from the technology they’d learned from the sphere. It also came with several levels of the best encryption that the Empire had.

The ship also served as control point for the drone command teams, whose control had been removed from the Watchtower interface and delegated to designated teams of pilots. The command ship had one hundred and twenty teams with ten people each, meaning that it could control up to twelve hundred drones.

With a gesture, Laura zoomed out and the hologram showed the fleet of ships surrounding the Empire command ship Avalon. Around it were the ten new Leviathan-class dreadnoughts, sitting at 3000 meters long, 2000 wide at their widest, and 700 meters tall, shaped like arrowheads too, borrowing the design from Warpath’s Harbinger. Like all dreadnoughts classes before it, they were almost fleets unto themselves, only now they were larger and much deadlier.

Ever since the Fleet had gotten reorganized—the older models retired to Clan defense or put into storage, and newer models built—the form of the fleet had changed. They wouldn’t be building a great number of these new dreadnoughts, only ten per fleet. And they didn’t need to; those ten alone had firepower enough to lay waste to entire fleet like the one that they had used to invade the Sowir home system. Their weapons and defenses all used tech from the sphere, or adapted from it, with a few purely human inventions. The Fleet had also started to build all their ships to be modular, like the Vanguard Fleet. This would allow them to upgrade their ships much easier, although it did add a bit to the construction time, as they didn’t fabricate entire hulls in several large pieces.

Around the dreadnoughts floated the one hundred new battleships, 2000 meters long, 1200 wide, and 550 tall. They followed the design similar to Warpath’s Titan, with its apparently overlapping carapace-like plates. Then there were the four hundred new cruiser ships, 1000 meters long, 300 wide, and 500 tall, designed like sleek talons. And lastly the twelve hundred drones, which were the upgraded versions of the former Vanguard drones. These were 760 meters long, 380 wide, and 180 tall, and shaped like irregular rectangular boxes.

This made the grand total number of the First Fleet 1710 warships, plus the command ship and the auxiliaries that pushed that number to 2000, which was the number that all their new fleets now had. And once the last five command ships finished their production, the Empire’s six war fleets would be finished. Twelve thousand warships protecting the Empire’s territory, which was now a prolate spheroid almost 1000 light years across at its two furthest points, and some 600 at its two closest. The Empire’s territory was now split into six sectors, each with an area of at least 150 light years across in all directions. And each of the fleets would be stationed and charged with patrolling and protecting their sector.

Soon, all fleets would leave for their areas of the Empire. The Third Fleet was the one that was stationed in the First Sector, which encompassed Sanctuary. The First Fleet was stationed in the Second Sector, which was now former Sowir territories. The other fleets had been spread out across the area of space between Sanctuary and Sol, although there wasn’t yet the same number of people and colonized systems in the volume of space that they were charged of protecting. And the Sixth Fleet, with Fleet Commander Johanna Stern back in command of a war fleet, would be stationed in Sol, at the border of their Empire.

“Congratulations, Fleet Commander.” Laura turned to Nair. “Looks like you are the first Fleet Commander to have a fully completed fleet.”

“Thank you, Fleets Master. But Avalon’s sister ships will be finished in a few days,” Nair responded.

“Yes,” Laura said as she turned to look at the holo again. “Soon enough.”

Chapter Twenty-Four

November; Year 53 of the Empire – Mars

“Is it working?” Adrian asked one of the techs standing to his left.

“For now. The liquid is solidifying at an acceptable rate, and the materials are being incorporated within the predicted range,” she answered over the comms, as they were outside on the surface of Mars.

In front of them was a massive, round black pool of liquid with a diameter of almost one hundred meters. It was only a part of the construct; belowground was where most of the facility stretched.

“How long will it take?” Adrian asked.

“Some parts go slower, others faster. Building the engines, for example, is tricky. But all together, we are looking at fifty hours,” the tech responded.

“I guess that that is amazing, considering that it is building an entirely finished shuttle all on its own,” Adrian commented.

The tech didn’t respond. Instead, she focused on the holographic display in front of her. They had been trying to crack one of the technologies from the sphere that would eventually allow them to build entirely finished ships in a matter of hours. They had the copies of many technologies from the sphere. Not the entire database—it was too large, and they couldn’t even begin to fathom their more advanced stuff—but this particular technology looked similar to the 3D printers, and the shuttle they were now building would rise from the liquid resin fully formed. But beneath the pool was the massive factory that provided the liquid materials needed for the shuttle’s construction. It used light, oxygen, and electric currents to shape and build according to blueprints provided to it. The tech was amazing, but was still nowhere close to what Adrian wanted. He tried to control himself as he knew that it was impossible for them to start using the technology on the same level as the People had. They needed time to learn how and why it worked. But his plans were long reaching, stretching for hundreds of years into the future.

Adrian sighed, then turned and started towards his shuttle.

“Get us home, Iris,” he said once he was inside and had removed his helmet. The shuttle turned on and slowly lifted off the ground, and Iris appeared in front of him.

“The new Sentinel should be arriving soon,” Iris said.

“Aileen, yes. That makes four of us who have psionics in the Empire,” Adrian said.

“You don’t sound all that happy. What is it?” Iris asked.

“It’s nothing,” he started. “I just thought that by now we would have had more people with the psionics. We have only just started to trigger the change in embryos.”

“You planned on having people who could teach others how to use them before you started doing that,” Iris pointed out.

“It took me too long to learn, and it took longer than I anticipated to teach others,” he said regretfully. “Perhaps I’m not a good teacher. Clara and Mei are doing well, and I taught them all that I know, but they are still not on the level where I want them. They are ready to teach others, but they are not really at the level that I wanted them to be in terms of skill and power.”

“It will happen on its own terms, Adrian, you can’t force the issue. And Clara and Mei will be ready by the time that the next generations grow up. And they will improve as they teach others, much like how you did.”

“Right. Well, at least we are finally ready to leave and start looking for the Ra’a’zani,” he said.

“Fifteen years of peace, and already you are looking to start another war,” Iris said disappointedly.

“They took human slaves with them when they left. We cannot leave those people in their hands; too much time has already passed,” Adrian told her. “And we have a promise to keep. The Ra’a’zani will pay for what they had done to our birthplace.”

“They haven’t come back to Sol in fifty years, Adrian,” Iris argued. “And you have no idea where their territory is. For all you know, it could be on the other side of the galaxy.”

“That is why we will go out and explore, seek out other races, and find information about them,” Adrian said.

Iris rolled her eyes and disappeared. “Fine. I know that I can’t change your mind, but don’t come running to me to save you when we run into another race like the Sowir, only with bigger guns,” she added in his head through his imp.

“We can’t keep to ourselves forever, Iris,” Adrian told her aloud, but she didn’t respond. She no longer inhabited the wrist unit that Seo-yun built for her. Adrian had thought that it was too vulnerable, so during the procedure that had upgraded his body, her core and holographic projector had been implanted inside his arm, with only a small one-centimeter orb outside of his skin acting as the projector.

They spent the next ten minutes in silence as they neared Olympus Mon, the home of the Sentinels and what they called the Sentinel Fortress. The large complex was finished, although a great majority of it was empty. In time, as more Sentinels were trained, it would be filled up. For now, there were only people from Warpath that worked here. At some point, they would become the support staff for the Sentinels.

The shuttle lowered slowly down to the massive platform that opened and allowed the shuttle into the hangar. Adrian took his helmet in hand and walked out of the shuttle. He nodded to people working around the hangar, and started walking deeper inside the base. He rounded a few corners and finally reached the practice hall.

He opened the doors and entered. Immediately, he felt something speeding towards his head. He moved a step back and used his power to telekinetically deflect the heavy rubber ball upwards. Then in one smooth move, he pivoted around his right leg and threw his helmet towards his attacker, pushing it faster with the telekinesis. The helmet struck his attacker in the shoulder, making her spin as she dropped to the floor, where she rolled from side to side, groaning.

“Oh, that’s so not fair,” whined Clara Bengtsdotter, a two-meter-tall blonde Amazon woman, one of the best Sentinels in Warpath, as she rolled on the floor.

“How did you know that I was coming through this door?” Adrian asked curiously as he started walking towards her. The practice hall had many entrances, and she had attacked the moment he’d entered.

“We bribed the hangar workers to let us know when you arrived,” she groaned out with her eyes still closed.

Adrian grinned, and then as he almost reached her, he froze. “Wait…we?” he asked just as he felt someone move behind him. He quickly turned and saw Meifeng Zhao jumping towards him through the air from one of the wall platforms. He grabbed her telekinetically and was about to throw her aside when he felt Clara jump back up and move to attack him. She released a kinetic blast from her hand, and Adrian allowed it to hit him. He let it pick him up from the floor, and as he twisted in the air, he swiped his arm towards Clara, sending Mei’s petite form crashing into her. Then, with a well-placed kinetic blast to the floor from both his hands, he straightened and landed on his feet.

He looked at the two sprawled on the floor, Mei on top of Clara, and laughed out loud.

“Nice try,” he said as he walked towards them.

Mei looked up and glared at him. “How did you know where I was?”

“Echolocation,” he said. “And you make sounds as you move through the air.”

Meifeng Zhao grimaced. “Urgh…you couldn’t have had more than a moment’s notice.”

“One moment is all that I needed,” Adrian said.

Clara pushed Mei off her and jumped back to her feet, far more springily than someone who was in a great amount of pain would have.

“Shoulder is fine already, I see,” Adrian commented.

Clara gave grinned at him. “I twisted my shoulder as the helmet hit, cushioning the attack.”

“Impressive reaction,” Adrian said. “Now if only you worked more on your acting…”

Clara grabbed Adrian’s helmet from the floor telekinetically and threw it at his head. Adrian froze it mid-air effortlessly and started walking towards the exit, with the helmet floating behind him. “Well, I just wanted to check up on you and let you know that the new Sentinel should arrive later today.”

“We’ll be ready to welcome her,” Clara said mischievously.

Adrian chuckled and left the hall.

***

The cargo ship dropped out of trans-space and into the Sol system. The incoming trans-station was between the orbits of Earth and Mars, and nearby was a big defense station surrounded by defense platforms, protecting the incoming trans-station. In its current orbit, Aileen’s destination—Mars—was on the other side of the system. She glanced at the holo in the observation deck, and looked at Earth—the birthplace of humanity. Massive storms still ravaged its surface. It was gray and red, as volcanos still erupted across her surface, the last Ra’a’zani crime against humanity. It would be hundreds of years before the storms waned and the volcanos went silent again, and thousands more before it became what it once was.

She watched from the observation deck as the ship moved away from the trans-station and the defense station positioned to be pointed at Mars on a clear line and skimmed to her destination in almost two full minutes. It was unadvisable for ships to use skimming close to other constructs, as a skim created a kind of a ripple in the space around it for a few minutes. Not something that could destroy a station, but enough to wreck computer-based systems.

The ship moved towards one of the dozens of stations in Mars orbit. All the way, Aileen looked at the holo in front of her, at the amount of traffic in system. It surprised her, actually; the traffic wasn’t as dense as in Sanctuary or Waypoint, but it was close. There were thousands of ships here, moving between planets, from Mars to Jupiter and Saturn, where massive gathering facilities orbited the gas giants. There were also large shipyards in orbit around Jupiter’s moons. And then in the asteroid field, a fleet of mining and cargo ships moved about the mining facilities that had been constructed on the bones of those built by the Ra’a’zani. But what surprised her were a few massive constructs close to the Sun. She couldn’t guess at their purpose, but the information on the holo told her that they were massive. The system had much more traffic now than what it had had when the Ra’a’zani were here. It seemed like the Emperor had made this system a priority.

Over the next hour, Aileen transferred from the ship to the station, where she waited for a shuttle to take her to the ground with the cargo she’d brought with her. The shuttle made its way directly to Olympus Mon, which would be her home in the future. After the shuttle entered the hangar and landed, Aileen exited the shuttle and stepped into the Sentinel Fortress.

***

Adrian watched as his newest student exited the shuttle and noticed him waiting for her. She started walking towards him, and Adrian took the time to study her. She was about as tall as he was, at around 180 cm tall. Her black hair was tied back in a ponytail, and she wore a dark red overcoat. She looked fit, more so than a person that wasn’t training, but that was to be expected; she was from Warpath, after all. There weren’t really unfit people in the Empire, at least as far as Nel and Humans were concerned. The mix of their food and the genetic alterations that gave them immortality made it extremely hard for anyone to actually gain unnecessary weight, unless they were actively trying. But those who were training had a more ‘fit’ look.

“Lord Sentinel,” Aileen said stiffly, using his official title.

“There is no need for formalities here, you can call me Adrian. Welcome to Mars,” he said warmly.

She smiled before responding. “Thank you…Adrian.”

“Well, first things first, let’s show you around the base…” Adrian started, and then he felt a telepathic link reach out to Aileen. Realizing what it was, Adrian made no outward reaction as two voices spoke.

“You’re finally here!” Clara sent out.

“Oh, she really is!” Meifeng sent immediately after.

Adrian saw Aileen startle, her head turning around looking to see who it was that spoke, but there wasn’t anyone near them. Adrian kept his face straight, pretending not to hear anything. He had done the same thing to Clara and Meifeng when the two of them had first received their psionics.

“Are you alright?” Adrian asked, tilting his head to the side in an inquisitive move.

“Uh…” she started slowly, “I think that I might be a bit tired.”

“She does look a bit pale,” Mei sent.

Aileen turned her head to the side, looking in the direction where Clara and Mei stood, but her eyes passed over them as the two were too far away and were facing the opposite direction.

“Yes, but that is nothing that a few trainings at our pace won’t fix,” Clara added.

Adrian noticed Aileen getting more and more agitated, so he interfered. “Alright,” Adrian sent, “you had your fun.”

Aileen turned to look at him and he grinned. “Sorry about that, they were just having a bit of fun. I did it to them when they first got their psionics, and they have been itching to try it on someone else.”

Open-mouthed, Aileen stared at him, and then Adrian gestured with his head towards Clara and Mei, who were waving at her. She turned to look back at Adrian. “That…that was telepathy?” she asked.

Adrian’s grin widened. “Yes,” he sent, and saw her study his unmoving mouth.

“Come,” he said, guiding her gently towards the entrance proper into the facilities, “let me show you your new home.”

***

Adrian, Clara, and Meifeng stood in the practice room, three crates standing in front of them. He had left a slightly overwhelmed Aileen alone in her quarters to get accustomed and settled into her new home.

“What are those?” Clara pointed at the crates.

Adrian winked at her. “Gifts from Warpath.” He approached one with his name on it and opened it. Inside were several items surrounded with foam, but in the corner of the crate was a small datachip. Adrian took it out and accessed it with his implant, downloading the instructions for the crate’s contents. He put the instructions on his HUD, and read them at an incredible rate by increasing his brain’s processing power consciously.

Then, once he’d finished, he reached into the crate and took out two black cloth-like gloves. They felt light in his hand, the material strange, at the same time flexible but also tough. He knew already that it was extremely strong Kevlar-like material. He put them on over his hands that now held a few more aspects—diplomacy and xenology, as those were now required for Sentinels. He wiggled his fingers and felt the gloves mold themselves to his hands until they fitted him perfectly. He pulled energy and accessed one of the psionics he had mastered, and his palms started radiating heat. He kept at it for a few seconds, and then checked the gloves, seeing that they let the heat through without a problem. He took off his coat, and then reached down and took out a larger silver-colored torso piece.

“Here.” He gave it to Clara. “Help me with this.”

She held it above his head and he put it on over his skin-suit. The piece had a solid plate across his over his upper torso. It fit awkwardly; it was too big for him. Then he took out the two leg pieces that were boots with shin bracers. He put them on and clicked them closed around his lower legs. He turned towards Meifeng and Clara, who had been looking at him in fascination.

“And what is that supposed to be?” Meifeng asked.

Adrian winked again. “Just watch,” he said, and made contact with the suit’s computer, turning it on with his imp.

The three round lights on the chest piece turned on, shining a faint bluish light. The torso piece started contracting and molding itself to his build. Then, once that was finished, Adrian turned to look at Clara and Meifeng. “Now for the battle mode,” he said, spreading his arms, and the second transformation began. Small black plates started spreading from the chest and leg pieces across his arms and legs, moving in a cascading wave of overlapping pieces until they covered every part of his body save for his face. Towards the end, the pieces on his shoulders and neck started spreading across his head, encasing it too in armor, until the helmet portion looked like a blank faceplate with a short crest at the back of the head. The area over the face was smooth, but the rest around the head was covered in the same scale-like plates. A new HUD appeared in front of him, but Adrian cleared it with his imp; he didn’t want to tinker with that part of the suit just now.

The suit was silver and black in color. The hard plates across his chest, shoulders, and back were silver, as were the lower parts of his legs. The hexagonal scale-like plates that covered the rest of his body were black. On his chest, the three glowing blue lights were arranged as the points of an upside down triangle.

After the transformation finished, Adrian lowered his arms and started moving, seeing how the suit felt. He had almost full range of movement; he couldn’t put his hands quite all the way down, as the thicker solid plate that surrounded his chest got in the way. The entire suit was of moderate weight, and wasn’t fully powered. It had power for functions other than movement, but Adrian would need to use his own strength to move. That wasn’t a problem for him, though.

He looked at his hands and saw that the plates went only up to his wrists and over the top of his hand, leaving the bottom side of his fingers and the palm covered only with the gloves. The gloves had been joined with the suit, and he was now completely sealed inside the suit. The gloves, on the other hand, had been made according to the specifications from the sphere, and were specially made to allow him to use psionics through them—most importantly his kinetic blast ability, as the majority of other abilities he could use even in full armor. The scales would be able to do something similar for other psionics.

Adrian telekinetically grabbed his overcoat from the crate where he’d put it before and raised it to the side. Then he fired off a small kinetic blast from his hand, sending the cloth a few meters away.

He looked back to Clara and Meifeng, who looked at him open-mouthed. With a command from his imp he retracted the helmet part and grinned at them.

“Matter compression,” Adrian said. “You each get one too. We call them the Sentinel suits.” And the two of them immediately opened their crates with the intent of putting them on. “Wait, wait,” he said quickly, stopping them. “You need to read the instructions first.” He pointed at the small datachip.

Clara took her chip in hand while Meifeng took out a short, small box from the crate.

“What is this?” Meifeng asked.

“Ah…that,” Adrian said, and took the small box from his own crate. “We call that the NX-02.”

“A drug?” Clara asked.

“It is concentrated energy—adrenaline, oxygen, and a few substances that boost brain processing, physical strength, and speed. If used, it will replenish your energy supplies, or add to them if you aren’t depleted yet. Plus, they’ll basically make you unstoppable for a minute or two,” Adrian said.

“Wait, we have means to replenish our energy artificially?” Meifeng asked, confused. “Why haven’t we been using it?”

Adrian shook his head sadly. “Because we can’t. It is an artificially synthesized energy substance that we copied from the sphere. It can do the job, but it isn’t as good as what your body produces on its own. In fact, prolonged use will damage your organs and cripple your psionics.” Adrian flipped the lid up and retrieved a small cartridge-like vial. “That is why each suit has only one dose. It needs to be used only as a last resort.” He sent a command over his imp, and a small opening appeared below his armpit. He slid the cartridge inside, and it closed seamlessly. “I don’t think that we will ever have a need for it. But with everything that has happened to the Empire in the last couple of decades…I just wanted another ace in our hands,” Adrian finished.

“Well, I know that I won’t have a chance to use it anytime soon. We will spend the next couple of decades on Sanctuary training and teaching others how to use their psionics,” Clara said as she reached and put the gloves on, and then the rest of the suit.

“Perhaps, but it is still there if we need it. Also, these suits are prototypes, so we will need to give feedback to the scientists that made them,” Adrian said, grinning as his helmet reformed. He got into a battle stance, and waited until the two had put their own suits on before he threw himself at them.

Chapter Twenty-Five

March; Year 54 of the Empire – Sol system

Aileen struggled to stay atop a small pillar as Clara and Meifeng threw rubber balls the size of her head at her. She was deflecting them with her mind only, without using her hands, which made it much harder. And she was allowed only telekinesis; no blowing the balls away with kinetic blasts. And she needed to use all her senses in order to sense what direction the balls were coming from, as Clara and Mei would sometimes miss her intentionally or grab an already deflected ball and then pull it back at Aileen from another angle.

All in all, she thought that she was doing well, aside from the fact that she was running out of energy. And then as she felt the last of her energy disappear, a ball hit her in the chest and threw her from the pillar down onto the tatami.

“Three minutes and forty two seconds,” Adrian said from the sidelines. “You held out for six seconds longer than last time.”

Aileen groaned and got up to her feet. “It’s still nowhere close to how long you guys can hold out.”

“Of course it isn’t,” Clara said, “we have been training for years. You, only for a couple of months.”

“She is right,” Adrian said as he approached. “The energy-containing organ is like a muscle. The more you use it, the more energy it will be able to store and the quicker it will recover. You just need to keep at it. Drain it all, then recharge.”

Aileen already knew that; they had been telling her the same thing since they’d begun her training. But still she couldn’t do anything like what the three of them were capable of. She could barely move three small objects around her. They could pick another person up and throw them across the room. And their reserves came back much faster, too, whereas she had to wait almost an entire day until she fully recovered.

“I know, I just feel as if I am not making any progress,” Aileen said.

Meifeng put a hand on her shoulder. “But you are. I know that it doesn’t seem that way now, but you are actually advancing at a faster pace than both Clara or I did.”

“I doubt that,” Aileen said.

“No,” Adrian said, “she is right. They were the first that I trained, and I was still learning myself. With you, it is easier; we know what works and what doesn’t. Trust us.”

Aileen sighed. “I do. I’m just frustrated, that’s all.”

“I know the feeling,” Clara said.

“Using psionics isn’t just about energy supplies. It is about skill, too, about focus. I am expending a lot less energy in order to use my abilities than you are. It is because I have learned how to use them more efficiently. In time, you will develop those skills too. But for now, it is more important for you to increase your capacity,” Adrian said.

Aileen nodded her head in understanding.

“Good, then that is it for today,” Adrian said.

“So, I guess that this is our last practice together,” Meifeng said.

“What do you mean?” Aileen asked, confused.

Clara turned to Adrian. “You haven’t told her yet?”

“No, I planned on doing it after this,” Adrian responded.

“Tell me what?” Aileen asked.

“Clara and I are leaving for Sanctuary tomorrow,” Meifeng said.

“What? Why?”

Clara smiled sadly. “We have learned all that we can from Adrian; now it is only a matter of training and improving ourselves. We are going back to start training others that will be going through the treatments. And soon children will be born with psionics, and we will need people capable of teaching them how to use their abilities,” she answered.

“Oh...” Aileen said sadly.

“But don’t worry, you and Adrian will be going on your own trip, outside of the Empire’s territory,” Clara said cheerfully.

“Really?” Aileen turned to Adrian.

“Yes, I am getting some last-minute things in order, and then we will leave. There is no point in waiting; I can train you on board a ship just as well as I can here. We were only waiting for Clara and Meifeng to feel comfortable with teaching others. And their time with you has given them that,” Adrian answered.

“Well...” Aileen turned to the two women. “I will miss you.”

“And we will miss you too.” Clara stepped forward and hugged Aileen, then reached and pulled Meifeng into the hug as well.

“Don’t let Adrian bully you,” Meifeng sent her privately.

“I won’t,” Aileen answered.

“If he tries, just send us a call. We got loads of dirt on him; we were his bodyguards for years,” Clara joined in.

Aileen chuckled. “I promise.”

***

Aileen sat across from Adrian as the small inter-system transport skimmed from Mars to Jupiter. He didn’t want to tell her where they were going, but she had been told to pack, as they wouldn’t be back to Mars in a while. At Adrian’s feet sat two massive wolions, Akash and Sora. She had seen them often over the last few months since they were rarely away from Adrian. But she hadn’t really paid that much attention to them, as she was trying to focus on her training.

The small transport started moving towards one of Jupiter’s moons, Ganymede. Adrian turned on the screens showing the outside, letting her see a massive closed shipyard orbiting the moon. Then the transport stopped a few kilometers away.

Aileen glanced at Adrian inquiringly, but he just pointed at the shipyard. She watched the screen and noticed that almost its entire side started to open up. Aileen watched open-mouthed as a massive ship exited the hollow seven-kilometer-wide and eight-kilometer-tall shipyard. The transport started moving towards the ship as it exited the shipyard completely. Its front had a blunt arrow look to it, almost as if someone had cut its sharp point off. The rest resembled the Vanguard ship Harbinger, only somehow sleeker and more menacing-looking. She used her implant to calculate its size based on that of the shipyard, and found that it was about 3200 meters long, 2300 wide at its widest, and 1000 tall at its tallest point.

The transport made its way to the ship’s hangar and landed inside. Adrian motioned Aileen to follow him out, and they exited. After they stepped onto the ship, Adrian turned to her and spread his hands wide.

“Welcome to the Sentinel ship Veritas,” he said.

Aileen looked around and saw people walking around or driving small grav-cars loaded with cargo. She turned back at Adrian. “Sentinel ship?”

“Yes. Eventually, I want every Sentinel operating outside of the Empire, commanding a ship just like this one,” Adrian said proudly.

Aileen looked around at the people, studying them closely and noticing that they were all dressed in Warpath colors. A few even had insignias on their overcoats designating them as adepts or masters.

“Come,” Adrian said, and led her and the two wolions to the lift. They went up to the command deck and stepped into a large, spherical room with half a dozen people sitting in chairs with holograms floating around them. At the end of the room was a large, round holo table, but there wasn’t anyone there at the moment.

“As you can see,” Adrian said as he led her to a dais that held a larger chair, “I took some inspiration from the new Fleet command ships. Only with a few improvements,” he said as he took a seat in the chair.

Immediately, holo screens appeared on his right side, with details about the ship’s status.

“We are ready to go, Lord Sentinel,” said one of the people below as he turned in his chair.

“Good, skim us to the trans-station,” Adrian said.

“Do we even know where we are going?” Aileen asked.

“Yes.” Adrian nodded. “We have explored all the trans-lanes leading out of and into Sol. But as we don’t know the exact location of Ra’a’zani space, only the general direction, we will be taking a trans-lane that is going in that direction.”

Aileen turned toward the large holo suspended above the people in the chairs and watched as Veritas sped from Jupiter to Venus in barely a minute. The ship then moved inside the trans-lane.

“You are free to transfer, Navigation Handler,” Adrian said. And within seconds, they left Sol. Adrian turned to her. “Now that we are underway, let me show you the training facilities,” he said with a wicked glint in his eye.

Something must’ve shown on Aileen’s face, because Adrian quirked an eyebrow, then made an unfamiliar Nel gesture. “You didn’t think that you were going to skip training today, now, did you?”

Chapter Twenty-Six

April; Year 54 of the Empire – Veritas

Aileen dropped to the tatami hard, the force of her fall rattling her through the Sentinel suit. She rose to her knees quickly and tried to block a kick to her head, bringing her hands up to block at the last minute. Adrian’s kick pushed through, throwing her back to the floor and causing her to roll until her back struck one of the training pillars in the room and she stopped.

Shaking the blow off, she managed to get up to her feet before Adrian reached her. He led with a series of punches that she could only partially block; glancing strikes hit her shoulders, helmet, and chest. She tried to get her own punch in, but every time she thought she saw an opening, Adrian punished her for attempting a counterattack. He was pummeling her, pushing her backwards until her back was against the wall and she no longer had anywhere to go.

His attacks never slowed; the only thing that she could do was defend. Fists rained on her at an amazing speeds, far faster than anything an unaugmented human could possibly achieve. Seeing no other way to free herself, she turned her palms towards him and fired of a kinetic blast that pushed him back. She tried to press her momentary advantage. Stepping forward, she attempted a side kick to Adrian’s side—only her attack never connected. Her leg froze a breath away from Adrian, and a moment later she was thrown to the side.

She twisted in mid-air and landed on her feet, only to be knocked back by a kinetic blast several times more powerful than her own. As she was flying backwards and towards the floor, she felt as if something grabbed her, suspending her in the air momentarily. Then, a force pulled her back. She managed to turn her head enough to see Adrian jumping at her before he hit her with an elbow to the chest in mid-air as he was pulling her towards him telekinetically.

Aileen smashed into the floor, denting it from the force of the attack. Her suit protected her from most of it, but she was still in pain and could barely move. Once she had mastered the basics of the two beginner psionics, as Adrian liked to call them—telekinesis and kinetikinesis—Adrian had gifted her a Sentinel suit. As she was staring at the ceiling of the Veritas’s training room, a helmeted head moved into her view.

“That is what you get for using psionics in a hand-to-hand-only spar,” Adrian said calmly through his suit’s speakers.

Aileen didn’t have the strength to respond, so she remained silent and tried to regain her wits. She’d known, of course, that the moment she used psionics Adrian would respond in kind. Not that he actually needed to use them. Aileen was still much weaker than him; the one kinetic blast she’d fired had almost drained her entire reserve.

Ever since Adrian had taken over her training in full from Clara and Meifeng, he hadn’t spared her at all. In fact, he was much harsher with her. He still pulled back, but even then, he was leagues ahead of her. She had never really believed in all the stories that people in Warpath had told about him. She’d thought that he was good, but not that much ahead of the other Sentinels, especially with the fact that he was rarely seen training.

But sparring with him had served to teach her just how wrong she’d been. The way he moved and anticipated the movements of others was perfect. His technique was fluid, always adapting and never predictable. Every part of his body was a part of his arsenal; he used everything to fight. And his punches were much stronger than hers ever were. It wasn’t that he had greater physical strength; they were about equal there. It was that when he moved to attack, his body reacted in perfect synchronization, every muscle moving perfectly to execute a much more powerful attack.

Aileen had learned so much from Adrian. So many of her beliefs about hand-to-hand combat, he had shattered. And she knew that she was improving at a much faster rate now than when she’d still been in Warpath.

“I didn’t have a choice,” Aileen said once she recovered enough.

“You always have a choice, Aileen. Sometimes losing is preferable to breaking the rules,” Adrian said as he reached down and pulled her up, his helmet withdrawing back from his head. “We had agreed on fighting without psionics; you chose to use them even though you knew that it would make no difference. Tell me, why did you do that?”

“Because I was frustrated,” she said, her own helmet withdrawing. “I couldn’t land one punch on you.”

“But you knew that psionics wouldn’t change anything,” Adrian persisted. “Why try even?”

“You could’ve made a mistake,” she said.

“There is always a possibility of that. But you will not win, or even level the playing field, by hoping that I make mistakes,” Adrian said. “At our level of prowess, mistakes are rare. You need to guide me into doing something beneficial for you. Trick me into giving you an opening on purpose, then take advantage of it in a way that I haven’t predicted.”

“That’s easier said than done,” Aileen complained.

Adrian nodded. “It is. It is not about having a perfect technique. In fact, being perfect in your movements, attacks, and techniques is a bad thing. You need to be able to adapt to everything, invent moves that will accomplish what you want in an instant. Being perfect makes you predictable, easily maneuvered to exactly where your opponent wants you to be.” He tilted his head. “That is your problem; you think that if you fight perfectly, you will somehow reach me. But it has never been about that. On our level, fights are won in your mind. You need to manipulate me, trick me into doing what you want me to do.”

“I doubt that I could manipulate you into giving me an opening that I can exploit,” Aileen said.

“You can’t. I am too good at seeing those kinds of traps. What you need to do is let me attack you where you want me to, take the punch, and sacrifice in order to make an opening yourself,” he said.

Aileen nodded in understanding. At this point, she was willing to try anything to just land one punch on him.

“Let’s go again,” Adrian said as his helmet started covering his head.

***

Adrian walked into the control room of the Veritas with Sora following close behind a few minutes after the ship exited the trans-lane and dropped into normal space. Their location was an unimpressive system some one hundred light years spinward from Sol. And it was also the furthest point that the Empire had explored in their search for the Ra’a’zani. From this point on, they had no intel.

As he entered, one of the people standing in front of the holo table showing the system they were in turned to face him.

“Lord Sentinel,” said Gotu, formerly Hokra Gotu, one of the first Nel to have ever met a human, who was now a Warpath Master.

“Gotu, what do we have?” Adrian asked.

“Nothing much. There is no sign of life, but the system has two outgoing trans-stations. I’ve already sent two drones to the trans-stations; they should be arriving shortly and we will see what the scans say about them,” Gotu answered. Adrian nodded. From the sphere, they had gotten the scanning tech that allowed them to test trans-stations and find out the direction and travel time without actually going through them.

A few minutes later, they got the information from the first of the drones.

“Hm...three days’ travel time, going rimward...” Gotu started. “And here is the next one, going in the opposite direction—coreward, eleven days’ travel time.”

Adrian looked at the data on the holo. “Send both drones through, full stealth mode. Let’s see if there is something interesting on the other side.”

“Alright. Do you want us to explore the system some more? There are a couple of planets; we might find something useful for the future.”

Adrian glanced at the bleak system. He doubted that they would find anything that would warrant making a bigger colony here. But his people should at least have something to do as they waited for the word from the drones. “Yes, let’s start the survey. I’ll spend the time in the training rooms. Let me know the moment the first drone gets through.”

***

Adrian tried to lock his arms around his opponent, but he was too big for that. Instead, he found himself thrown off his opponent’s back to the floor, and a moment later big jaws started to come down on his neck. He rolled to the side and got to his knees, turning towards his opponent as he raised his front paw and swiped at Adrian’s head, only to be met with Adrian’s arm blocking it. The strength behind the attack pushed Adrian into another roll, and he used his arms to raise himself over his head and to his feet.

As he got his footing back, 700 kilograms of muscle crashed into him, with Adrian shifting his weight forward and grabbing the wolion. His legs slid across the floor a good meter and a half before he stopped. With a groan, Adrian twisted his upper body and dropped Akash to the ground, landing on top of him. Akash tried to bite his helmet, but Adrian jammed his forearm below the wolion’s throat, not letting him get close enough. He kept his weight on Akash, keeping him pinned; it was something that he never could have done before his body had been augmented. Akash struggled, trying to get a paw between them and trying to roll enough to get leverage on the ground.

Then Adrian’s hand slipped, and Akash turned enough to get his balance back and threw Adrian off again. Adrian stumbled a few steps back, and Akash followed by running at him, this time going low, with his head towards Adrian’s legs. He got a grip on Adrian’s leg with his jaws and pulled him to the floor. He then put his entire weight on him, pinning him to the ground in a similar manner that Adrian had done to him a moment ago.

With no way to get the giant wolion off, Adrian relaxed and conceded the win.

“Fine, you win,” Adrian said out loud over his Sentinel suit’s speakers.

Akash kept his weight on Adrian for a few more beats, making a point. Then he stood and sent Adrian a flash of his emotions—amusement, pride, and contentment.

“Yes, yes. But if I’d used my psionics, you would have had a lot more difficulties,” Adrian said.

Akash sent him another burst of emotions that Adrian took as him expressing doubt at that. The wolions—at least Akash and Sora—understood Adrian and spoken language perfectly. But their own language relied on their empathy, on being able to project and manipulate emotion. That made it much harder for Adrian to understand them. His telepathy could project emotions, but it was not the same.

“Fine, I’ll admit, you are a formidable opponent,” Adrian said as he reached Akash’s side and petted him on the head. His attention made Akash release a growl of contentment, and then he walked over to Sora, who was watching from the back of the room.

Adrian turned to one of the crates with equipment. With his telekinesis, he took out six rubber balls and sent them flying towards him. As each reached him, he put his hand out and fired a kinetic blast, sending it back as he released his telekinetic hold on it. Then when the ball reached close to the end of the room, he would grab it again and send it back towards himself. After a couple of minutes of that, he started moving around the room and sending the balls in all directions around himself. Pull then push, and repeat. Then, after a couple of minutes of that, he sent all the balls flying at his position at the same time. As the balls were flying, he bent and pulled his hands close. Using another one of his psionics, he built up an energy field around himself. As the balls closed the distance, he released the energy, letting loose a shockwave in every direction around him that sent the balls flying back.

He dropped to the floor, exhausted. That psionic was one of the more demanding, as far as the energy required was concerned. Up until now, he had mastered telekinesis, telepathy, kinetikinesis, and vitakinesis. Out of the other psionics that he possessed—and there were many—he knew how to use a great number, but he still hadn’t figured out how to use them efficiently. He had also realized that naming the psionics was foolish. Too many of them were interconnected, and relied on each other, that there was no distinction. So he had started to wonder if he should just start to refer to all of his abilities as the Sha, much like the People had.

There were a few abilities that were elusive, and he couldn’t figure them out, but hopefully after children and other people received psionics, they would stumble upon them. And Clara and Meifeng were perfectly capable of figuring things out on the go. But for now, Adrian focused on the ones that he was good at. The rest would come with time.

Drained of all energy, Adrian got to his feet and started towards the mess hall for some food. His metabolism had increased at least ten times since his changes, and food was instrumental in regaining energy. He exited the training room, all the way thinking about how to improve his skills with the psionics.

***

Later that night, Adrian entered his quarters on the Veritas, exhausted. He walked across to his room, leaving the wolions in the living area, where they usually slept. He entered his room and sat down at his table, opening reports that he hadn’t read through yet. Before he started reading them, his attention was drawn to the picture at his nightstand. It was the only one he had of Bethany; it was a group picture with all of their team from the Academy. It had taken him a long time to put her death behind him. He didn’t forget; he would never do that to her memory. But it hurt less now.

He was never really bothered by guilt; she hadn’t blamed him, and he knew that he would have made the same decision again. It had made him understand who he was as a person, and he had grown to accept that. He knew that emotions would never compromise him doing what he believed was right. But that did not mean that it didn’t hurt him. It was the pain of losing someone he loved that he had a problem dealing with. She was the first person that he had opened up to. The first person that he had felt he could reveal all that he was.

But now, with years of reflection, he knew that it wouldn’t have worked out between them. She had been in love with a person that was only a small part of what Adrian was. That did not diminish his love for her, though. At the time, it had been real. But he kept the picture there as a reminder that there probably would never be anyone who could understand who he truly was. Someone who could be with him even when they knew that he would sacrifice them in order to defeat his enemies.

He forced himself to look away and focus on the reports. It was going to be a long night.

Chapter Twenty-Seven

Three days later, Adrian stepped into the control room again, as the drone they’d sent through the first trans-lane had reached its destination.

“What do we have, Gotu?” Adrian asked as he was approaching.

“The drone is some thirty-six light years away. We should be getting its sensor readings back any moment now,” Gotu answered.

Together, they watched the holo and waited. Then the information started pouring in. Both of them read it as it was arriving, and at about the same time turned to one look at one another.

“Well, that is interesting,” Adrian said.

“Very much so,” Gotu said as they watched images and readings from the system depicting a small station orbiting a small, rocky planet.

“Can you analyze it, Iris?” Adrian asked, and a human-sized hologram of Iris appeared in front of them. While on Veritas, she was connected with the onboard system and could use any projector on the ship.

“The tech does not appear Ra’a’zani in nature. Energy readings are different,” Iris said as she manipulated the holo. “Hmm...We have a match for the architecture and a partial on the energy readings.”

“Really?” Adrian asked, surprised.

“Yes, from the Union ship’s databases. The Union encountered this race in their explorations. They had limited contact, as their territory was too far away for any kind of relationship between the Union and this race, but we have a translation of their language,” she said. “There is very little else, only a mention that they were technologically inferior to the Union, but that was a couple thousand of years ago. And that they appeared peaceful. The race’s name is Sorvani, and that is all that we know.”

Gotu looked thoughtfully at the holo. “Hm...They don’t appear to have any defenses in system except that station. That could suggest that they don’t really have anything to fear in this area of space. Which, if it is true, means that we are on a wrong path. I’m sure that if the Ra’a’zani were anywhere close to here, they wouldn’t be so careless,” Gotu said. “Do we know how what they look like?”

“No. The Union exploration ship encountered a single Sorvani ship at the outer edge of their explored space. They only exchanged the basics, no visual contact. That was...on the other side of the galactic core. The Union territory was—or still is—in the Perseus arm. They encountered the Sorvani at the inner edge of the Sagittarius arm, only on their side of the galactic core. About thirty thousand light years from here,” Iris answered.

Gotu looked thoughtful. “That could mean that they are a race that holds a big chunk of territory. Or, and I think that this is more likely, the Sorvani ship was also an explorer.”

Adrian scratched his head. “Whatever may be true, they are, as far as we know, our closest neighbors in this area of space. I think that we should go and introduce ourselves. Who knows, we might even get some information about this area of space that can narrow our search.”

“As you wish, Lord Sentinel. We can depart immediately,” Gotu said.

“Yes, but leave a relay probe here so that we can receive data from the other drone once it passes through its trans-lane.”

***

About a day later, Veritas exited the trans-lane and dropped into the Sorvani system. Adrian, Gotu, and Björn Borg—another master from Warpath, with the focus on cultural interactions—watched as their prerecorded greeting message was sent to the Sorvani station. The first thing they used was the normal space FTL comms, and the Sorvani acknowledged and responded in the same way.

“Well, they have some advanced tech,” Björn said.

In front of Adrian, the holo screen turned on and he could see a bright red alien. It was a biped with fur. It wore a harness of some sort and nothing else, and had two arms, only at the elbow they split into two, which technically made it have four arms, with three fingers on each. Its face was flat, with no pronounced snout or a nose, three eyes arranged one above the other, and only a slit where a human nose would have been. Adrian wasn’t sure that it was a nose, though, and he was proven right when the orifice opened and the being started speaking through it in a whispering voice.

Adrian already had their language loaded into his implant, so as the being spoke, he heard the translation in his head.

“Greetings. Your first message said that you have not met my people before, and yet it came in our language—an old dialect, but still understandable,” the Sorvani said.

“That is right,” Adrian said. “We haven’t met with your people before, but we have had contact with someone who has. Although that was a long time ago. We are exploring our neighborhood in search of a race called the Ra’a’zani, who should be inhabiting this area of space. We would appreciate any help in that regard, and of course, if you wish, we may open relations between our peoples.”

“I have not heard of this race that you speak of, but then again, I am not interested in those things much. My team and I are scientists conducting experiments on this world; we have little contact with the rest of the Erasi, save for supply ships that arrive once every few years.” While tilting its head from side to side, the Sorvani added, “If you wish to open relationship with the Erasi, you will need to go to one of the larger worlds where such things are done. You might even find the information you seek; there are information brokers on these worlds.”

“The Erasi?” Adrian repeated the unfamiliar word. “I thought that your race was called Sorvani?”

“It is. Your translation software must not be perfect, or you don’t have a word for that. The Erasi is a trading group, several races living together; we still govern ourselves, but trade is free and our territories open to companies from all,” the Sorvani explained.

“Ahh...I understand. You said that these information brokers might help us in finding more about this area of space?”

“Yes. My team is away from the Erasi territory, but the information brokers know things beyond Erasi.”

“Would you be able to provide us with the coordinates of one such world we can visit? One that is closest?”

The Sorvani turned slightly and reached with its arms to a console to the side. “The closest hub world that would have up-to-date information is Tarabat. It is close enough, but how long your trip would be depends on your technology. I am sending you the coordinates now,” the Sorvani said.

Adrian gestured to Gotu as they received the information. “Thank you. I must say that I am surprised that you gave us this information so freely.”

“Sorvani and the Erasi survive on trade with each other and races outside of our territory. Your ship looks impressive, but you would be foolish to try anything against Tarabat; the Erasi have not survived for so long without being able to protect their interests. And the Erasi always looks for new races, as such things bring more opportunities,” the Sorvani said.

“Well we don’t have any ulterior motives aside from establishing a good relationship with our neighbors and finding information about the Ra’a’zani,” Adrian said. “Also, do you know if there are any dangers in this area, races that we should be careful around?”

“As I said, my team and I are scientists; we don’t really follow the news all that much. But before we arrived here, we did conduct an investigation of the area around this system, and they found nothing. Pirates might be a problem, but we have nothing of value; our research is of no concern to them. And most of the races that deal with the Erasi know better than to attack our interests.”

“Thank you again for your openness and help,” Adrian said, and the Sorvani started blinking its eyes in a rapid sequence that Adrian took as an elaborate goodbye. Then it closed the channel.

“Where is that system?” Adrian asked.

“About one hundred and ten light years from here,” Iris said as she reappeared.

“That close?” Adrian said. “Does that mean that their territory now stretches from the Sagittarius arm all the way into Orion, or were they always here?”

“No way of knowing without going there and learning for ourselves,” she responded.

“We don’t have a trans-lane route, and I don’t want to spend time trying to find it. Using hyperspace, we could get there in about month and a half,” Adrian mused. “Alright, we are obviously not going to find the Ra’a’zani on our own like this. We are already in the wrong area. We might find something to point us in the right direction there.” He nodded, making a decision. “Let’s skim to the hyperspace barrier and get underway.”

Chapter Twenty-Eight

April; Year 54 of the Empire – Former Ra’a’zani system

Anessa, Dai Sha of the First Legion, sat in her meeting chamber on board her warship the Bloodbringer, frustrated, and listened to the report of her subordinate. And she was not content; the news was the same as it had been the last time. They had yet to find the Ra’a’zani, which meant that she was still no closer to finding Humans and continuing her true mission. Her ships had been scouring the space around the Ra’a’zani systems that they had already taken, but she had a limited number of ships that she could send to look, and the volume of space that they had to search through was large, with no lanes explored.

The Ra’a’zani had spread their territory instead of choosing to keep it dense, which meant that the distance between one of their worlds and another could be as far as a hundred light years. And since they did not use trans-travel, the locations of their worlds could be anywhere. And the Ra’a’zani had been thorough in denying the Shara Daim any information about the locations of their other clans. Each clan she had destroyed she had found on her own. And now the last three of their clans had proven that much harder to find.

They hadn’t even found their homeworld yet. And the more time that passed, the more they rebuilt. Contrary to what the results of her war on the Ra’a’zani looked like, the Ra’a’zani technology was not that far behind that of the Shara Daim, at least regarding their weapons and ships. Their void transport technology lacked in every area. The reason why she was winning was because the Shara Daim were better at war, and because they had much better void transport technology; she could outmaneuver them easily, even though the Ra’a’zani had had more ships than her Legion ever since the beginning of the war. Spilling blood was her calling as Dai Sha, her Legion bred for a single purpose: to conquer.

“Dai Sha,” said one of her subordinates, of the rank of Do Sun, bringing her attention back to the Va Sun that had finished her report.

“You have done well, Va Sun,” Anessa said, and then with a gesture dismissed her, leaving her alone in the room with Arisak Do Sun.

“I think that it is time we consider other avenues, Dai Sha,” Arisak said.

“What do you suggest?” Anessa asked.

“The Ra’a’zani have obviously hidden well; they know that they need time in order to match us, so they are lying low. We need more ships if we are to search so big of an area effectively.” He paused, then hesitantly added, “Perhaps we might consider calling on another Legion?”

Anessa turned to look at him slowly, making him wither under her icy gaze. “The Ra’a’zani killed people in my sector, the blood protected by my Legion. You would have me lose even more face by calling another Legion?”

“Of course not, Dai Sha,” he answered quickly, not meeting her eyes. “But there is nothing else that we can do.”

Anessa turned away, thinking. She needed to find the Ra’a’zani. Or rather, she needed to find Ra’a’zani that had Human slaves. The Human homeworld was under the rule of the Ra’a’zani; she had the data on it, but no location. The Ra’a’zani were her only clue. Using the Sha, she keyed the telepathic interface on her table and brought up the map showing this sector of space.

The middle of the spur of their galactic arm in this area of space belonged to the Shara Daim. The first Ra’a’zani worlds they’d found were further towards the spur’s inner edge—coreward. She had been focusing her search there, along the edge of the spur. She glanced at the map and the icons there; the outer rimward edge of the spur was where the Erasi had a presence. Their territory was large and stretched from the closest galactic arm to this spur of the arm where the Shara Daim were. Their territory was bigger than that of the Shara Daim, but not by much. The Shara Daim held the remainder of the spur, back to the point where their galactic arm split.

The Shara Daim didn’t care about other races as long as they didn’t get in their way. The Erasi, on the other hand, were far too big and powerful to be ignored. So the Shara Daim had a cordial if somewhat tense relationship with them that included trade, but that would not be forever. The Shara Daim were the heirs to the Galaxy. Competition was not tolerated. She glanced at the closest hub world of the Erasi, their center of trade in this sector, and an idea struck her.

“We are going to the Erasi,” Anessa said.

“Why go to them?” Arisak asked, taken aback.

“Because they might give us a lead as to where the remaining Ra’a’zani worlds are,” Anessa answered.

“But Dai Sha,” he said slowly, respectfully, “didn’t we encounter the Ra’a’zani first? Didn’t the Erasi learn about them from us?”

Anessa snorted. “That is what they made us believe when we told them about the Ra’a’zani. But the Erasi are schemers and hoarders. Even if they learned about them from us, they would have sent their exploration fleets to find, learn, and record everything about the Ra’a’zani. Information is a resource, and the Erasi rule through trade of everything that can be bought or sold. But the more likely thing is that they knew about the Ra’a’zani all along.” She gazed at the holographic map in front of her. “They probably found them before the Ra’a’zani even left their homeworld. The Erasi have thrived for a long time.”

“Why wouldn’t they say anything, then?” Arisak asked.

“There was no profit in it for them,” Anessa answered.

“Where are we going? Their information brokers are only on their major worlds, and those are not close.”

Anessa pointed at the star system on the map. “Their hub for this sector, Tarabat,” she said resolutely.

“We can’t take the entire Legion; the Erasi would see it as an act of war. Ever since the incident, and under our new agreement, we can have only three military vessels in their major systems at a time. We can send word back home, have them send a few civilian ships,” Arisak suggested.

“We are not going to wait, we are going there on the Bloodbringer. The rest of the Legion can keep looking,” Anessa said.

“There is no need for you to go, Dai Sha; we can send another smaller and faster ship.”

“No. The Elders gave me a task, and in order to complete it, I need to find the Ra’a’zani. It is my duty to see it through. It is my blood call,” Anessa said calmly.

“As you wish, Dai Sha,” Arisak said. “Will we have enough to trade with? This is not a merchant vessel; we have very little in the way of things that they would want.”

“I have a bit of wealth set aside. And I want us to set up supply convoys from the Erasi for the Legion. Our own supply lines are too slow, and once we know where the Ra’a’zani are, I intend on ending them swiftly.”

“Very well, Dai Sha. I’ll instruct the crew and have them chart a course,” Arisak said, and left the chamber.

Anessa turned her attention to the map again. Tarabat was three hundred and sixty light years away from her Legion’s position, but her people had a route already explored close by. It wouldn’t take them long to get there.

Chapter Twenty-Nine

May; Year 54 of the Empire – Veritas; hyperspace on route to Tarabat

Aileen stood in the practice room with Adrian.

“Are we not going to start the practice?” Aileen asked.

“No, today I want to show you something,” Adrian said seriously. Both of them were dressed in their Sentinel suits, and were standing in front of the pillars that Aileen often used for balance and telekinesis training.

“Show me what?” Aileen asked curiously.

“A new psionic,” he said.

“One that you haven’t shown me already?” Aileen asked excitedly. There were many psionics in the People’s database, but so far they had managed to use only a few, and those that were connected to those few.

“Yes. I haven’t mastered it yet—in fact, I’m not even close. But I need another mind, as I have hit a wall. I can use it, but not to the full extent of what was described in the sphere. And I think that I am doing something wrong. That is why I need you to see and think about it. I don’t want you to try it; it is too dangerous, and you don’t know how to use all the other psionics required to pull this one off.”

“So what is it?”

“Just watch. I’ll explain later.”

Adrian raised his left arm and pointed it at the pillar. She knew by his concentration that he was doing something. Then, a few seconds later, she started seeing red steam coming through his glove and stopping in front of his palm as if it was being held there by something. The red steam was strange, too; it wiped around in circles, and then Aileen felt heat coming off from it. Then the steam changed and turned into a red ball.

A moment later, it fired off from his hand and into the pillar, hitting it in the center and burning a good halfway through. Aileen just stared, amazed, at the hole in the pillar. She turned back to gaze at Adrian, just as he dropped down to his knee. She rushed over and grabbed him.

“Are you alright?” she asked.

“Yes,” he said slowly, and then got up with Aileen’s help. She guided him to the bench at the side of the room. Once seated, he retracted his helmet, and Aileen did the same. He turned to look at her with a pale face and a weak smile on his lips.

“Do you know what that was?” he asked.

Aileen looked back at the pillar and then at Adrian. “Plasma?”

Adrian gave her a smile. “Yes. Now how do you think I did that?”

“I don’t know, you somehow converted energy from the organ –  Nursha – into gas...But I don’t know how.”

Adrian shook his head. “No, think about what you saw.”

Aileen started playing the entire thing back in her head. Then something struck her. “The steam. It was gas that you turned into plasma. But it was red. Why red?”

“Why red indeed,” Adrian said.

Aileen thought about it a bit more, and then she frowned. “Blood?”

Adrian nodded grimly. “Blood. I vaporized a part of my blood and pushed it through the emitters and skin on my palm. I held the gas with energy in my palm, and I expended a big chunk of my energy in a burst move in order to flash heat it. Then I fired a kinetic blast at it while I kept it contained with telekinesis.”

Concerned, Aileen started looking him over. “Are you really alright? You are pale. How much did you use?”

“Not much,” Adrian said, his voice a bit stronger. “It is just the shock to the system, and I am already using my healing to recover. Soon I will be fine, although I will have drained almost all my energy,” he said jokingly.

“So what is the problem with the psionic? It seems to work perfectly. And what is its name?” Aileen asked.

“It doesn’t have a name, really. To the People it was simply one ability of the Sha. I think that we made a mistake in insisting on calling these abilities by our names for them. Half of them we haven’t even conceived of. I think that we should just start calling all abilities the Sha; most of them are intertwined anyway. I had to use three different abilities in order to do this,” Adrian said.

“Yes, I agree. It never clicked well with me, giving names to every ability.”

Adrian turned his palms sideways and back. “I should send a message to Clara and Meifeng; they will be the ones teaching others,” he said thoughtfully. “Now, back to the matter at hand. The problem is that according to the sphere, the People could fire off a lot more of these in succession, and I can’t figure out how they did that. At first I thought that they could recover their blood at an incredible rate, but that is impossible. They must’ve found a way to convert something else into gas or plasma, or I might be missing something. Maybe I need some more abilities that I haven’t discovered yet.”

“Hm...” Aileen considered everything that she knew about making plasma. “Why don’t you try using air around you?”

Adrian shook his head. “I can’t grab hold of it. Somehow I can contain my own blood in gaseous form, but air? No way. I need it compressed, and I can’t pull or push on it. And even if I could, it would take me more energy to turn it into plasma. I can heat my own blood much easier than I can the air around me.”

“I don’t know,” Aileen said, now intrigued. “Isn’t there anything else in the data from the sphere?”

“No. They talk about what the abilities are and how they can be used once you already have them, not about how to make them,” Adrian said, frustrated.

“What were they using it for? And where did they get it?” Aileen asked. The People were known to have copied the abilities of other races.

“From a race of beings that evolved it as a defense mechanism against much larger predators. They weren’t intelligent, and I got the idea to use my blood from them, as that was what they did. But our ancestors obviously added things so that that wasn’t necessary. Otherwise I have no idea how they could do it like what I saw in the sphere. It obviously still worked, but they must’ve added a system where they didn’t need to use their blood. I just can’t figure out what it is,” Adrian said.

“Well, nothing is coming to me right now, but I promise to think about it. I can’t wait to be able to do that,” she said as her eyes wandered back to the pillar.

“But not for a while yet,” Adrian said as he stood up. “Come, I have a bit more energy left. Let’s see if you can land a punch when I have a handicap.”

***

Aileen twisted in mid-air and swiped with her leg towards Adrian’s head. He moved a step back, letting her foot pass in front of his head, and then he stepped close as she landed. The moment her leg touched the ground, she turned, throwing a wide punch. Adrian moved to the side and threw a kinetic blast at her shoulder, deflecting her punch. Then he reached for her other hand, turned, and threw her over his head and to the ground.

She landed hard, but the armor took the brunt of it; she barely felt it. She threw a kinetic blast from the floor directly into Adrian’s head, which made him stagger back. Her Sha was nowhere near strong enough to do the things he was able to, though, so instead of him flying away as she would’ve, he took a single step back. Aileen rose to her feet in an instant and started attacking him with quick, short jabs, all of which he blocked. Then she saw him try to goad her into a trap, and remembering his training, she plunged into the trap, allowing him to counterattack.

She took a punch to the chest, but as his fist connected, she made it stick there by expending the rest of her energy supplies. Then she threw a counterattack over his now defenseless side. Her punch flew and connected with his head.

For a moment, both of them stood there frozen, and then he stepped back. His helmet retracted, and she saw him looking at her with pride. And that made her feel wonderful. She retracted her own helmet and grinned at him.

“That was very good, Aileen. So you did listen to me,” Adrian said warmly.

“I did, and thank you.”

“It won’t happen again, naturally. But good job,” he said jokingly.

Aileen narrowed her eyes and went to attack, but he moved away.

“You want to fight some more?” he asked.

“I managed to hit you, but it still means nothing...” Aileen said sadly.

Adrian tilted his head. “What do you mean?”

“I am nowhere near as strong as you are. That punch wouldn’t have even slowed you down,” she explained.

Adrian studied her. “That is not true.”

Aileen gave him a doubtful look. “Of course it is true, you must have noticed.”

“You only think that you are weaker. And that comes from the simple fact that you are holding yourself back. You don’t know how to use your body, how to coordinate your muscles and movements in order to get the best results,” he said, and then sighed. “I think that I have neglected teaching you some of those things. I’m going to need to find a way to teach you how to control your own body, how to be consciously aware of everything your body does. But the biggest reason why you are weaker is because you think that you have limits, and that is what is holding you back. Limits are an illusion; the human body is capable of so much more. You need to let go of your preconceptions and allow yourself to push past that boundary.”

Aileen’s face turned skeptical. “I would love to learn all that, but I doubt that I will ever reach the level you’re at.”

“You will, in time. Now get ready, we are not yet finished.” He gave her barely a second before he threw himself at her.

Chapter Thirty

May – Sanctuary

“The Trivaxians have been progressing well,” Tomas heard Nadia say, and he abandoned his place at the window, turned, and walked back to his desk.

“How are their colonies doing?” he asked. The Trivaxians had expanded their territory greatly in a short amount of time. Which wasn’t surprising, really; they had the population, and with the help from the Empire, they had the technology.

“Well, they have been setting up mining operations in systems rimward from Trivax, and are already in talks with Clan Dai Ven for trading agreements. As well as with Warpath in order to provide a steady workforce in the Sol sector. And they have taken a three life-bearing planets for themselves. They have a small number of people there, and soon they will start expanding and sending more people,” Nadia answered.

“Good.” Tomas knew that adding the Trivaxians into the Empire would boost their colonization efforts and give them an enormous workforce. There were far more Trivaxians than there were humans or Nel—at least the Nel that were a part of the Empire.

“And the people they sent to the Fleet and Army Academies are adjusting well, as is the faculty. In a couple of years, we will have Trivaxians fighting alongside our current troops,” Nadia added.

“How are things going in their home system?”

“The fabricators we provided them have sped up their plans substantially. In a year or two, they will have facilities to match Sanctuary, only with a greater workforce,” Nadia answered.

“And I am afraid that we will need all that workforce. I’ve received a message from Adrian,” Tomas said seriously. “He has encountered another race relatively close to Sol. They appear to be a part of a larger group, and they also have advanced tech. At least on the same level that we have now with what we got from the sphere.”

“Hostile?” Nadia asked.

“No. But we still haven’t found the Ra’a’zani. And the galaxy is filled with intelligent races; not all of them will be peaceful. We need to be able to defend our people.” He paused, then turned to look Nadia. “I want to increase our colonization programs, provide incentives to the Clans to expand aggressively in all directions.”

“I doubt that you won’t be able to convince them,” Nadia said with a smirk. “They will jump at an opportunity, especially if you give them incentives.”

“I also want to bring the Guxcacul and Nel into the Empire, as fast as possible,” Tomas said.

“I thought that you wanted to wait until they asked.”

“I did,” Tomas said hesitantly, “but us meeting this new race that has existed in space for thousands of years before we even realized what stars were…it makes me nervous. We need to be strong. The only reason why we are strong is because of the technology we’ve gained from the sphere. And if I go to the Guxcacul and Nel and convince them to join us on our terms, we get more people and boost every area of our advancement.”

“It is your decision, Tomas,” Nadia said solemnly.

***

Seo-yun entered the room where Axull Darr’s sphere was held. Only a fraction of the data had been copied and transferred to other systems. There was too much for them to transfer it all, and more than 99 percent they couldn’t even understand. There was billions of years’ worth of data.

“Hello, Axull Darr,” Seo-yun greeted the copy of Axull Darr’s mind, the hologram floating above the sphere.

“Greetings, Seo-yun,” he responded.

“I came down here to show you something,” she said, and sent a file from her imp to the holo in the room. A report came to life in front of her and Axull Darr. “What do you think?” she asked.

“It looks good. The meld of human or Nel DNA and the Sha upgrades is going well. It will add a few days to the incubation times, but the children will be healthy, and they will have all the enhancements I intended for you, along with what you gained through your own evolution,” Axull Darr said.

“That’s good to hear. We were pretty sure that everything was good, but I wanted to check,” Seo-yun said. The first group of embryos in the vats in the progeny center had been given the treatment to unlock psionics, and the body upgrades that allowed for their safe use. They wouldn’t need to go through augmentation in order to use their abilities.

“You should still monitor the process closely. Even at the height of the People’s power, these things were delicate,” Axull Darr said.

“Of course,” Seo-yun said. She hesitated. “There was one more thing I wanted to ask.”

“Ask.”

“The People had been adding psionics to their own genome from other beings, yes?”

“That is correct.”

“I couldn’t find any information on that topic in the data from the sphere available to us,” Seo-yun said.

Axull Darr didn’t respond immediately; it seemed like he was thinking. But Seo-yun knew that he didn’t really need the time. “The data concerning alteration of lifeforms has been restricted,” Axull Darr said.

“Restricted why? Weren’t we supposed to gain all the knowledge that the People possessed?”

Again, he paused. “There are things that you are not yet ready for. Things that not even we were ready for.”

“You are referring to whatever it was that the last of your people created? The thing that made the original Axull Darr make us?”

“Yes.”

“But that occurred millions of years ago. Whatever they made is probably long dead. And we have you. You can warn us, keep us from making the same mistakes,” Seo-yun said.

“You are wrong. You don’t understand. And you are not yet ready to understand. The thing that they created is still alive; I have seen proof of it. The threat is still out there.”

“And what is that threat? Why won’t you tell us?” she asked.

“Because you are not ready, and you can do nothing as you are now. In time, when you have grown, I will tell you. But now you need to focus on other things,” Axull Darr said, and Seo-yun could see that she wouldn’t be able to get anything from the ancient intelligence before he was ready to say it.

“Fine.” She sighed in defeat. “Let’s talk about...”

Chapter Thirty-One

June; Year 54 of the Empire – Veritas

Adrian stood in the control room with Gotu and Björn as their ship exited hyperspace and entered the Erasi system. They followed the regulations they’d received from the Sorvani, and had all their weapons powered down, although Adrian had their shields and field emitters primed just in case. The Veritas’s active scanners activated, and the holo in front of them updated.

“Well, this is something new,” Björn said.

And Adrian agreed. The entire system was full of traffic, with ships moving from hyperspace barriers and trans-stations towards and from the second planet in the system. The planet had its entire surface covered with buildings—large, city-sized domes, space elevators stretching from the surface to the stations in the orbit, and the stations themselves that filled the high orbit of the planet. But what really got their attention was the differences between the ships. Iris had identified more than two dozen types of ships that likely belonged to different species.

“How do you think we should proceed?” Adrian asked the two.

“We should follow the guidelines that the Sorvani gave us,” Björn said. “Announce our presence and then follow their instructions. Something tells me that this isn’t the first time they’ve had unfamiliar visitors.”

Adrian nodded, agreeing. “Start with the communications. Establish us as new to the neighborhood, seeking to meet people interested in trade. Don’t mention the Ra’a’zani just yet.”

“I’ll get the Comms Handlers on it immediately,” Gotu said. “Do you want us to skim to the planet? There is a lot of traffic; we will need to find a clear course.”

Adrian thought about it, but then shook his head. “No, I think that we made an error when we showed that to the Sorvani. I don’t see any of the ships in system skimming. Let’s keep it to ourselves for now.”

“As you wish,” Gotu said.

***

Seventeen hours later

Adrian and Aileen entered the briefing room on the Veritas control deck. Already there were Gotu and Björn. Adrian took the seat at the head of the table, with Aileen to his right and Gotu and Björn on his left.

“So, what have we learned?” Adrian asked.

Gotu stood up and took control of the holo, zooming in on the planet. “Tarabat is what the Erasi call this hub world. Trade with those outside of the Erasi is conducted on such worlds. Anyone can own properties on hub worlds; if we wanted to, we could buy a building here and use it however we wished.”

Björn stood and continued for Gotu, “But, the laws on Erasi hub worlds are...very loose. From what I have read of them, pretty much anything is legal, from slavery to drug trafficking to weapons trade. The reason for this is because there are so many races, cultures, and different ideologies that it would have been impossible to make laws that everyone would agree to follow.”

Gotu turned his palm, agreeing. “Yes. They use the hub worlds to trade and negotiate with other races. Their other worlds, those where only the member races of the Erasi are allowed in, are much different.”

“So what does this mean for us?” Adrian asked.

“Basically, we can do whatever we want once we are on their stations or on the planet. We are, however, forbidden form firing our ship’s weapons within the system. They have a flotilla that is there to punish any who break that rule. Although there are circumstances in which that is permitted, for example if we are attacked first, or if some outside force attacks the system. The flotilla is relatively small, twenty ships only. But no outside force would dare attack an Erasi system, especially a hub. One reason is that the Erasi have massive fleets in their core systems, and the other is that if anyone from the outside tries to attack a hub world, the other races that have business with the Erasi would turn against them in order to protect their interests. And there are thousands of warships here, protecting convoys that are doing trade with Erasi.”

“If we can do whatever we want, I assume that they can do so as well?” Aileen asked.

“Yes, Sentinel. There are guard forces, but they are in the employ of the trade guilds, and don’t really care about anything unless it concerns a breach in the validated contract. The Erasi are a conglomerate of many races, held together by thousands of corporations. These corporations establish offices on hub worlds and then make deals there. A deal made with a corporation or a private business on a hub world is binding. If you break it, the Erasi step in and enforce it. The corporations are so large that they deal with multiple races at the same time,” Björn answered.

“Hm...So the only kind of relations we can establish with the Erasi is trade?” Adrian asked.

“Yes, and they are very large, Lord Sentinel. If what we have read on their net is true—and I see no reason why it shouldn’t be—their territory stretches from our galactic arm to the next. They don’t concern themselves much with races that are not on their level. And they don’t know much about us, except that we just came onto the scene. In time, if they deem us worthy, or a big enough of a threat, the Erasi ruling council will reach out. Until then, we are able to trade freely with their corporations or other races that have representatives on their hub worlds,” Björn said.

“Did you find any mention of the Ra’a’zani on their net?” Adrian turned to Gotu.

“No, but there is just too much data, too many races. And their records for our area of space seem empty, at least their public ones. They do have information brokers on the planet, and as far as I can tell, those will be our best bet to learn anything,” Gotu said.

“Much as the Sorvani said, then. Have we figured out how we will be able to pay them?” Adrian asked.

“We have some materials on board, for use in our fabricators,” Björn started. “I have taken the liberty of setting up talks with a few small businesses that are a part of a local guild to which we can sell them. That will give us enough funds for us to be able to hire guides and to do a bit of trading. Maybe set up trading contracts for Warpath, or even the Empire.”

“How do you think that we should go about this?” Adrian asked.

“First things first, we need to get a shuttle to this station,” Gotu said as he changed the holo to show the station. “It is the base for the Erasi. As a new species in their area, we need to check in. They will enter us into their database with the most basic information—what we look like and our language. We will also receive a sample of five personal translation devices, to use and study in order to produce more.”

“Translation devices?” Aileen asked.

“Apparently they have a superior piece of translating tech. It is customizable for any intelligent race, and you wear it somewhere where it is close to your brain. Every being on hub worlds wears one. It makes it so you hear anyone speaking in your language, immediately, not like how our implants do it where we hear an echo. And everyone else hears their own when we speak,” Gotu said.

“That will be useful,” Adrian commented.

“Yes. After that, we park Veritas into orbit around Tarabat and go down to the planet,” Gotu said.

“Well, then, that sounds like a plan,” Adrian said. “Let’s get on it.”

Chapter Thirty-Two

Tarabat system

Gotu and Björn watched from the shuttle as Veritas slowly reached the massive station in orbit of Tarabat. On their way here, the two of them had studied the system and the ships in it closely, evaluating threats and trying to discern their capabilities. The Veritas was the largest warship in the system; there were larger ships, but those were obviously cargo haulers. The other warships that were part of cargo convoys were smaller, none larger than 1000 meters, and ships close to that size were few. Most of them fell within 300 to 600 meters in length, in all shapes and forms.

The Erasi flotilla, on the other hand, was a different story. They had twenty ships, and all were saucer-shaped. Ten were around 800 meters in diameter, another eight about 1500, and the last two were 2200 meters in diameter. Smaller than Veritas, but those ships were clearly of a much different make than the others in the system. They had no visible drives, which would indicate that they only used gravity drives, which didn’t need an exhaust. That could make them more maneuverable, but probably not as fast as his ship, which used both types of drives at the same time. And according to the info they’d gotten from the net, those last two ships were of a class comparable to the Empire’s new battleships, and were not the Erasi’s largest ships.

When the Veritas got close enough, they received word from the station that they could come aboard, and Gotu and Björn, along with another three adepts in battle suits, left on board the shuttle towards the station. Adrian and Aileen stayed on the Veritas, as they weren’t sure if the Erasi would covertly take scans or samples, and they didn’t want to reveal their psionics and augmentation.

According to what Gotu had managed to find out, they wouldn’t be on board long. The shuttle approached and passed through a field that held the atmosphere inside; the Erasi station had the same air composition as what humans and Nel needed. And as it turned out, most of life had similar needs, which wasn’t such a mystery to the Empire, as they knew the reason. The People had been responsible for guiding and pushing forward life on many worlds, and they’d chosen life most similar to their own.

The shuttle landed and the five people inside slowly exited. Inside the clean-looking hangar, they were met with three aliens. One was a Sorvani; the other two were new to Gotu, but he had read up on them. One was a slim red-and-black-colored alien looking similar to snakes, which he’d seen on the old vids from Earth, only it had arms on its upper body, while its lower part slithered on the ground. They were another member of the Erasi and called themselves Ssarath. The other alien was a fur-covered biped with a large, hulking torso, but about as tall as Gotu himself. Also a member of the Erasi, they were called Bomtu. All the aliens had some kinds of clothes on, and they approached as Gotu and the rest of his people exited the shuttle.

The three adepts had their heads covered, while Gotu and Björn went forward with theirs still visible. As they approached, Bomtu—the hulking alien—offered them an open package with five devices on it. Gotu had already been told about how their meeting would go about, and had provided the Erasi with images of the Nel so that they could build the devices. One of the adepts stepped forward and took the package, then offered it to Gotu and Björn, who each took one and placed the small, round part on their temples. The devices were very small, about a size of a small coin, slim, and they stuck to their heads.

The leading alien, the Sorvani, spoke first. “Do you understand me?”

“Yes, I understand you,” Gotu said, impressed. He’d been under the impression that calibration of some kind would be necessary. He glanced to the Bomtu and noticed him looking at the device in his hands.

“That was unexpected,” the Sorvani said.

“What do you mean?” Gotu asked.

The Ssarath on the right slithered a bit closer. “The devices need calibration when they are used for new species, and yet they have adapted to your brainwaves immediately.” It angled its head and looked from Björn to Gotu. Then it glanced at Gotu’s tail.

“The two of you are not the same species?” it asked.

Gotu hesitated; he didn’t want to give away too much at their first meeting. “No, but we are both a part of the Empire.”

“You closely resemble each other. And you also look surprisingly similar to a race we are familiar with. Your brainwaves are almost exactly like theirs, only slightly off,” the hulking alien said. “But you are different. They are larger than you, their skin is of a different color, and their eyes are different.”

“Really?” Gotu said slowly, but already he could see Björn stiffen. “How much different are they?”

“Their skin is black across their entire bodies, even the eyes. And they have several pupils that move constantly,” the Sorvani said, and Gotu knew who they were. The third descendant race of Axull Darr. His eyes were the same, or rather, his secondary eyelids were. He didn’t have them closed now, as he didn’t need them, so his eyes looked similar to those of a human—a single pupil and iris.

“We are not aware of any other race that looks like us. We were very surprised when we encountered each other,” Björn interjected. “What is the name of this race?”

“They are called the Shara Daim,” the Sorvani answered.

“Are there any here? We would be very much interested in talking to them; our scientists have several theories about why humans and Nel look so much alike. They might provide more insight into the topic,” Gotu suggested.

“No, the Shara Daim do not do trade with the Erasi in this sector. They rarely interact with most races peacefully, and only tolerate others if they are strong,” the alien on the left said.

“We would be interested in anything you can share about them,” Björn persisted.

“There is some data on them on the net, but if you want to know more, you will need to purchase that information,” the Ssarath said.

“Of course,” Gotu said.

“Now, if you will follow me, we will take you to the information center, where we will make a record of your people,” the Sorvani said as it gestured towards the hallway leading deeper into the station.

***

Veritas

“Shara Daim?” Adrian asked.

“Yes, Lord Sentinel,” Björn answered.

“And how sure are you that they are the third race?” Adrian asked.

“Very,” Gotu answered. “We checked the net and got images. There is no doubt. They have the same features that the both the Nel and humans inherited from the People.”

“Do we know anything else about them?” Adrian asked.

“The public nets don’t have comprehensive data; we would need to go to an information broker for more in-depth data. But we know that their territory is some seven hundred light years from here, that they hold a large area of territory, almost the size of the Erasi, and that other races stay out of their way,” Björn answered.

“So we have finally found our last siblings,” Adrian commented.

“Should we try and make contact?” Aileen asked.

“Yes, but not yet. We need to let the Emperor know, and let him decide when and how to approach them. In the meantime, we have a different task: finding the Ra’a’zani,” Adrian said. “Any news on that front?”

“Sadly, no. There is no mention of them in the net. But the net holds information only about races that have dealings with the Erasi. Our best bet is to deal with the information brokers,” Björn said. “The only problem is getting to them. They don’t just allow anyone to come and seek information. You need to either pay an incredible amount, or have something to offer them in return.”

“Hm...I think that we need to learn a bit more about how things work here,” Adrian said, a plan forming in his mind. He turned to look at Gotu. “Do we know where we are most likely to get what we need?”

“There are several information-dealing brokers. Most contend with matters inside the Erasi and concerning their trading partners. The ones that would be able to help us are those large enough to have nets all over, and who look beyond the Erasi borders, which means we need to go to the largest information brokers. On Tarabat, that means Loksi Corporation; they are the largest in this system. But I doubt that the funds we’ll get from what we sell will be enough to get us inside.”

“Then we will need to improvise,” Adrian said. “For when did you schedule the meetings with the trading guilds?”

“We are scheduled to meet at their guild in about four hours,” Gotu said.

“Then that is our next move. We get funds, then we will start setting up connections. See if there is something we can offer them that will get us enough funds to get an audience with the brokers. If not, we will need to grab their attention in other ways,” Adrian said.

“As you say, Lord Sentinel. Björn and I will go down to the planet and set everything up,” Gotu said.

“Aileen and I will accompany you,” Adrian added.

“Uh...Lord Sentinel, I don’t think that would be wise,” Björn said slowly.

“I don’t need to be protected, Björn, and neither does Aileen. If anything, we will be protecting you. I want to see how things work down there with my own eyes. In the future, this will be the job that Sentinels will carry out. And we were given five translators, right? We have enough for the four of us and one for study,” Adrian said.

Gotu, knowing that there wasn’t anything he could say to change Adrian’s mind, agreed. “As you wish, Lord Sentinel.”

Chapter Thirty-Three

Tarabat

Aileen walked down the streets of an alien world. All around her walked strange creatures, and her senses of smell and sound were bombarded with unfamiliar things. They were several levels above ground level, on streets connecting the buildings. Above them flew small shuttles or transport vehicles. It was a strange sight.

She wore her Sentinel suit, though not in the battle mode; she only had the plate over her chest and the leg parts. The rest of her was covered with her skin-suit. Beside her walked Björn wearing his Warpath suit, and in front of her were Adrian in his own Sentinel suit, his two wolions, and Gotu.

They had landed on the planet in a dropship—Adrian didn’t want to use the shuttle, as it wasn’t as armored—and their landing place was close to where they needed to be. And after a few more minutes of walking, they arrived at their destination.

“This should be it,” Gotu said.

As they approached the tall building, an alien standing in front of it noticed them.

“Ah, you must be the newcomers. Come, we have been expecting you,” it said. It glanced at the wolions but didn’t comment, and then it led them inside.

They were shown into a big room and asked to take seats on strange but useful chairs that had no backs and stood on five legs. The chairs would grow or shrink, depending on the need, in order accomodate the size of the person sitting on it. As they took their seats, the doors on the other side of the room opened and three new aliens entered. One was a Ssarath, and the other two Sorvani.

“Welcome. I am Trader Reshe. I will be conducting business with you today,” the Ssarath said.

“It is a pleasure meeting you, I am called Adrian. I hope that we can do some business today,” Adrian said.

“Your people said that you wish to trade? Materials for credits, yes?” Reshe said.

“That is correct,” Adrian said.

“I assume that you have brought a list of things you have available?”

Adrian glanced at Gotu, and he took out a small datachip from his pocket. The Erasi had provided them with the software that allowed them to convert Empire means of data storage to that of the Erasi, which used the same system based on zeros and ones, only in a different “language”.

Reshe took the small datachip, studied it for a moment, then placed it in a round box-like device that one of the Sorvani had placed on the table. After about a moment, data from the chip was read and it appeared above the table, translated into their language as a hologram, in a similar manner as what the Empire used.

Reshe studied the list for a few long minutes before speaking. “These materials are very common in here. I am afraid that they will not get you anything more than a couple hundred credits, at least in these quantities.”

Aileen glanced at Adrian. One hundred Erasi credits was very little, not enough to even get them lodging on the planet. But they had already known that their materials wouldn’t get them anything more. The list was mostly of metals that the Veritas carried for fabricating repairs. But they had decided to start with something small and build up.

“My ship doesn’t carry big quantities of those materials,” Adrian said. “I am sure that you have had the chance to take a look at it; you should know that it is not a cargo ship,” he added pointedly.

“Yes, yes...” Reshe said. “It is an impressive vessel. One built for war, if I am correct.”

“It has weapons, if that is what you are asking about,” Adrian said deftly.

“Perhaps you can trade in some technologies?” Reshe suggested. “We are always looking for new and interesting things.”

Adrian paused and pretended to think. “We don’t generally trade our technologies to people we have only just met. I don’t have a good enough grasp of your own technology in order to offer you something, and I don’t feel comfortable with giving you the data on what we possess.”

“Understandable, of course,” Reshe said evenly. “Although, it is said that you encountered a research station before you came here. Sorvani, yes?”

“That is correct. I am surprised that you know of that,” Adrian said.

“Information is a resource to the Erasi,” Reshe said. “It is also rumored that you made an in-system jump, from within the hyperspace barrier to its edge.”

Adrian looked at the Ssarath but didn’t respond. Aileen could see him thinking. Ever since they’d arrived and started studying the Erasi net, they’d known that it was likely that the knowledge about that ability would spread to the rest of Erasi. The only thing they hadn’t been sure about was how long it would take. Them knowing about it meant that they had interstellar FTL comms, not just in-system.

Adrian had already known that them skimming in that system had been a mistake; they had been in a hurry to get here and they’d revealed more than they would have liked.

“That is an interesting rumor,” Adrian said evenly, neither denying nor confirming it.

“And we would be interested in attaining that technology,” Reshe said eagerly.

“I am sure you would,” Adrian said, and smiled, a gesture that was probably lost on the aliens. “But as I said, we don’t trade technology with people we don’t know well.”

Reshe started to speak, but Adrian continued before he could, “Although,” Adrian started, “there might be something else that you will find acceptable.”

Reshe tilted his head. “And what is that?”

“We have done a fair bit of research before we decided which guild to contact. We chose this one because you trade in large amounts of materials my people have abundance of, mainly metals and alloys,” Adrian said.

“That is true, but you sadly don’t have those amounts available now,” Reshe said.

“No, but I can offer you a onetime deal, right now, for exclusivity. Our Empire will trade these materials with your guild exclusively for the next fifty years. And yes, we have checked the numbers you are dealing in, and we can double them,” Adrian said. They had programmed Empire’s measuring units into the translators so that the Erasi heard the measures converted into their own.

Reshe remained silent, and Aileen knew that he was thinking about it. His guild was a relatively small one, dealing in materials that the more advanced races didn’t use, which meant that they needed large quantities in order to remain relevant. “That would be a good deal—if you could deliver on it.”

“The Erasi know how to use trans-space for travel, correct?” Adrian asked.

“We do.”

“If you are willing to explore the lanes to our Empire and back to here on your own expense, we will be able to get resources to you much faster than your current suppliers in the heart of the Erasi territory. With our in-system jump technology, we can move from one trans point to another far quicker. It would not take more than a couple of days for us to deliver goods here to you from our territory.”

The alien remained quiet, and Aileen couldn’t tell if he was intrigued or not, but after about a minute, he spoke again, “And in return for this deal, you would want credits now?”

“Yes. You pay us five thousand credits now, and we will sign a contract that gives you exclusivity in trading with the materials we showed you earlier with the entire Empire,” Adrian said. “I am a...ruler of a system in which we are mining these resources. I can guarantee to you that you will have them.”

“If we make an agreement, and you then don’t fulfill the bargain, Erasi fleets will get involved,” the alien threatened, which told Aileen that they had him. He was already worried about the Empire fulfilling the bargain, which meant that he was interested. From everything that they had learned of this guild, they knew that it needed this desperately if it was to survive and grow amongst its competition.

“We understand,” Adrian said.

***

“This is still not enough to get us to see a broker,” Gotu said once they left the guild.

“It is not, but it is enough to help us get established here. Get us lodging, and allow us to hire guides. Then we slowly start dropping hints that while we might be new, we have things to offer,” Adrian said.

“Why can’t we just go and offer the information to the brokers in return for what we want?” Aileen asked.

“It isn’t that simple,” Björn said. “They have a far greater network than we do. What could we offer them? We don’t know anything about this area, nor about what they want to know. We need to find out what they want, find out how much it is worth, and then intrigue them enough for them reach out and offer a trade.”

“And how will we do that?” Aileen asked.

“By letting it be known that we are looking for the Ra’a’zani,” Adrian answered. “We try to get the information out of the other traders, perhaps we even get lucky and someone will know something. But it will also put us on the radar of the information brokers. They will try to learn more about us. In doing that, they might get intrigued enough to reach out and offer us information about the Ra’a’zani in exchange for something about us. They will know that we don’t have credits to pay them, but their currency isn’t just credits and information. They might want to trade future favors from us in return for what they know.”

“And we know all this how?” Aileen asked.

“Their net is full of people that have had dealings with the information brokers before. Iris managed to piece together their practices,” Adrian said.

“And what do we do until they decide to reach out?” Aileen asked.

Adrian gestured around them. “We watch and learn more about our neighbors.”

Chapter Thirty-Four

July; Year 54 of the Empire – Sanctuary

Tomas read through the message from Adrian, then scrolled all the way to the beginning and read it again. After he was finished, he reached up with his hands and rubbed his palms over his eyes. They had found the third race that Axull Darr had engineered. Shara Daim, he thought. And apparently they held a territory that was at least 7000 light years in diameter, dwarfing the Empire, which had around 1000 at its two furthest points, and that was with them having colonized systems dispersed in order to take a large territory. There were gaping holes between the systems he controlled. Eventually, he wanted to make the Empire dense, with most systems populated, but for now he was in expansion mode, grabbing as much territory as he could until they ran into something that stopped them. Like the Shara Daim and the Erasi.

This development posed a problem. The Shara Daim did not seem like a very hospitable race, disregarding those that were not their race, but if they knew about the sphere, that attitude might change towards humans and Nel. Or would they see us as a threat? Tomas wondered. If they had the sphere, they had the technology contained in it, and the psionics. But he didn’t know for how long they’d had them. He knew nothing.

He made a quick message approving of Adrian’s trade plan; he would make sure that all Clans abided by it. Adrian had the right to speak for Warpath only; even though he wasn’t a Clan Leader anymore, Tomas knew that he held a great weight with Isani, the current Clan Leader. But Tomas agreed with the trading agreement; they had a surplus of metal ore and could benefit from starting the trade with the Erasi. Then he told Adrian to find out everything he could about the Shara Daim. He wanted to know as much about them before they met.

Then he recorded another message for the Sixth Fleet, which had arrived in Sol a month ago, letting Fleet Commander Johanna Stern know about the Erasi, and that she should start patrolling that side of their border.

Finished with Adrian’s messages, Tomas turned to the requests from the Trivaxians. They wanted permission to colonize another three systems, two which they wanted to turn into mining systems in order to fuel their rapid expansion. Tomas approved their request, but added the condition that one of those systems they delegate solely for the trade that would soon start with the Erasi. The Trivaxian Clan still didn’t quite match the mining productions from other Clans, and they too were bound by the trade agreement.

Then he started reviewing the reports on the Furvor. The avian-like race had been isolated on their own planet for the past sixteen years, as punishment for attacking the Trivaxians. But they had done everything Tomas had asked of them. Their society had been rebuilt from scratch. They were more Empire now than Furvor. And he had been thinking about cutting their punishment short and accepting them into the Empire now. After all, wasn’t the complete eradication of their former society punishment enough? He keyed his recorder again and sent out a message to the genetics center in Olympus City, telling them to start perfecting the immortality treatment for the Furvor. That was one more thing that he needed for everyone that joined.

The Trivaxians had already received theirs and would no longer age. But for them, he had to establish other laws, ones concerning births. They were not allowed more than a set quota of children per year, at least until they got to the point where they could sustain such growth.

After he finished with all that, he started on the last thing on his agenda: the Sowir, Nel, and Guxcacul. He knew that he needed them in the Empire, especially now when he knew what existed out there. He could get the Nel from Nelus and the Guxcacul to join, he was sure of that. But not if he tried to bring in the Sowir. And he knew that eventually he would need to do that. Maybe not for a long time yet, but a couple hundreds of years down the road, it would become a necessity. He couldn’t keep them isolated in their home system forever.

And they had proven surprisingly useful. They had been building civilian and cargo ships for the Empire in the shipyards that Adrian had left alone when he’d taken the system. And Tomas had allowed them to expand them a bit. So far, they had been acting very remorseful, and were eager to aid in any way possible. But the Sowir were very different from the other former Consortium races; they had moved on, and were focusing on the future. Nelus and the Guxcacul were still stuck in the past.

It would be a very hard conversation.

***

August; Tarabat

Adrian walked from the dropship to the bar that was just around the corner from where they had rented a pad. They were living out of the dropship, as it did have rooms, instead of going up to the Veritas every day. And so far they had made many contacts with the trading guilds. Once it had gotten out that they’d made a deal with one of the trading guilds, others had reached out seeking to get into trade with a new player and hopefully get an exclusive deal for their corporation or guild.

They had made a few deals—nothing on the same level as the one with the first one, but Adrian had permission from Tomas to promise a few things.

But sadly they were still not closer to the finding out about the Ra’a’zani. None of the contacts they made knew anything about them. There were a few whispers about a race that was engaged in a war with the Shara Daim, but no one knew if they were the same race that Adrian and his people were interested in. And information on the Shara Daim themselves was very limited; they kept their borders tight, only allowing a few trading partners entrance into their territory. And those trading guilds were the most powerful ones, which Adrian had no access to, as they were still new and had little to offer those guilds.

“Adrian?” Iris said through his implant.

“Yes, Iris?”

“I found something interesting in the Erasi net.”

“Concerning what?”

“One of their founding races, called Uvaramo.”

“What about them?” Adrian asked.

“They are very reclusive, but I have found some images of them. They bear a striking resemblance to one of the Union races, Loraru, the ones that built the ship Olympus found on Earth,” Iris said.

“Really?” Adrian said, surprised. “That could mean that the Union managed to survive their attackers.”

“Or that they fractured, and some survivors found refuge with the Erasi,” Iris added.

“That is possible too. Keep looking, try to find out more,” Adrian said as he reached his destination.

He entered the bar, and was immediately assaulted by exotic and unpleasant scents. He consciously tuned out his sense of smell, so that he didn’t need to smell the odors. He walked over to one of the aliens sitting alone at a table, a nasty-looking drink in her hands.

“Narateth,” Adrian said to get her attention. “Your message said that you had news?” Adrian asked the alien as she slurped the liquid through one of her slim trunk-like appendages. Adrian grimaced at the slurping sound. Narateth was of a race called the Jugat. They weren’t a part of the Erasi; their race didn’t really have a government or even held territory. Instead, their people lived spread out over the Erasi territory in family units, which usually numbered in dozens. They held businesses, providing a wide range of services on Erasi hub worlds. Narateth and her family served as mediators, usually employed by races new to the Erasi to help them navigate through the complex workings of Erasi trading systems.

The Jugat were another bipedal race, with two trunk-like appendages that they could use to drink located below their wide mouths. They had two eyes slightly bulged out of their head and to the side, giving them a faint fish-like appearance. Their skin was rough and thick, grayish in color. The tallest Jugat Adrian had seen was Narateth’s brother, Suthat, who was about Adrian’s height, a bit over 180 cm.

Narateth glanced at him and opened her mouth to speak while her trunk kept slurping her drink. “News, yes. Sit, sit.” Her voice and language translated directly into Adrian’s brain via the Erasi translating device on his temple.

Adrian sat on the bench. This bar catered to mostly bipeds, and with the many different shapes and forms even in that category, most of the sitting apparatuses were benches that could be adjusted for height and width.

“So what is it?” Adrian asked. Narateth had been acting as his people’s agent of sorts, setting up meetings with the interested guilds, spreading the word that they were interested in information about the Ra’a’zani and the Shara Daim and that they were willing to trade for it. Obviously they’d had a few come to them trying to scam them, but so far Narateth had proven very good in weeding out them.

“The people from the Loksi Corporation have reached out,” she said as she finished with her drink. She removed her trunk from the glass, then put a hand in one of her pockets, brought out a small chip, and paid for the drink using the small computer on the table.

“Finally,” Adrian said. “Do we know what they want?”

“No, they have invited you to their headquarters. Only you,” Narateth said. “It was much faster than what I anticipated; they rarely deal with new races unless they have funds to purchase their time. Something about you has intrigued them.”

“When?”

“In five days’ time. You may bring your companions, but they will not be allowed inside the building itself,” Narateth answered.

“And you have no idea what they might want? They do know that we will not trade in technology?” Adrian asked.

“They are not interested in that. Technology inevitably finds its way; you will not hold it secret for long. As to what they do want, I don’t know; you will have to find out on your own.”

Adrian sighed. “Very well. Can you try and find something more? We have a bit more time.”

“Of course,” Narateth said.

“Good. Then meet us at our dropship in five days.”

***

Aileen and Gotu walked the merchant streets of Tarabat. All around them were stores and businesses that sold a wide variety of things, from clothes that could be adapted on the spot for your species to ornaments and art. But they were here to look at weapons. There were many stores that sold handheld weapons in small amounts, just as there were stores that were fronts for much larger enterprises that could produce enough weapons to arm the entire population of Sanctuary.

Aileen and Gotu entered one of the stores that sold weapons for personal use; they were here to buy samples. With their fabricating technology, they didn’t need vast amounts; once they knew all the components, they could make them themselves.

They were met with an alien of a species that neither Aileen nor Gotu were familiar with, and he, she, or it took them to the section that had weapons designed for use by the races similar to Nel or human. Then he left them alone to browse. There were holograms that explained each weapon above them, which included footage of them being used.

“I don’t see any projectile weapons here,” Gotu noted.

“No, it looks like other races prefer energy weapons,” Aileen said. “Which isn’t really surprising, they are more price effective. You don’t need to manufacture tons of ammunition.”

Gotu reached down and picked up a handheld weapon. “A sonic stun gun. Effective against a majority of known races. Great for use by security forces or for nonlethal control of the population,” Gotu read off the hologram above while a video played of it being used against a group of people that had apparently been protesting something.

“It is effective,” Aileen said as the video finished and restarted from the beginning.

“That it is,” Gotu agreed.

They moved on, looking at other weapons. They didn’t really find anything that was more advanced than their weapons. Different, yes, but most of the weapons available were weaker than what the Empire had. They moved on to the armor and suits section, and found that all of their armor and suits were designed to protect from energy weapons. The Empire’s projectile weapons would cut through them like they weren’t even there.

They did find a couple of small deployable energy shields, which they purchased. But in the end, they left disappointed. The Erasi had little that was far more advanced than the Empire’s technology, at least from those that were available to the public. Aileen was sure that their best stuff was reserved for their military, but what they had available for the public was a reflection of their doctrine and weapons focus. And both Aileen and Gotu agreed that the Empire had far more extensive weapons technology.

After visiting a few more shops, they decided to go back to the ship. There was nothing else for them to check out.

Chapter Thirty-Five

Five days later – Tarabat

A violet flash of light announced the arrival of three Shara Daim vessels. Anessa watched as the space around the Bloodbringer, Deathcall, and Unbowed changed as they arrived in the Tarabat system. Immediately, the three large vessels were noticed by the large defense station protecting this entrance point. Anessa’s people sent their identifications and announced their intentions. Almost immediately, they were given permission to proceed to the planet.

Anessa studied the system, looking at all the arrays of ships moving about it. Her ship, the Bloodbringer, was the largest in the system, outmatching the two Erasi protectors. Her escorts, the Deathcall and the Unbowed, were smaller than Bloodbringer by almost a half, but it didn’t matter—all three were ships made for war. Part of a Legion of the Shara Daim, and none would dare take them on lightly.

Anessa accessed the Tarabat net, searching through lists of Erasi corporations that were most likely to have the information that she needed, and found only one that fit her criteria—the Loksi Corporation. She would need to pay an insane amount of credits just to get an audience with the Gatrey, the Erasi race that ran all their information-gathering agencies. But she was confident that they would have the information she was seeking.

Seeking the aid of the Erasi would cost her more than just credits, though. Aid from outsiders would erode her standing among the other Dai Sha. But she did not have the luxury of searching for the Ra’a’zani system by system, not when the Elders had ordered her to locate the Human homeworld. The times when they had been Dai Sha were long gone; they cared little for personal honor. Dai Sha could understand their eagerness to get their hands on the Human device, but she would not have been willing to abandon her blood call in order to do it. But their order had made her desires meaningless. She might have held almost as much power as any one of the Elders, but when they spoke for the good of the Shara Daim, even a Dai Sha bowed.

She composed a request and sent it to the Loksi offices. By the time she arrived at the planet, she would have an appointment. She would finally be able to finish the quest the Elders had given her, and then return to her true mission: wiping out the Ra’a’zani.

***

Adrian and his people walked over to the Loksi headquarters, which was relatively close to their location. The six of them were led to the building by Narateth. Once they arrived, Adrian was allowed in, leaving his people behind. Akash and Sora took positions close to the entrance and watched him enter with Narateth.

Once inside, Narateth led him to an alien of a species he was not familiar with, and then he was led the rest of the way by it. They arrived to one of the private rooms and Adrian entered. The room had no furniture and was completely empty. As the door behind him closed, the door across from him opened and a short alien entered the room. Adrian recognized the species as Gatrey, one of the founding members of the Erasi. As it entered, Adrian felt a shiver pass over him.

He had a large, bulbous head with big, round eyes, a short mouth, and two nostrils. Its skin was sickly green, and its body looked very weak; its limbs were thin, as was its body. The top of its head came to Adrian’s nose level. It wore a loose robe-like piece of clothing, and had no weapons that Adrian could see. Adrian had not been allowed to carry weapons inside, although they didn’t comment on his Sentinel suit.

“Greetings, Adrian of the Empire,” the alien said. “My name is Hanaru. I will be conducting our business today.”

“Greetings,” Adrian said as he studied the alien. “Can I assume that you already know what information we seek?”

“It would be preferable if you state your need, as to avoid any misunderstandings,” Hanaru said.

“We seek any information about the race that calls itself Ra’a’zani, specifically the location of their worlds. Also anything about their technology, warship numbers, and so on,” Adrian said.

Hanaru’s big eyes blinked slowly. “Is that all?”

Adrian hesitated for a moment before adding one more thing. “We are also interested in knowing more about the Shara Daim. But that information is not as important as that about the Ra’a’zani.”

“Really? I would have thought that you would show more interest about the Shara Daim; they have a striking resemblance to you and your Nel race.”

“It is an interesting coincidence only,” Adrian lied.

Hanaru remained silent, and Adrian felt the same shiver again. Then he realized what was happening and slammed his defenses down on his mind. Hanaru’s eyes focused somehow more intently on him, and then he felt him reach out again with his mind.

“So, you are more like the Shara Daim than we realized,” Hanaru sent.

Adrian narrowed his eyes at the alien, and then reached out with his own mind.

“What do you mean?”

“There are very few races that possess these kinds of abilities. Your physical resemblance to them had intrigued us. We wanted to know if there was a connection.”

“We are not the same species,” Adrian sent.

“No, we have acquired samples, and your biological structure is different. But there are still irregularities; we wanted to make sure.”

Adrian remained silent and studied the alien. After a time, he continued.

“You wish to know about the Ra’a’zani?” Hanaru asked, and Adrian felt him use his telepathy. A moment later, a hologram appeared between them, showing the Milky Way galaxy. Then it started zooming in at the area of space they were now. Finally, it stopped and showed an area of space that he recognized. In front of him stretched the Empire’s territory. It wasn’t a complete map, though; it lacked the area that was former Consortium territory, and Sanctuary was missing a marker—only the nebula was shown.

“You know a lot about us,” Adrian commented.

“Knowledge is our purpose. Your rapid expansion has been noticed,” Hanaru responded. Then the map zoomed out, and a series of systems along the edge of the Orion spur lit up, about four hundred light years from Sol. “These are the remaining Ra’a’zani systems.”

“Remaining?” Adrian asked.

“The Ra’a’zani made the mistake of attacking a Shara Daim scientific outpost. The Shara Daim have been at war with them for some time, and have wiped out most of the Ra’a’zani clans. But those that remain are hidden; their territory is spread out, and the Shara Daim have not had any luck in locating the remainder on their own.”

Hearing that, Adrian felt a burden lift of his chest. They had been worried that the Ra’a’zani would be a threat. But if this was true, they were almost beaten. He needed to send a message to Tomas and see what their next step would be. Probably contacting the Shara Daim and getting them to help find the slaves—unless they already had, in which case, why hadn’t they returned them to Sol?

“Thank you for this information, but I doubt that you are just willing to give me this data,” Adrian sent.

“We wish something in return. An exchange of information. Your Empire is spreading anti-spinward, in an area we have little influence and knowledge about. We want safe passage for our exploration ships through your territory, and a sharing of information concerning any new powers you encounter in that area of space.”

Adrian looked at him, surprised. It was far less than what he had imagined, and within what Tomas had allowed Adrian to give.

“That can be arranged,” Adrian said. Hanaru took out a datachip and offered it to Adrian as the hologram disappeared. “That is all?” Adrian asked, referring to the comments about the Shara Daim, human, and Nel connection.

“The Shara Daim guard their secrets vehemently. We know enough to be sure that there is a connection between you. But in the grander scheme of things, it is insignificant, a scientific matter. Not one that threatens the Esari.” With that, Hanaru turned and left the room. Adrian looked at the closed door for a moment before turning and leaving the room. He exited the building and he and his people left.

Chapter Thirty-Six

Anessa exited her shuttle, followed by Do Sun Arikas and two Va Sun. All of them were wearing their Shur At, the weapons and protections that they wore in battle. The Shur At was not active, so it hung around their bodies like a simple garb. But with a thought, Anessa could turn it into armor that encased her body, could have it mold into powerful energy weapons. She had always believed it to be one of her people’s greatest inventions. But after she’d learned more about the device, she knew that it, like so many other technologies they possessed, had come from their ancestors.

Their shuttle had landed close to the Loksi headquarters; it took them only a few minutes to get to their destination. At the entrance, she turned to Do Sun.

“Do you have everything you need?” she asked.

“Yes, Dai Sha, I have the list,” Do Sun answered. While she talked to the Gatrey, he and the two Va Sun would arrange for supplies for their Legion. She wanted to end the Ra’a’zani as fast as possible; already her delay had started whispers from the other Dai Sha.

“Good, I’ll meet you back at the shuttle,” Anessa said, and entered the building as the three of them went the other way to meet with the trading guilds. She needed no guards; she was probably the strongest of the Dai Sha.

Once inside, she was led to an empty room, and as she entered, the doors on the other side opened and a Gatrey entered.

“Dai Sha. My name is Hanaru. It is an honor to speak with you in person,” he sent. Anessa fought back the impulse to squash him for his presumptuousness of speaking to her with the Sha. But she reined in herself. The Esari was powerful, and the Gatrey held great power in it, even though they liked to pretend that they were simple information brokers. They were the Esari’s spies and scouts.

“I am in need of information,” Anessa said, refusing to acknowledge him.

She felt him close off his welcoming aura. “How may we help the Shara Daim?”

“I seek the Ra’a’zani, the race we are at war with. The locations of their worlds,” Anessa sent.

“Well, that is interesting,” Hanaru said, and she caught a brief taste of amusement from him.

“What is interesting?” Anessa sent.

“You are the second person today to ask that information from me.”

Anessa frowned. “Who was the first?”

“We value the privacy of our clients very much,” he said. Anessa prepared to press him, when he added, “Although the person very much resembled a Shara Daim.”

Anessa froze. She glared at the tiny alien. “What do you mean?”

She felt another rush of emotions from the Gatrey; he was studying her, and was very much interested in her reaction to his words. “The person asked about the Ra’a’zani worlds as well, and he looked very much like you. Shorter, with different eyes and skin color, but everything else was the same.”

Realization came to Anessa immediately. That could only be another descendant of the People. The Humans were slaves, but did some escape? Or was it the third race? Hanaru continued, all the way studying her closely.

“They are from an Empire anti-spinward from here, and are new to our sectors. Why they wanted to know about the Ra’a’zani, I do not know.”

“You said that they were here today? Are they still on the planet?” Anessa both spoke and sent.

“I do not know,” Hanaru said. Anessa felt the lie.

“Where are they?” Anessa said forcefully, drawing on the Sha and smashing through the Gatrey’s defenses, entering his mind.

She felt his shock, but she pushed it aside and searched his memories, looking for whoever it was that he had spoken with. And then she found the memory. The being he had been talking with was a Human. She couldn’t make out the conversation; the Gatrey was strong and was fighting her probe. But she moved forward. She found him ordering his people to follow the Human and his party. There were more than one. She drew more of the Sha and dug out the information she was looking for—the Human was still on planet. And he was in a local establishment.

She was about to try and dig deeper, find everything that this Gatrey knew, when he pushed back. A resonating pain smashed into her mind, but she shielded most of it. The Gatrey had regained his wits and was fighting back. She reached to the Sha and threw him across the room, breaking the connection.

“You have made a mistake, Dai Sha,” he ground out as he got to his feet, alert. “Your agreement with the Erasi prohibits you from using your power to harm our citizens.”

“Your threats don’t faze me, Gatrey. You should have known better than to try and play with a Dai Sha. And you should not have lied to me.”

Anessa turned and left the alien there in the room. No one tried to stop her as she left the building and made her way towards the last known location of the Human. She got her directions from the Erasi net and cut through the throngs of aliens walking around her. There was a Human on this world, and she needed to get to him. Find out the location of their homeworld and recover the device of the People. And anyone that stood in her way would die.

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Adrian sat in the bar with Narateth, finalizing their transaction, and was waiting for Aileen and the rest to get back. They would be leaving soon, but there were still a few things to take care of concerning the deals they’d made. Akash was sleeping outside the bar, while Sora had gone with Aileen.

“That is the last of your pay. I’ve added some extra for the great service,” Adrian said as he transferred credits from his chip to hers.

“Thank you, it has been good working with you. I will spread the word that you pay well and are fair. And I hope you recommend me to any of your people coming this way,” Narateth said.

Adrian smiled. “Of course.”

Narateth stood to leave, but then her eyes wandered and fixed on something behind him, and her entire body froze. Adrian stood and turned, only to see a tall obsidian-skinned woman with a shaved head walking up towards him. Immediately, he recognized that she must be Shara Daim. She reached him and stopped, looking down at him.

“You are a human?” she asked, her voice melodic and yet somehow cold.

“Yes,” Adrian said simply, and tried to think through the possibilities. He hadn’t planned on getting in the contact with the Shara Daim, not before they knew more about them. And she knew that he was a human. How does she know? he thought, just as her hand landed on his shoulder.

“I have questions for you,” she said, and started pulling him with her. “You are coming with me.”

Adrian reached up and broke her hold, taking a step back. “That,” he said, pausing for effect, “is no way of making new friends.”

“I don’t have the time nor patience to explain things to you. I need information that you possess. Either you come willingly or I will take you by force.” She took a step towards him, and Adrian retreated a step back. The people in the bar had pulled back, and others were leaving.

“Wait, you obviously know about my race, and by your reaction I can see that you have knowledge about Axull Darr and...” Adrian stopped as he saw her eyes widen. She stopped, and Adrian realized that that had been the wrong thing to say, just as he felt her pick him up from the floor with the Sha and then bring him closer.

“You know? How do you know?” she demanded. “You are slaves to the Ra’a’zani!” She looked him in the eyes, and then something powerful smashed into his mind, trying to get in.

For a moment, Adrian was taken aback, surprised. And then he recovered. The training he had received from Lurker in the Depths, the most powerful Sowir telepath that had ever lived, came rushing back to him. He slammed his will against her attempt and threw her out.

That staggered and released her hold on him, dropping him to the floor. She looked at him and her clothes started to change. “By force it is,” she said. Her clothes flowed as if they were made from liquid, until she became entirely covered in a smooth, metallic-looking black suit.

She jumped forward, throwing a punch at his head, but to Adrian the attack was telegraphed. He moved out of the way with ease. He felt her try to grab him with her mind again, but this time he was ready. He negated her attempts and jumped back, creating more distance between them. He gave the command to his Sentinel suit for it to go into battle mode, and scales started cascading over his body. He used his implant and sent a request for help to Aileen.

The Shara Daim obviously wasn’t going to let his armor finish encasing him; instead of trying to grab him, she threw a kinetic blast at him. Adrian jumped to the side, evading, as tables and benches that were behind him flew away and hit the wall.

Adrian knew better than to try and grab her telekinetically. What he did instead was grab a table close and flip it at her as she was moving towards him. The table hit and did nothing; it broke on her body, not even staggering her. She came in close and started throwing punches at him. Adrian, now encased in his Sentinel armor, blocked.

Each hit felt as if a sledgehammer struck him; he could feel it vibrate through his bones. She is stronger than me. So he switched tactics and instead of blocking started evading and deflecting. But she proved incredibly fast, and he couldn’t put enough distance between them. Each time he tried, she would close it with a step.

She was bigger, stronger, and faster than him. Standing at least 240 cm tall compared to his 184 cm, she had both reach and power behind her attacks.

Adrian tried to fire off a kinetic blast at her torso, but she twisted away and swiped her hand at his shoulder, hitting him and throwing him across the room. Adrian hit the wall, stunned. He raised his head only to see her charging at him.

Time slowed down as he increased his mind’s processing speed. He studied her. He didn’t know why she was coming after him, but she intended to take him with her. And he would not allow that. She was stronger than him, faster than him, but her fighting style was transparent. Her attacks were wide, fast, and powerful; he had no problem seeing them. It was not designed to fight others like her, he realized. The attacks she most often used were from above swiping down, using gravity and her entire body’s strength to strike.

He saw the style in his mind’s eye, and he understood it. It was designed to fight non-humans. There he had the advantage. Human martial arts had been perfected for the single purpose of defeating other humans, which the Shara Daim was very much like.

But there was the other problem: she had the Sha. And hers was more powerful. He couldn’t match her there. He needed to buy time until his people arrived.

But in order to survive, he needed to react faster, to strike perfectly every time. Adrian studied the room around him—it was almost empty. It hadn’t been more than fifteen seconds since their battle had started. He needed processing power. Color disappeared from his world. Objects that he didn’t need to see disappeared too. Finer details left his sight. And she sharpened.

He stood up. His attacker moved to attack, her fist coming down from above. Adrian stepped in and punched her in the jaw from below. Her head snapped back and she staggered a step, recovering almost immediately. Adrian didn’t let up, throwing punches at her torso, pushing her back. She swiped with her hand from the side, but Adrian ducked beneath, hitting her in the kidney area. As her leg rose to kick at him, he dropped to the floor beneath it and swiped at her other leg. She lost her balance and fell to the floor.

He knew that he hadn’t done much damage, so he went for her head, hitting her a good two times before a blast threw him backwards. He caught himself and oriented so that he landed back on his feet. But before his feet even touched the ground, she grabbed him telekinetically, pulling him towards her and smashing him with her fist as he was flying through air.

He hit the ground hard, and she straddled him, pinning his arms with her thighs and holding his legs in place with the Sha.

“You are good, but you don’t know how to use your power. Stop struggling or I wi—” She was interrupted mid-sentence as a massive shape moving incredibly fast slammed into her. Akash closed his jaws around her arm as he dropped on her. Adrian got to his feet just as she broke Akash’s grip and threw him telekinetically away from her. The massive wolion wasn’t really thrown as much as pushed across the floor a few meters away. Adrian crashed into her from the side, picking her up and then slamming her into the floor, cracking it.

He pulled back and started raining down punches on her head. But her armor protected her. She closed her hand around his elbow and then punched him in the head with other arm as she twisted and changed their positions.

Akash jumped her from behind again, but this time she caught him mid-air with the Sha and threw him across the room. She took hold of Adrian’s head and started beating it down against the floor. A quarter of his vision disappeared as she dented his armor and destroyed the nano-cameras there. He tried to shake her off, but with no success. Then he started drawing on his already half-spent energy supplies.

She hesitated as she noticed what he was doing, but she was too late. He released an energy blast all around him, throwing her back and pushing himself off the floor. He stood and tried to shake off his dizziness. The Shara Daim was leaning against the wall when Akash closed his jaws around her leg, clamping down and pinning her in place. She started raining down punches on his head.

Adrian jumped forward, kicking her in the torso and banging her back against the wall. He tried to hit her again in the head, but she sent an attack against his mind, distracting him enough to slam another kinetic blast in, throwing him backwards.

As he was getting up, another teal-colored shape entered the room, moving quickly and directly towards the Shara Daim. Sora bit down on her arm and started pulling on her. Aileen entered directly behind, her Sentinel armor already in battle mode. She went straight for the Shara Daim, hitting her in the head with her fist.

Adrian started towards them just as the Shara Daim punched Aileen in the head so hard it threw her backwards at least three meters. Then Adrian felt a familiar buildup of Sha energy. She sent out a wave around her, sending tables, benches, and everything else flying away from her. He was hit by a nearby table, and Akash was dislodged and flew away as well.

Sora, on the other hand, held on to the arm. Adrian ran forward again before she could hit Sora. He grabbed hold of her other arm, and she headbutted him, breaking even more of his vision. He staggered, but Aileen reached her and threw a kinetic blast point blank at her head, smashing the Shara Daim’s head into the wall. Adrian used his imp and removed his helmet; it was only hampering his vision now. But without it, he needed to be much more careful.

The Shara Daim recovered from Aileen’s attack immediately and threw out a psionic that he was unfamiliar with. She raised her open fist and then closed it. Aileen’s hand was crushed as if it were made out of paper. Adrian heard her scream and she staggered back just as another kinetic blast picked her up from her the floor and sent her flying backwards. Adrian turned sideways, putting his right hand behind him and drawing on the remainder of his energy. He ran towards the Shara Daim, just as Akash jumped from the side. He bit on her shoulder and brought her down on her knees. Her head turned towards Akash, and Adrian felt her draw on her energy to use the Sha.

But then Adrian was there. He raised his hand, and he noticed the moment when the red mist on his palm drew the Shara Daim’s attention. She tried to twist away, but the two wolions had her fixed. The mist changed, turned into plasma just as he pointed his palm at her head.

The red plasma bolt hit her helmet; it charred but didn’t break. Adrian put his hand on her shoulder, jumped, and slammed his knee into her head. The helmet cracked, and he saw her feel the effects. Suddenly, Adrian and the wolions flew away from her—not pushed from her, but pulled from behind. They crashed into each other three meters away, along with several tables that had been drawn to the same point. They dropped to the floor in a tangled mess.

Adrian pushed Akash off of him and glanced at his opponent, who was standing and walking towards him. He could see that she was hurt, but it wasn’t enough. Adrian was exhausted; using the plasma had hurt him. He glanced at Aileen on the floor, who was still in agony.

She raised him off the floor telekineticaly and started moving him closer to her. Adrian struggled, but he didn’t have the strength or energy to resist. With no other option, he triggered the command on his imp. The NX-02 entered his system. He felt on fire. Color returned to the world, and he felt strong again.

He sent out a wave of telekinetic energy, distrupting her hold on him, and dropped to the ground. Then he got to his feet and charged. She tried to grab him, hold him, but his reserves were replenished. He was strong. He was powerful. He threw a kinetic blast that hurled her back against the wall. He telekinetically spread her arms and legs, bound them to the crumbling wall. She sent out a surge with her telepathy, but it wasn’t focused on him, so he ignored it. And then he reached her.

She tried again to telekinetically grab him, but he shrugged off her attempt. He jumped and smashed his knee against her helmet again, then punched her. His fists were like sledgehammers smashing into her helmet. Once, then again and again, each punch thrown with the perfect movements of his body. On the seventh strike, her helmet broke. The smooth-looking faceplate shattered into pieces and he saw one half of her face.

Her one visible eye looked at him dazedly. And Adrian punched her, and then again and again, until she lost consciousness. Finally she slumped, her body relaxed, and she remained in position, only held up by his power.

Adrian took a step back. He still had strength; the drug was still in his system. He heard footsteps. Gotu and Björn entered, breathing heavily. Adrian looked around; the bar was torn to pieces. He looked at Gotu and Björn and realized that barely a minute had passed since Aileen had arrived. She was much faster than them, and had left them behind.

Aileen got to her knees and Gotu reached her.

“Are you alright?” he asked.

“Yes, it just hurts so much,” she ground out, retracting her helmet.

Adrian looked at the Shara Daim still suspended against the wall. He released his hold and caught her as she fell, then motioned to Sora to approach. He put her on the wolion’s back and turned to Gotu.

“We are leaving, now,” Adrian said.

Gotu looked at the form slumped over Sora. “Why are we taking her?” he asked.

“She attacked me once she learned that we know about Axull Darr. And I intend to find out why.”

Chapter Thirty-Eight

Arisak Do Sun heard the telepathic cry for help from his Dai Sha and abandoned everything that he was doing. He and the two Va Sun ran as fast as they could towards the source of the cry. He was in panic, wondering what could have made a Dai Sha send such a cry for help. When they arrived, they saw aliens standing in front of a building. What they found inside was a destroyed alien bar, but no sign of the Dai Sha. The aliens that had gathered moved out of his way, afraid. He approached the crowd.

“What happened here?” he demanded. But no one came forward. Losing his patience, Arisak reached for one of the aliens and raised it off the ground. Immediately, it started speaking, telling him that she had been taken in the direction of the landing pads. Signaling the two Va Sun, they ran there, only to find no sign of her.

Do Sun found one of the aliens in charge of the landing area and demanded to know if he had seen anything. After some intimidation, he admitted to seeing the Dai Sha taken on board one of the alien shuttles. He demanded to know which ship they were from. The alien checked the records, and after he got that information, they boarded their own shuttle on the way to the Bloodbringer. The aliens that had taken their Dai Sha would not get away.

***

Veritas

The moment their dropship landed, Adrian and the rest exited it. They were met with people from medical and Warpath warriors that took the Shara Daim. They would keep her sedated until Adrian could fabricate a device that would drain her energy at the same rate she recovered it. He had it used on himself when he’d been undergoing the operation that augmented his body; he would need a more powerful version for the Shara Daim, though.

Aileen, Sora, and Akash went with them. Aileen would need to have parts of her hand regrown, and the wolions were bruised badly. With Akash wobling on his feet. Aileen would spend at least a month with it in the healing tank. Adrian knew the feeling; he had shattered his own hand using psionics, long ago.

Adrian, Gotu, and Björn got on the lift going to the command deck.

“Iris, get us ready to go. Contact the Erasi and tell them that we are leaving,” Adrian said.

“Do you think that they will try to stop us?” Björn asked.

“I doubt it. They don’t care as long as we don’t break the trading agreements. But just in case, I want us ready to run. They should have already learned about what happened,” Adrian answered.

“The Erasi command gave us permission to break orbit,” Iris said as she appeared in front of him.

“Good,” he said, and grimaced at the pain in his side. He was not unscathed.

“You should go to medical,” Gotu said.

“Not until we are out of the system.”

They arrived at their destination and Adrian sat in the chair on the dais. The ship was already moving out of Tarabat high orbit and towards the hyperspace barrier.

Iris appeared at his side. “Adrian, three ships have just started moving towards us on a direct course.”

“Erasi flotilla?” Adrian asked.

“No, the Erasi net identifies them as Shara Daim,” Iris responded, and changed a part of the holo surrounding him to show him the ships. Two ships were smaller than Veritas, at around 1400 meters long and about 600 wide and tall, and they looked like pointed pillars with some bulges at the base, where the drives were. The third one was larger, 3500 meters long. Its back and front looked like rectangular towers, about 800 meters wide and tall, but its middle was wider, at least 2000 meters wide, 600 on each side of the central pillar, and about 1000 tall, 100 above and below the central pillar.

“Adrian, I know that she attacked you, but we are risking war over something we know nothing about,” Gotu tried to reason.

“She wanted me to go with her from the moment she saw me. She said that I know something that she needs. And once I mentioned Axull Darr, she used the Sha to force me. There is something going on with them, and it is better that we find out if they are a threat now than to wait until they come knocking,” Adrian said as he studied the three ships.

“You are provoking them,” Gotu said.

“I am making it clear that we do not tolerate attacks on our people. If they are prepared to intimidate and bully, they should also be prepared to face the consequences of those actions.”

“We are receiving a message from the leading ship,” the Communications Handler said.

“Translate and put it on,” Adrian said. They had already purchased and implemented the Erasi translators into their own systems. The Erasi translators had a language database of every race they had ever encountered; the Veritas crew only needed to add the language of the Empire.

A voice spoke out, “To the alien ship, stop immediately, return our Dai Sha, and I promise you a quick death. Refuse, and we will come and get her ourselves, and your deaths will be anything but quick.”

Adrian glanced at the people around him. From everything they had learned about the Shara Daim, they didn’t really like other races, choosing to leave them be as long as they didn’t get in their way. But if someone was foolish to do so, they would simply destroy them. Ever since he had learned that, Adrian had had a bad feeling about them.

“Tell them that their ‘Dai Sha’ attacked a Lord Sentinel of the Empire, and that we will return her once she answers questions as to why she did that,” Adrian said, and to her credit the Comms Handler hesitated for only a moment.

Adrian turned to Iris. “Anything from the Erasi?”

“There has been communication between them and the Shara Daim ships, but they haven’t moved. And there is also a lot of chatter between their flotilla and the Loksi Corporation,” she answered.

Adrian quirked an eyebrow. The Loksi Corporation was supposed to be independent, but it seemed like they were more than that. Adrian was not an idiot; he knew that he was risking war with these Shara Daim, who he knew were the last race that Axull Darr had created. That did not make them good guys, though. From everything he had heard from them, they were not really altruistic. They conquered everything around them, crushing the weaker races.

But there was also the fact of this Dai Sha finding him. There were hundreds of races living on Tarabat, and new ones arrived often. He and his people were not a novelty. And she had come straight at him; she’d known he was there. Someone had told her. Something was not right, and he needed answers, even if he risked war obtaining them. He doubted that that would happen. There might be an incident, but he fully intended on returning his prisoner once he found out more.

“The Shara Daim ships are powering up weapons,” the Sensor Handler said.

“Power up the shield matrix,” Adrian ordered.

“Incoming fire!” the Sensor Handler said.

The enemy energy beam struck at the back of Veritas, and his ship shook slightly.

“Shields holding at ninety-four percent,” the Sensor Handler reported.

Adrian nodded to himself. “Erasi?” he asked. Firing a weapon in their system was forbidden.

“Still not reacting,” Iris said, and Adrian got a piece of the puzzle. For whatever reason, the Erasi would not interfere, which made him want to know what was happening. Why would she attack him at the mention of Axull Darr? Why didn’t the Loksi press him on the connection between the Shara Daim, Nel, and humans?

“Find us a clear course to the hyperspace barrier for a skim. But get us away from the stations and other ships. I don’t want to antagonize the Erasi more than this incident already has,” Adrian ordered. The Shara Daim were gaining on them; their drivers were apparently faster. The scans said that they, like the Empire, used both gravity and conventional drives in concert.

The Shara Daim fired again, all three ships this time, dropping the shield matrix to 85%.

“Should we return fire?” Gotu asked.

“No. They are not using all of their weapons, and are only trying to disable us,” Adrian said. “We will get away soon enough. I don’t want to declare war.”

“You think that kidnapping one of theirs is not enough to achieve that?” Gotu asked incredulously.

“She attacked me. If us capturing her for that is enough for war, then they planned on it from the beginning.”

“They didn’t know about us before,” Gotu said.

Adrian shook his head. “She called me a human. And she said that we were Ra’a’zani slaves. They obviously had plans for us, and I want to know what they are,” Adrian said grimly.

“The hostile ships have fired missiles!” the Sensor Handler yelled out.

“Point defense grid is online,” Iris said. Lasers reached out and took down the missiles.

“How long until we get clear?” Adrian asked.

“We will be out of the range of the stations and other ships in one minute, Lord Sentinel,” the Navigation Handler said.

The Shara Daim ships increased their rate of fire, but the Empire’s shield technology held. By the time the one minute passed, the shield was down to sixty percent.

“Ready to engage the skim drive,” the Navigation Handler announced.

“Engage,” Adrian said.

Veritas shuddered for a moment, and then they were moving faster than light inside the system. Their sensors didn’t work now; they couldn’t see anything around themselves. But that was why they always skimmed when they had a clear line of sight. A few seconds later, they stopped behind the hyperspace barrier. The Shara Daim ships were still inside it, searching for Veritas. They might have been able to follow them with sensors, but unless they could skim, they had no chance of catching them.

“Chart a hyperspace course towards the closest system. We will jump around a bit until we go back to our trans-lane route back to Sol,” Adrian ordered. And less than a minute later, they entered into hyperspace.

Chapter Thirty-Nine

Tarabat – Loksi Corporation headquarters

Arisak, Do Sun of the Shara Daim, exited the shuttle. They had returned to Tarabat following the escape of the ship that had taken the Dai Sha. The ship was powerful, and Arisak wanted to know who they were. He charged into the Loksi Corporation headquarters, followed by five Va Sun. They shoved aside the pitiful aliens in their path and moved deeper inside the building, only to be met with a group of aliens in a large receiving area—a handful of Bomtu and Ssarath, and in the middle of their group were four Gatrey, obviously the leaders.

Arisak took a step towards the middle. “Who were they, and where are they taking the Dai Sha?”

“That is no way of asking for help,” the lead Gatrey said.

“Do not play with me, Gatrey! I have no patience for your games. Tell us or we will take the knowledge from your mind!” Arisak sent, enraged.

The Gatrey watched them, and then Arisak dropped to his knees as the Gatrey blanketed the room with their Sha. Piercing pain spread through his mind as the Gatrey broke through his defenses.

“Do not threaten us, Shara Daim. For far too long have we stood by and watched you intimidate and conquer other races with your power. But we are not them; we are not defenseless.” The Gatrey’s voice echoed through his mind. “Your Dai Sha might be powerful enough to fight us off, but you are not.”

Arisak pulled on his energy and stood up, grabbing one of the aliens and lifting him off the floor, only to have another Gatrey step forward and throw Arisak aside into a wall. He held him there for a moment before releasing him.

“You do not demand here, Shara Daim. Your victories over races weaker than you have made you arrogant. You don’t think that there is anyone that can match you. Your Dai Sha believed herself the strongest. She made the mistake of assuming her target was far weaker than her, and she is now paying the price,” the Gatrey said.

Arisak got back up to his feet and saw the rest of his people released. They moved to attack, but Arisak stopped them.

“You will pay for this insult, Gatrey,” Arisak said.

“We are done with standing by as you do what you wish. Find your Dai Sha on your own; you will have no aid from us.”

Arisak snarled at the smaller alien, and then turned and left the building with his people. Once outside, he turned to one of the Va Sun.

“Spread our people, find out who the ones that took the Dai Sha were,” Arisak said.

“But the Gatrey will have surely spread the word that they should not speak with us.”

“Yes, but there are always those that are willing to speak in return for credits, and if that fails, we will dig it out of their minds,” Arisak said.

“As you order, Do Sun.”

***

Hanaru watched as the Shara Daim left his building.

“Was that wise?” his compatriot Ubvaru asked.

“War between the Shara Daim and the Erasi is inevitable. Projections show us that they will only continue to grow in power until they can no longer be stopped. It was either now or when they were ready. They don’t suffer competition,” Hanaru responded.

“Their Elder council will demand that we find their Dai Sha or they will send their Legions to our doorstep,” Ubvaru sent.

“I’ll admit, that I did not plan for. I wanted to see the Dai Sha’s reaction to the mention of the Human. I did not anticipate her acting the way she did, nor did I think that the Empire’s people would be strong enough to incapacitate and take her. I know that we wouldn’t have been able to, no matter how many people we brought against her. But it has worked in our favor,” Hanaru sent.

He had been trying to learn more about the Shara Daim ever since he’d gotten this post and had been put in charge of the planning for the inevitable war. He couldn’t resist poking at the Dai Sha once he had an opportunity. In hindsight, that wasn’t really smart. He knew stories and had read reports about the Dai Sha. They were the Shara Daim’s strongest and most powerful. She could have crushed him in an instance.

But somehow the Human had managed to subdue her. He had had help, but still. It said a lot about them. The Empire ship had already entered hyperspace. Rumors about their in-system FTL technology proved true. Their ship was powerful, too; it had shrugged off attacks of the Shara Daim warships like they were nothing. He wasn’t sure that the Erasi warships would fare as well.

“Make sure that someone leaks the information about this Empire to the Shara Daim, location and basic knowledge only. But don’t make it obvious,” Hanaru added.

“You want to point them at each other,” Ubvaru sent.

“I doubt that it will come to war; there is a connection between them. But it will make matters between them tense, especially since they kidnapped a Dai Sha. It will keep them occupied long enough for us to put things into place, get our fleets ready. And ensure that they do not unite against us anytime soon,” sent Hanaru, Weaver of the Erasi.

Chapter Forty

September; Year 54 of the Empire – Veritas

Adrian exited the med bay, where he had been checking up on Aileen. She was still asleep and in the tank, having her hand rebuilt. It would take a few more days, but it would be as good as new. He made his way towards the room they had transformed into a holding cell for the Shara Daim. She was still drugged and unconscious. He’d had the device that drained energy made, and it was now piercing through her skin and into the Nursha, draining everything that the organ attempted to store. He’d had a similar device put on him when he went through the augmentation to prevent him from unconsciously using vitakinesis and healing himself, hampering the process.

He reached the room, and saw Akash and Sora sitting in front of it. They had taken it upon themselves to guard the room. Akash had patches over two of his eyes, it would be a few days before he could use them again. And he still had problems with dizzines from the battle. Adrian motioned for the Nel guards, and they let him inside, wolions following. The only person inside was the Shara Daim, restrained on a bed angled upright at about 60 degrees.

She was dressed in one of the Empire’s black skin-suits, which was almost the same color as her skin, making it seem like it was actually her skin. They’d had to destroy her suit in order to get it off, and she had had nothing beneath it. The clothing she was dressed in now hugged her body tightly, revealing every curve and muscle of her body. Every single muscle was defined, but they weren’t bulky like those of a weightlifter. She was a big woman, tall and stocky, but still clearly had feminine features.

He took a moment to study her more closely. Her face looked hard, her features slightly different than those of humans or Nel, and was yet somehow exotically beautiful. She had eyebrows and eyelashes, unlike the Nel, who only had hair on the top of their head. Her lips were of a lighter shade than her skin, and her ear shells had a different shape. Other than that, she could pass for a human, more so than a Nel, whose gray skin color, tails, and claws made them stand out immediately. Her body was exactly like that of a human, no tail or claws, except that her feet had four toes instead of five.

When they’d fought, she had had the translating device on her temple, so after testing it Adrian had it put back on her head so that they could speak without telepathy.

Adrian walked over to her and pressed an injection gun to her neck, injecting the contents. Then he stepped back and waited. Slowly, she started moving, waking up. As she woke up, her eyes opened and looked around her. First she noticed her restraints, and then as she turned her head upwards, she noticed Sora, Akash, and finally him. The ‘whites’ of her eyes were all black; her iris was white surrounding a black pupil.

She watched him, all the while testing her restraints. He saw her muscles bulge as she tried to move. Then he saw her eyes widen for a single instant, and she lowered her head and looked at her shoulder, where the device that drained her energy was.

Adrian remained silent and watched her. He could see her thinking, evaluating her options. And soon enough, she came to the conclusion that there was nothing she could do. She turned back to him.

“You have doomed yourself, Human. You have taken a Dai Sha of the Shara Daim. Your death will not be swift. My ships will find you and free me,” she said in a melodic voice.

Adrian gazed at her unfazed. “I could say the same thing to you. You have attacked a Lord Sentinel of the Empire. The sentence for that crime is severe as well,” Adrian said in a patronizing tone.

Her face twitched, and she leaned her head forward as far as her constraints allowed her to. “Are you mocking me?” she whispered slowly.

Adrian mimicked her move, leaning down so that their faces almost touched, and whispered, “Yes, I am mocking you.”

He saw her outrage. Her face twisted, and she struggled at her restraints trying to reach him, but was unable to move any closer. Adrian remained where he was, looking at her.

“And your ships have found us; they were unsuccessful in their endeavor of freeing you. And their threats were empty,” Adrian said.

She calmed and watched him hatefully. “How long was I unconscious for?” she demanded.

Adrian tilted his head, trying to decide whether to tell her or not.

“About twenty days,” he said. The translator on her temple would make her hear her own measuring units.

He saw her surprise at that. She had really thought that her people would find her quickly.

“Now, I would like to ask you a few questions,” Adrian said.

“Better that you release me now. I might be merciful,” she said.

“I guess that means you are not going to answer. Very well, I will speak, and you chime in if you have something to add,” Adrian said, and started walking around her.

“You are of the Shara Daim, you hold a title Dai Sha. Which is apparently a big deal,” Adrian started. Her eyes followed him until he went behind her, and then continued when he emerged on the other side. “You knew that my people were called human, and you wanted something from me. I can’t imagine what that could be, but no matter. I assume that you found out about my kind from the Ra’a’zani; you have been at war with them. You either encountered those that had been taken as slaves, or you found mention of us in their data. Either way, that doesn’t matter either,” he said.

The Shara Daim remained quiet.

“What I can’t figure out is why would you try to take me? I mean, you could have just asked to meet with me, and I would have accepted. But then you attacked me once you heard me mention Axull Darr,” Adrian continued. “That means that you know everything. You have the Sha; your people must’ve heard the beacon and gained all the knowledge inside the sphere.”

Her face hardened, but she still didn’t comment.

“But why attack me because of that? You know that we are descended from the same race. And what possible information could I possess that you don’t already have?”

She glared at him and spoke, “You did not have the Sha when the Ra’a’zani conquered your world. You wouldn’t have become their slaves if you had had the knowledge. And their records say that you were bound to your home system. Did you get the Sha after?” she asked.

“After the Ra’a’zani conquered our homeworld?” Adrian asked. “Well, in a way, we did. We weren’t bound to a single world when the Ra’a’zani came, though; a part of our race had a colony far away. Once we received a message from those enslaved, we came back and defeated the Ra’a’zani. We didn’t get the Sha until recently.”

“You defeated them without technology from the People and the Sha?” she asked doubtfully.

“Yes. We did get access to the sphere after, but not because of the Sha, nor did we find the one on our homeworld. We encountered the third race that Axull Darr created. They had the device, but they too didn’t have the Sha; they discovered the sphere by accident. Then I awoke the trigger that Axull Darr placed in our DNA and gained the Sha. Now we have started triggering the change in others of my people, newborns and adults alike,” Adrian explained. It was not like any of that was a secret, a search on any of the Empire’s nets would have allowed her to learn about the Nel and human history, and he wanted to know why she had attacked him, not go to war with her people. He figured that it was a misunderstanding, and he planned on clearing everything up before he sent her back.

And Adrian was not above lying to get his way. Either the Dai Sha would realize her mistake and the Empire and Shara Daim would start a conversation. Or she would never see her people again.

“You were not born with the Sha?” she asked, surprised.

“No, I received it fifteen years ago, and my body was artificially enhanced in order for me to be able to use them effectively,” Adrian answered.

Her face twisted into something between being disgusted and impressed.

Adrian leaned towards her. “Now, will you tell me why you attacked me?”

“Your people were supposed to be slaves. I believed you an escaped slave of the Ra’a’zani,” she said hesitantly.

“That still doesn’t explain why you attacked me.”

“You are weak; you allowed yourselves to become slaves. You deserve no recognition from the true heirs,” she said.

Adrian thought about her words. It sounded like their belief system revolved around strength. That did fit into what he had already found out from the Erasi net.

“I am weak?” Adrian asked, and then motioned to her current condition.

That brought a spark of anger to her eyes. “There were more of you,” she said, and glanced at Akash and Sora, who were standing behind him.

“But still, I doubt that you can categorize us as weak.”

“No,” she said, but he could see her fighting with herself.

“Alright, we need to change gears. I don’t plan on keeping you here forever. I only took you because I wanted to know why you attacked me, and what information you wanted to claim from me. I never planned on keeping you a prisoner. Tell me, and I will release you. There is no need for the first contact between our people to go like this.”

She studied him, and he saw her thinking. Then, after a minute or two, she spoke, “I wanted to know the location of your homeworld.”

“Why? Didn’t you already know that from the Ra’a’zani?”

“The clans I destroyed had no such information, nor did they have human slaves. We only recovered information that you existed. My task was to locate the remaining Ra’a’zani clans and find the human slaves.”

“And our homeworld? Why do you need to know that?”

“The Elders of Shara Daim have charged me with finding your homeworld and your device left by Axull Darr.”

Adrian frowned. “Why would you need that? All the devices are the same.”

She remained silent. Adrian tried to think why they would need it. To keep it out of Ra’a’zani hands was a likely answer. But the Ra’a’zani couldn’t hear its beacon, even if they did have telepathy. And it was unlikely that they would find it by accident like the Nel had. And then it hit him. All the information about the Shara Daim in the Erasi net, everything that he had learned about them—they had been in space for a long time, and their technology was on the level of the Erasi, even that of the Empire.

“You lost yours, didn’t you?” Adrian asked.

She didn’t respond, but he could see the truth in her eyes.

“You wanted ours. You didn’t care that we were slaves to the Ra’a’zani. I thought you might have wanted to help us. But no, you made it clear when we first met that you don’t care about us, and again just now, when you said that we were weak. You truly believe that those weaker than you are insignificant,” Adrian said, disappointed.

She remained quiet. Adrian shook his head, then turned and left her there. She would stay his prisoner a little bit longer. He had a lot of things to think about, and a soon-to-be pissed-off Emperor to explain himself to.

Chapter Forty-One

October – Sanctuary

Tomas stood in a meeting room surrounded by his advisors. Laura and Jack sat on his left, with Sumia, Seo-yun, and Nadia on his right. All of them had just watched the holo message from Adrian; he had already seen it last night. He still couldn’t decide how he felt about it.

“Shara Daim...” Nadia said. “Adrian has probably put us on a course that will lead to war with them.”

Jack shook his head. “If what Adrian has found out is true, they will be coming for the sphere still on Earth. This would have happened even if he hadn’t taken one of theirs. They call themselves the true heirs, which should tell you everything that you need to know about them. They wouldn’t have cared that Earth was no longer enslaved by the Ra’a’zani.”

“You think that they would have attacked rather than negotiated?” Laura asked.

“She told Adrian that we were weak for allowing the Ra’a’zani to conquer us. By their belief, that makes us unworthy. You have seen the data Adrian sent from the Erasi net. They roll over anyone that they consider weak. They are bigoted and intolerant towards those not of their own kind,” Jack answered.

Sumia looked at him, seeming unconvinced. “We are very close to being their kind; we are all descendants of the People.”

“And yet the first thing this ‘Dai Sha’ did was try and kidnap Adrian, take him, and get information about Earth from him. That should tell you how much they respect us being descendants of the People,” Jack said. “If she had encountered anyone other than Adrian and his Sentinel, we wouldn’t have known anything about the Shara Daim until their ships showed up in Sol going straight for Earth.”

“I would like to see them try and find the sphere in that firestorm.” Laura snorted. “I doubt that they could even get down to the ground.”

Tomas scratched his chin. “There is no point in debating whether it was the right call or not. I put Adrian in charge of the Sentinel program because I trust his instincts. If he believes that this was the best course of action, then that is the end of discussion. Now based on his recommendations and information, we need to make a plan.”

“I’m sending two more fleets to Sol,” Laura said. “We don’t really need them in other sectors for now, and the remaining fleets can cover theirs for a time.”

“You are preparing us for war,” Seo-yun said. “Why just not return the prisoner to the Shara Daim and try to get them to talk?”

“You, better than anyone, should know how much power the knowledge in the sphere holds,” Jack answered. “I doubt that they will settle for anything other than us giving them the sphere. And what do you think they will do with it after?”

Seo-yun remained quiet, not having anything to say to that.

“Adrian has a plan,” Tomas said, “one that includes the prisoner, and I think that it is worth a try. In the meantime, we need to prepare for war. One other problem is the Erasi. They have an agenda, and we need to find out what it is.”

***

A few days later, Tomas entered another meeting room. This one was filled with very different people. On one side of the room stood three Guxcacul, representatives of their council. On the other stood three representatives of the Nelus government. Tomas stopped in front of them.

“Thank you for coming,” he said.

“Your invitation was compelling,” Sisstra, Elder of the Guxcacul, said through her translator.

“Yes, we were... intrigued,” Sestar Nimuse of the Nelus government said.

“I hope that you had the chance to read through my proposal,” Tomas said.

“We did. It is...interesting,” Sisstra said.

Nimuse turned her palms sideways, agreeing. “Yes, it is interesting. But my people worry about how much we would benefit from it.”

Tomas kept his irritation off his face. “Let’s not start with posturing. We both know that the Empire has left you behind technologically. My offer will give you everything, make you a part of Empire.”

“But you ask us to forget our traditions, beliefs, and history,” Sisstra said.

“No. I ask you to change them. I don’t ask you to forget. And tell me, what did your beliefs and traditions do for you? Did they save you from the Sowir?”

“You are asking us to join you because you need us. We have the population that you need to grow much faster,” Nimuse added.

“No, I didn’t offer you this because I need you. I offered it because I might need you. There is a difference. And you must know that your progress will never match ours now. Your territories are surrounded by mine. You will always need to deal with us. Eventually, your people will see the life in the Empire and want it. They will leave on their own and I will accept them as individuals. Why delay the inevitable? Join us now when you can still benefit from what we offer. Otherwise, you might not live long enough to see a time when your peoples become great again,” Tomas said,

“And that is the thing, isn’t it? You are offering us immortality in order to be a part of your Empire,” Nimuse said tiredly.

“I use whatever tools I have to get what I want. And I want a strong and powerful Empire that bows to no one,” Tomas said, and looked them. He had spent a lot of time studying their people and their expressions. He saw them make the decision.

Chapter Forty-Two

November; Year 54 of the Empire – Sol

Adrian walked into the holding room. The Shara Daim immediately looked at him and then at Akash and Sora, who were following him. Adrian approached her.

“How are you today?” he asked cheerfully, as he always did. And she ignored him while staring icy daggers at him, like she always did.

“Well, today I was thinking of doing something different,” he said. Since that first time, they had spoken on a few more occasions. Or rather, Adrian had spoken while she’d remained quiet.

“Are you feeling up for a walk?” Adrian asked, and saw her narrow her eyes at him. “No?” Adrian asked, and when she didn’t answer, he continued, “I was thinking that this isn’t really working—I mean, me talking and you only listening. So maybe a change in scenery would do you good.”

“How about this? I am going to release you, and we will take a walk around my ship. But you need to promise that you won’t try anything—like attacking me again,” Adrian said pointedly. “I think that you realize that even if you managed to kill me, there isn’t really anything that you can do. You don’t know how to operate this ship. There are a lot more of my people around than there is of you. And I doubt that you could kill them all, especially with no Sha. Not to mention them having weapons. I have already told you that I plan on letting you go back to your people. I just want to show you some things before that. So, what do you say?”

She glared at him a bit longer, before finally responding, “I give you my word as Dai Sha, I will not attempt to escape or harm anyone.”

Adrian nodded, and started removing her restraints. She remained motionless until the last one was removed. Then she got up from the bed and stood. Adrian looked up at her, remembering just how much bigger she was than him.

Adrian turned his back at her and started walking towards the exit, all the way letting his senses keep watch on her. After a few steps, she started following, walking past Akash and Sora, who started following a bit behind them.

They exited the holding room and entered into the hallway. Warpath warriors stood at the end of the hall with their weapons armed and ready, and as Adrian and the Dai Sha started walking down the hallway, they followed from a distance.

They walked in silence for a few minutes, until they reached their destination. They entered a large room. Adrian walked up to stand in front of the wall on the far side; the Dai Sha stopped beside him and glared at the wall.

She turned to him. “This is what you wanted to show me?”

Adrian glanced up at her, then at the wall. He sent the command with his imp, and the massive blast shield started rising up, revealing the large window that showed the outside of the ship.

The Dai Sha turned her gaze back and watched as the blast shield rose far enough to show the planet below the Veritas.

She gazed at it for a bit, and then turned to look at Adrian again. “And what is this?”

“That,” Adrian started, “is Earth, the human homeworld.”

She frowned but turned back to watch it.

Massive storms ravaged the planet. Volcanos spat fire into the air constantly, red blending with the gray of the ash and black thunder clouds.

Adrian turned to face the Dai Sha. “That is the price we paid to free our people from the Ra’a’zani,” he said grimly. “Their last act was to destroy our world, to kill billions of our people, because we defeated them. We have lost the majority of our race to them.” His voice hardened. “You called us weak, and you were right, we were weak.” He gestured to the devastated planet below. “But now this stands as a reminder of why we will never again allow ourselves to be that weak. The Ra’a’zani still have our people, and we will take them back. And you and your people will not stand in our way. We will not let you have the sphere; it is our legacy. You have lost yours.”

She looked down at him. “I have been charged with finding and bringing that device to my people. Whether you let me go or not will make no difference. The Elders want it, and they will have it.”

Adrian gazed back at Earth. “There is nothing down there that you can recover. The device is probably destroyed.”

“You have another.”

“You would rather fight us for it than approach us as friends in the hope that we would share it?” Adrian asked incredulously.

“We are the Shara Daim, heirs to the galaxy. Rivals are not tolerated,” she said.

“And you think that by saying that you will somehow convince me to give it to you?”

“It does not matter whether you give it freely or not. The Elders will send all our Legions after you; the knowledge of the People is our inheritance. Even had you not taken me, the result would have been the same.”

“How can you just give me this information? You know that we will be ready now, yes?”

“I say it because it will not matter. The Legions of the Shara Daim will take what belongs to us by the right of strength and blood, as we have always done. To bring death and to conquer is our calling.”

Adrian shook his head. “What is your name?” he asked.

She looked at him for a minute. “Anessa,” she said.

“Well, Anessa,” Adrian said resolutely, “I will change your mind. I will show you who we are, and I will prove it to you that your people are wrong in thinking they can just roll over us.”

Epilogue

January; Year 55 of the Empire – Shara Radum

Arisak, Do Sun of the Shara Daim, entered the Hall of Ages. It was an honor for one as low as he to be invited to speak with the Elders. But the nature of his news was enough to grant him entrance. He entered the inner enclave and stepped into the darkened room where the Elders waited.

“Honorable Elders, I am humbled by you allowing me into your presence,” he said as he lowered himself onto his knees.

“Rise, Arisak Do Sun,” a voice from above said, “and tell us what you have learned.”

“Dai Sha of the First Legion was taken by the people that call themselves the Empire. As our informants tell it, the ones that took her defeated her in battle. They are being said to look strikingly like us; the recordings I acquired match the images of the Humans we recovered from the Ra’a’zani databases.”

“Humans...” an Elder said. “They are slaves, and yet you say that they are a part of this Empire?”

“Yes, Elders,” Arisak said. “According to what we have learned from those willing to deal with us, it appears that the Humans were not bound to one world as the Ra’a’zani thought. Others returned and retook their home. Since then, they have spread far and wide. Their technology has jumped forward, and apparently they have awakened to the Sha.”

“That complicates things. But in the end, it doesn’t matter,” an Elder said. “Tell us of the Erasi; they have involved themselves in the matter?”

“They allowed the Empire’s ship to take the Dai Sha, and refused to give us information as to who they were. We had to search for a long time in order to find out; by that time, the Empire had escaped too far for us to follow,” Arisak said.

“We have always known that we would clash with the Erasi eventually. But for now, this Empire is a priority. We have recalled all Legions. It will take time for all of them to arrive from the edges of our territory. But once they do, we will move towards this Empire, and claim that which is ours by right.”

Arisak bowed, confused. He did not believe they were talking about rescuing the Dai Sha. But it was not his place to question the Elders.

“Thank you, Do Sun, you have served us well,” an Elder said, dismissing him.

Arisak bowed again, then turned and left the chamber. If all the Legions were being called, soon war unlike any they had waged in the last thousand years would start. And much blood would be spilled.

***

Numaraas – Erasi capital world

“The Shara Daim are mobilizing their forces,” the Gatrey sent.

“All of them?” asked the Loraru sitting at the head of the table.

“All of their Legions. They are leaving their system defense forces behind. It will take time for all their Legions to arrive in this area of space. They are far away, spread across Shara Daim territory.”

“And what is their target?”

“The Empire,” the Gatrey answered.

“Did the loss of one of their Dai Sha really push them into such a drastic direction?” the Loraru asked.

“Hanaru has sent us some more intel. As far as he can tell, it has little to do with it. He believes that something about the connection between the Humans, the Nel, and the Shara Daim is the cause.”

“Well, that gives us time, then,” the Loraru commented. “How long do you think that the Empire can hold out against the Shara Daim?”

“A while. They are close in technology, but the Shara Daim have more resources to draw on. In the end, they will overrun them,” the Gatrey answered.

“And what do the projections say about the chances that they come to a peaceful resolution?”

“There is a chance, but I have already given leave to Hanaru to do everything in his power to prevent that possibility.”

The Loraru approved. “Good. Our forces will be moving soon. If we get enough time to set things up, the Shara Daim will not have a chance of stopping us. Especially if their Legions are fighting a war with the Empire.”

“Should we offer aid to the Empire? Prolong their war?” the Gatrey inquired.

“Yes, but within reason. If they survive, we do not want to trade one Shara Daim for another. They cannot be allowed to become too powerful,” the Loraru sent.

“I’ll make the arrangements.”

*** END ***

Thank you for reading!

Book 6 of the “Rise of the Empire” coming fall 2016

Olympus – Book 1 of the “Rise of the Empire” – published June 2014

Sanctuary - Book 2 of the “Rise of the Empire” – published November 2014

Out of the Ashes – Book 3 of the “Rise of the Empire” – published April 2015

Warpath – Book 4 of the “Rise of the Empire” – published October 2015

Inheritance – Book 5 of the “Rise of the Empire” – published May 2016

If you liked the book, please consider leaving a review on Amazon. Reviews are appreciated!

Sign up for my mailing list if you want to be notified when a new book is released: Mailing List

Contact the author:

Facebook.com/ivankalauthor
ivankalrote@gmail.com